Home

Centroid v8.22 (DOS) Mill Operator`s Manual

1. Intercon Mill v6 11 Current Part E_ PART ICN Operation End N0130 Pocket Cleanout Type X Y 0010 Demo Program Rough Cuts 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 Stepover 0 1250 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 Feedrate 50 0000 H 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Finish Pass Climb 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Amount 0 0300 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home Feedrate 20 0000 il 0070 Tap 0 0000 0 0000 0 1000 ToolNumber 2 0080 Face 3 0000 6 0000 0 0000 Surface Height 0 0000 0090 Rect Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 Clearance Height 0 1000 INC 0100 Circ Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 Rapid to Depth 0 1000 INC 0110 Frame 1 7500 6 6625 0 0000 Depth Total 1 0000 INC 0120 Thread 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 per Pass 0 2500 0130 Cleanout Plunge Rate 20 0000 FI 0140 End Cleanout 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 0150 End Prog 4 0000 8 0000 Home Toggle Hale Graph ea fccer F3 F FB Fg FiO Where Rough Cuts Selects type of rough cut conventional or climb Use lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt to toggle between them Rough Cuts Stepover The distance between zigzag lines in the pocket cleanout This value should be less than the tool diameter to ensure all material is removed Rough Cuts Feedrate Speed at which cutter performs rough cuts Finish Pass Selects type of finish pass climb conventional or none at all Use lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt to toggle between them Finish Pass Amount
2. The screen shows the following keys lt F1 gt Press this key to view your part isometrically 3D An axis pointer indicates the current direction of the view To return back to the tri planar view press lt F1 gt again M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 2 5 lt F2 gt Press this key to rotate your part Use the keyboard arrow keys to rotate any direction OR lt F2 gt Press this key to change the planar view of your part The view is indicated by a TOP RIGHT or FRONT shown at the top of the screen lt F3 gt Press this key to set the range of line numbers or block numbers to graph lt F4 gt Press this key to estimate the time needed to create part It takes into account accelerations and decelerations but neglects tool change times lt F5 gt Press this key to redraw the part at any time lt F6 gt Press this key to move the part around the screen Once pressed use the crosshairs to pick a location of the part that will redraw at the center of the screen Once a section is selected press lt F6 gt again to continue panning lt F7 gt Press these keys to zoom into the part relative to the center of the screen lt F8 gt Press these keys to zoom away from the part relative to the center of the screen lt F9 gt Press this key to view the entire part fit inside the screen Turn the FEEDRATE OVERRIDE knob to control the speed of the graphing To pause the tool path turn the knob counter clock
3. Il return 1 0 for true and 0 0 for false The mathematical operators and functions are Addition or unary positive eq Equals Subtraction or unary negative ne Not equals Multiplication ge gt Greater than or equals Division gt gt Greater than R Exponentiation le lt Less than or equals mod Modulo lt lt Less than abs Absolute value not Logical not sin Sine degrees amp amp Logical and cos Cosine degrees II Logical or tan Tangent degrees and Bit wise and sqrt Square root xor Bit wise exclusive or Variable access or Bit wise or Bit wise complement Examples G91 X 13 64 Z 1 3 8 move the X axis 13 64 0 2031 units and the Z axis 1 3 8 1 375 units incrementally X SQRT ABS SIN 101 COS 102 Move X as a function of 101 and 102 3 2 04 M Series Operator s Manual User or System Variable Assignment The character is used to reference a macro or a user or system variable For variables that can be written the is used to assign to them Index Description Returns R W 1 3 Macro arguments A C R W 4 6 Macro arguments I K 1st set R W 7 9 Macro arguments D F or 2nd set of I K R W 10 3rd I G is invalid R W 11 Macro argument H or 3rd J The floating point value if R W 12 3rd K L is invalid defined by a G65 call 0 0 R W 13 Macro argument M or 4th I otherwise R W 14 4th J N is invalid R W 15
4. Operation 5 Operation 4 o Point Z bottom of hole Figure 1 Drilling cycle operation Operation 1 Position the X Y axis Operation 2 Rapid traverse to the position labeled R Operation 3 Machine hole Operation 4 Bottom hole operation Operation 5 Return to point R Operation 6 Rapid traverse to initial point M Series Operator s Manual Rapid traverse Rapid traverse cycles Regular and spot drilling cycles and air drill cycle Regular and counter boring cycles spot facing Peck and deep hole drilling cycles Tapping Right hand thread Boring cycle Boring cycle 3 2 04 12 16 Canned cycle G code syntax G X Y Z R Q P F K Se ee 2 eee Te _ Drilling Hole position Drilling data Number of Mode Data repeats Cycle codes do not have to be on the same line G__ Canned cycle G code from table 1 xX X position of the hole to be drilled 2 Y position of the hole to be drilled Z Specifies point Z in figure 1 In incremental mode Z is measured from point R In absolute mode Z is the position of the hole bottom R Specifies the distance to point R figure 1 with an absolute or incremental value Q Determines the cut in depth for the G73 and G83 cycles Determines the thread lead for G74 and G84 if Rigid Tapping is enabled In the case of Rigid Tapping Q is not modal P Sets the dwell time at the bottom of the holes for G74 G82 G84 and G89 cycles The dwell time is mea
5. By default manual axes paired by Parameter 128 are not displayed in the DRO This parameter can force display of the manual axis in the DRO if desired The parameter has the same axis mapping for each digit as shown in Parameter 128 To display an otherwise hidden manual axis set the digit corresponding to the axis number to a 1 For example 0 1000 would display axis 4 if it is a manual axis that is paired with some other powered axis Parameter 130 Z axis on off selection Parameter 131 4 axis on off selection only uses 1 s and 10 s digit These parameters control the display of the 3rd and 4th axes respectively The tens digit of the parameter value specifies the label of the affected axis when it is enabled with values 1 9 corresponding to axis labels ABCUVWXYZ The ones digit specifies the label of the axis when it is disabled with 0 0 meaning the axis is not switchable 1 0 meaning it turns off N a 2 0 meaning manual M and a 3 0 meaning 2 axis Z P130 also supports additional modes depending upon the value of the hundreds digit For example a value of 92 will toggle between a 3rd axis Z and a 3rd axis M and power off just the Z axis A value of 192 will toggle the 3rd axis between Z and M and power off all axes A value of 392 will toggle the 3rd axis label between Z and M and power off all axes and receive its positions from the 4 axis encoder input When P130 P131 is configured for axis switching the
6. DRO Units Specifies the Units used for the DRO in CNC7 It affects the corresponding field in the Control Configuration of CNC7 Machine Units Specifies the Units used for machining It affects the corresponding field in the Control Configuration of CNC7 The posted G code will contain a G20 for Inches mode and a G21 for Metric mode Help Icons always on Toggle between yes or no Selecting yes means that help information will always be displayed when editing operations No means that you will have to press a key to get help Whether set to yes or no help screens can always be toggled on or off by pressing the lt F5 gt key when editing an operation F10 Post Choosing lt F10 gt will post the current program Posting is the process of converting the operations into G codes When the posting process is completed Intercon is exited The Intercon program is also saved as part of the posting M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 5 Insert Operation When you press lt F2 gt from the Edit Operation screen or when you choose New Part from the Main Screen you will see the Insert screen Intercon Mill v8 11 Current Part E_ _PART ICN Operation End Type x Y Select operation to insert 0010 Demo Program 0020 End Prog 0 0000 0 0000 Home Other F Rapid Linear H FZ Arc Tool ES E3 F F5 Cutter Subpgm Comp oe F7 Fg The new operation will
7. Length The length of the rapid traversal When combined with the angle of the current move the corresponding X and Y coordinates for the destination will be calculated and placed in the correct fields The Z destination will remain unchanged however The lt F1 gt key toggles between incremental and absolute positioning modes in any of the fields where a positional dimension is needed For example X Y or Z axis dimensions can all be in incremental or absolute coordinates or a mixture of both The length and angle fields cannot be incremental These fields are absolute values The lt F2 gt key may be used on the Z destination field to tie the ending Z coordinate to the Z home position This means that no matter what your Z home value is at the time that you run your program the final Z position will be the Z home position When you are finished entering all of the dimensions for the rapid move press lt F10 gt to accept the operation and return to the Insert Operation screen NOTE When making rapid moves if a Z destination higher than the current cutter position is specified the cutter will first be raised to the destination Z position and then move linearly in X and Y to arrive at the destination If a Z destination lower than the current cutter position is specified the cutter will move linearly in X and Y first and then plunge Z to the destination Z position NOTE The Rapid traverse operation can have rotary fields if you hav
8. M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 2 3 An extra option unique to the Search and Run screen is the lt F1 gt Do Last Tool Change function This key toggles the tool change option as shown on screen A YES tells the control to perform a tool change so that the tool specified for the line or block has the tool indicated in the program A NO uses the currently loaded tool regardless of what tool is specified for the line or block being searched F3 Repeat On Off This key toggles the repeat feature for part counting When part counting is in effect and Repeat is on the job will be automatically run again until the specified number of parts have been run The On or Off label indicates the state to which the repeat feature will toggle to when pressed It does not indicate the current state The current state is indicated in the user window above The Part Count prompt is used to set the Part count Positive values set the part counter to count up and negative values configure the part count to count down For example if 10 is entered in the Part Count prompt the Part Cnt in the status window changes to 10 and the Part changes to 0 with an upward arrow indicator When a job is run and then completes the Part will increment to 1 If repeat is on the job will automatically start again and keep running until the Part has reached the Part Cnt If a 10 is entered in the Part Count prompt the Part Cnt in the status window cha
9. NOTE The tool heights used above are merely example heights In order to accurately measure the heights of your tools see the description of measuring tool heights on page 5 10 of this tutorial Keep the updated tool offset library values M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 56 F2 F10 ESC CANCEL ESC CANCEL CYCLE START Tutorial Complete Tools Save Cancel Cancel Run Program Now you need to make sure that each tool uses the correct diameter and height offset values Inspect the values for T001 and T002 T1 should use HOO and D001 while T002 should use H002 and D002 If any of these values are incorrect use the arrow keys to select the incorrect values Enter the new values in their places and press lt ENTER gt to accept them You may also select spindle and coolant settings for your tools here or enter a short description of the tool Keep the updated Tool Library values Leave Tool Setup Return to the CNC7 Setup Screen Leave CNC7 Setup Return to the CNC7 Main Screen The CYCLE START START button is located on your jog panel This key will cause the mill to begin cutting your part M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 57 Intercon Tutorial 2 This demonstration will show you how to create a tool path for a part from a blueprint using the Math Help function of Intercon The tool path to be created is for the part shown in Figure 1 below 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 F y Ss a
10. Tttoo 4122 Current diameter offset number D mill only R 4201 Job processing state 0 normal 1 graph R 4202 Search mode 0 search mode off 0 search mode off R 5021 5024 Machine Position X 5021 Y 5022 etc Floating point value R 5041 5044 Current Position X 5041 Y 5042 etc R 6001 6080 PLC Inputs 1 80 R 6900 6909 PLC Inputs eight at a time E TA bie lowest R 7001 6080 PLC Outputs 1 80 R 7900 7909 PLC Outputs eight at a time Huet te R 0 closed 1 open 8001 6080 PLC Memory bits 1 80 R 8900 8909 PLC Memory bits eight at a time R 3 2 04 M Series Operator s Manual 11 5 Index 10000 10001 10200 11000 11001 11200 12000 12001 12200 13000 13001 13200 14000 14001 14200 15000 15001 15200 16000 16001 16200 17000 17001 17200 18000 18001 18200 Examples 100 Mill Mill Mill Mill Mill Mill Mill Mill Mill Mill Mill Mill Mill Mill Mill Mill Mill Mill 5041 G90 X 5041 2501 2703 270341 Q 17 C ab HE HE 50 Subroutine parameter and local 1 X A Y B HE 7 0 05 3 2 04 9000 9199 Parameter values 0 199 Description Height offset amount active H Height offset amount H001 H200 Diameter offset amount active D Diameter offset amount D001 D200 Tool H number active tool T Tool H number tools 1 200 Tool D number active tool T Tool D number tools 1 200 Tool coolant active to
11. lt gt or Fast Slow Jog Selects fast or slow jog mode Press again to Only in jog panel lt gt Selection select the opposite mode Shift as Fast Slow Jog Fast and temporary fast slow mode switch Only in jog panel modifier Selection Hold down simultaneously with a jog key This is like holding down the Shift key to type a capital letter instead of pressing Caps Lock S sor Increase Jog Changes incremental jog step from 0001 to Only in jog panel le lt lt gt Step 10x 001 to 01 etc The 1 moves to the left in x 10 0 the status window This also selects handwheel speed gt Or Decrease Jog Changes incremental jog step from 1 to 01 to Only in jog panel es lt gt gt Step 10x 001 etc The 1 moves to the right in the x 0 1 status window This also selects handwheel speed lt F1 gt F key pass thru Exits the jog panel and executes the Where F keys are lt F10 gt corresponding F key visible Notes 1 Hotkey In general the key can be used at any time Some CNC7 menus may prevent the use of certain keys 2 The console type in the console configuration menu must be set to Keyboard to use this key 3 The PLC program must be programmed to support this key Keyboard only systems have this support built in Systems with other jog panels may not have this support 4 Available if not in use by CNC7 For example feed rate override can be adjusted from the main menu If you
12. 0 2000 0 2000 0 2000 0 2000 0 2000 Home Select operation to insert To complete the contour to be cleaned out choose lt F2 gt or lt F3 gt to insert line or arc segments that define the pocket contour The first segment should be a linear move to a point on the pocket contour it cannot be an arc If the profile contour does not end at the start point a linear segment is automatically inserted to close the contour The last line of the contour will not include a connecting radius to the starting point At right is an example of a completed cleanout backplot M Series Operator s Manual View 3 D Graphing Done Job Nane GOOD ICN Ya k 2D Set Time Zoom Zoom Zoom ap Rotate Range estin fRedrau Fan Out All FL R A F Fa A FE F6 F BO A P F6 Other Press lt F6 gt to add a comment to your program control flood mist spindle and clamp you can also send the tool to Z home or enter in any G code or M function available on your control Pressing lt F6 gt from the Insert Operation screen shows Intercon Mill v8 00 Current Part E_2_PART ICN Operation End Type X Y Z Select operation to insert 0010 Demo program 0020 Rapid 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home 0070 Tap 0 0000 0 0000 0 1000 0080 Fa
13. HHH HHHH 2 A digitizing patch can be located anywhere in the coordinate system The digitizing starting point is referenced from the part zero For example setting up digitizing as shown in the figure on the right below will record the first point at X5 Y5 Z1 and the last point at X7 Y7 Z1 If the digitizing replay starting point is desired to be at the part zero be sure to set the part zero equal to the digitizing start point as shown in the figure on the left below This orientation will record the first point at X0 YO ZO and the last point at X2 Y2 Z1 For more information on part setup see Chapter 3 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 7 4 Highest Point START X5 Y5 Z7 START X0 Y0 Z6 _ 2 5 y X2 Y2 Z0 E e X7 Y7 Z1 X0 Y0 Z0 X5 Y5 Z1 X0 Y0 Z5 3 A good technique for calculating Z maximum depth is to touch off the lowest surface of the part to be digitized and set the part zero s Z value to ZO Then jog the probe tip to a point higher than the highest surface of the part to be digitized Note the displacement in the Z axis Again set this Z height to ZO and use the noted displacement for the Z maximum depth 4 Multiple patches are useful in the following situations completing a canceled digitize run digitizing parts with large areas that contain nothing to be digitized shown below and patching vertical walls to eliminate scallops caused by the cutting tool PATCH 2
14. M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 13 The numbers in the fields on the screen correspond to the following example shown here graphically VAAL X 4 Feed Move eee p Rapid Move X 8 X 12 Drilling F1 in the Canned Cycle Menu option 1 If you press lt F1 gt Drill from the Canned Cycle Menu you will gain access to three types of drilling operations Drilling Chip Breaking and Deep Hole drilling The current drilling operation in use is reflected in the field Cycle Type and pressing lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt toggles between all three In this section we will examine the first option Drilling Intercon Mill v8 11 Current Part E_2_PART ICN Operation End Type xX Y Z 0010 Demo Program 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home Drill 0080 End Prog 0 0000 0 0000 Home Math Help F6 N0070 Drill Cycle Type Drilling Position x 20 0000 Y 40 0000 Surface Height 0 1000 Clearance Height 0 1000 INC Rapid to Depth 0 1000 INC Depth Total 0 5000 INC Plunge Rate 20 0000 Dwell Time ramh teach ccent F8 Fg F10 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 Clearance Height Rapid To Depth Surface Height Depth Total 10 14 The numbers in the fields on the screen correspond to the following example shown here g
15. Maximum message log lines This parameter is the number of lines that will be kept in the message log If this parameter is set to 10 000 for example the newest 10 000 messages will be retained CNC7 will delete the oldest messages trimming the log file to the given number of lines at startup and periodically while CNC7 is in an idle state Parameter 142 controls the frequency of the log cleanup Parameter 142 Message log trim amount This parameter is the number of additional lines above the minimum that can be added to the log before it is reduced to the minimum size Setting this parameter to a lower value will cause the log file to be trimmed to its minimum size more often The higher the value the less often the log will be trimmed The speed of the disk drive and total size of the log file at the time it is trimmed will determine how long the log cleanup takes Under most circumstances using 10 000 and 1 000 for parameters 141 and 142 will provide a reasonable and useful log size with no noticeable effects on performance If parameters 141 and 142 are set to excessively high values the message Trimming excess lines from log file will be presented This message will appear at startup and very infrequently when CNC7 is idle Normal operation can proceed after the message disappears If the delay is unacceptable reduce the values of parameters 141 and 142 Parameter 143 DRO Properties load meters 4 5 digits DTG This parameter contr
16. Next Clear Prev Next Hide Copy Copy Graphic Soln Soln All Solver Solver Math lt lt lt gt gt On Off F1 F2 F3 F4 E5 F6 F F8 E9 You must enter the X and Y coordinates for 1 point on each line and also one of the following the X and Y coordinates for a second point the X coordinate for a second point and the angle from horizontal the Y coordinate for a second point and the angle from horizontal the angle from horizontal only F8 Intersection Line Arc M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 47 Intercon Mill v8 00 Current Part BUGCO3 ICN N0020 Linear Line Intersection Arc Circle XK 0 000 Y 0 000 Radius 1 000 Line x1 2 000 r y1 2 000 x P2 X2 2 000 Angle RUM x Int 1 X1 0 956 Yi 0 293 I2 Int 2 X2 0 224 Y2 0 975 Given Space to Toggle Solution 1 of 1 P1 Prey Next Clear Prev Next Hide Copy Copy Graphic Soln Soln All Solver Solver Math lt lt lt gt gt On Off Fi F2 F3 F4 E5 F6 E FB E9 Given the center CP and radius R of an arc 1 point LP1 and either a second point LP2 or one coordinate LP2 X or Y and the angle from horizontal find the intersection point s I1 and I2 You must enter the X and Y coordinates for the circle s center point the circle s radius the X and Y coordinates for one point on the line and one of the following the X and Y coordinates of a second point on the lin
17. Tools Save Cancel Cancel Run Program Tutorial Complete M Series Operator s Manual Keep the updated tool offset library values Now you need to make sure that each tool uses the correct diameter and height offset values Inspect the values for TOO1 and T002 T1 should use HOO1 and D001 while T002 should use H002 and D002 If any of these values are incorrect use the arrow keys to select the incorrect values Enter the new values in their places and press lt ENTER gt to accept them You may also select spindle and coolant settings for your tools here or enter a short description of the tool Keep the updated Tool Library values Leave Tool Setup Return to the CNC7 Setup Screen Leave CNC7 Setup Return to the CNC7 Main Screen The CYCLE START START button is located on your jog panel This key will cause the mill to begin cutting your part 3 2 04 10 78 Measuring Tool Heights The following is a brief description of the method used to measure tool height values offsets You will need to insert a reference tool into the quill before beginning PRESS F1 F2 F1 JOG ARROWS F1 TOOL CHECK ARROWS JOG ARROWS F2 F10 ACTION Setup Tool Offsets Move tool Z Ref Move tool to Tool Check position Select Height Offset Move tool Manual Save Offsets M Series Operator s Manual COMMENTS From the main screen enter the Setup Enter tool screen Enter the tool offsets scree
18. a68 N___ Coordinate Rotationon _ _ _ G69 IN Coordinate Rotation off _ _ 73 G__ High Speed Peck Drilling 74 _ Counter Tapping Optional 81 Drilling and Spot Drilling 82 G_ DrillwithDwell o i O M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 1 Set Absolute position Initial Point Return NOTES All the default G codes have been marked with the symbol A given line of a program may contain more than one G code If several G codes from one group are used in the same line only the G code specified last will remain active G codes from group B are of one shot type active only in the line in which they are specified All other G codes are modal active until another G code of the same group is specified If a G code from group A is used in a canned cycle mode the canned cycle will be canceled Canned cycle G codes however have no effect on G codes from group A G00 Rapid Positioning GO moves to the specified position at the maximum motor rate The coordinates may be either absolute positions G90 or incremental positions G91 GO is modal and remains in effect until another positioning mode G1 G2 G3 etc is commanded GO is the default positioning mode When the Z axis is commanded to move in the direction the Z axis will move up to its new position first then the other axes will move to their new position along a straight line When
19. 8 Available Coolant System s id 9 Display Language S O 0 0 0 0 05 na n a 10 17 ___ Tool Detector Reference Number CO 18 PLC Input Spindle Inhibitor _ _ Z 0 19 MPG modes S O 20 Ambient Temperature 72 Refer to text Refer to text 150 180 0 19 200 33 Spindle MotorGearRatio sd 34 Spindle Encoder Counts Rev 8 000 35 Spindle EncoderInput_ o SS 36 Rigid Tapping Enable Disable __ _ 0 10 0 120 0 0001 0 25 0 0 0 60 Digital Filter Size Sd 0 5 115 1 5 0 1 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 9 Minimum Rigid Tapping Spindle Speed 100 68 Duration For Minimum Spindle Speed 1 25 69 Offset Library Inc Decrement Amount 001 02mm Part Setup Detector Height 0 Data M Function Options 0 Peck Drill Retract Amount 0 05 M Function executed at bottom of tapping cycle 4 75 Axis Summing Display Control 0 Manual Input Unrestricted Distance 0 Manual Input Movement Tolerance 0 Display of Spindle Speed 0 79 Auto Brake Mode PLC Bit for Uniconsole 2 70 80 Voltage Brake Applied Message Frequency 1 81 Air Drill M Function executed instead of Z movement in drilling 1 82 Spindle Drift Adjustment 108 82 Deep Hole Clearance Amount 0 05 M Function executed at return to initial point of tapping cycle 3 87 90 Autotune Accel Time and ka 48 91 94 Axis Properties 0 95 98 Autotune Move Distance 2 99 Cutter Compensation Look ahead 2
20. CNC7 HEX Other messages with more detail of error appear on screen before this message Effect Exit CNC7 with return code 63 Fix files and try again prompt from CNC7M4 BAT Removed By CNC7M4 BAT 103 Message Error sending setup windowed message Cause ESC key pressed while sending setup Effect No setup command sent to CPU7 CPU7 probably not responding Removed Timed message 104 Message Error sending PID setup windowed message Cause ESC key pressed while sending PID setup Effect No PID setup command sent to CPU7 CPU7 probably not responding Removed Timed message 105 Message CNC7 PLC file read error cannot continue text mode Cause Missing or error in CNC7 PLC Effect Exit CNC7 with return code 63 Fix files and try again prompt from CNC7M4 BAT Removed By CNC7M4 BAT 106 Message The PC clock appears to be wrong M Series Operator s Manual Cause Effect Removed The time on the PC internal clock is earlier than the time recorded in a previously stored file None Start of new job Messages issued upon exit from CNC7 201 202 203 204 205 206 Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause 3 2 04 Return code 60 text mode Utility button pr
21. Digitize File Name DRILL Multiple Patch YES Nothing to Digitize Area PATCH 3 Digitize File Name DRILL PATCH 1 Multiple Patch YES Digitize File Name DRILL Reduce Stepover and change Multiple Patch NO Axis to move first parameter to eliminate scalloping X The drill shown in the previous example is L shaped Therefore it can be digitized faster and more efficiently using three rectangular patches than digitizing the complete area with a single patch M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 7 5 Digitizing the entire part and then adding multiple small patches along the walls can avoid vertical wall scalloping A small rectangular patch extending the length of the vertical wall with the axis to move first set to the opposite axis along which the length of the wall extends is suggested i e If a vertical wall extending along the X axis needs to be cleared of scallops a small patch running the length of the wall with the Axis to Move First parameter set to Y would clear the scallops Radial Digitize F2 from CNC7 Digitize Screen WCS 1 G54 Current Position inches Job Name E_2_PART CNC 0 0000 Eccdrate 100 Spindle 0 Y 0 0 0 0 0 Feed Hold Off Z 0 0000 Stopped Radial Digitizing 1 Jog Probe Tip to Starting Height Containment Radius 1 0000 2 Jog Probe Tip to Center of Well Z Patch Depth 1 0000 3 Edit Radial Digitize Parameters 2 Step 0 0100 4 Press CYCLE START to Begin Outer Stepover
22. Examples M function and sample output M122 gt X1 2345 Y 3 2109 Z 0 5678 M122 2 4 at 10 ipm gt Z 4321 at 10 ipm M122 X Y gt X 1 0000 Y0 8732 M122 X L1 5 X 1 5000 M122 X X 1 5000 X 2 0000 M123 Record value and or comment in data file This M function will write the specified parameter value if any to the data file followed by any comment that appeared on the line with M123 If a P value is specified M123 will output a character followed by the numeric value 4 decimal places in inches 3 in millimeters If no P value is specified then M123 outputs the comment only If neither a P value nor a comment was specified M123 does nothing This is not an error If no data file has been opened with M120 or M121 before M123 is called then M123 will return an error and terminate the job The parameter L1 may be used to suppress the new line character normally outputted after the last value Examples M function and sample output M123 P1 2345 gt 7 1 2345 M123 P A first macro argument gt 1 2345 first macro argument M123 Probing X to surface re probing X to surface M123 gt lt nothing gt M Series Operator s Manual3 2 04 13 11 M Series Operator s Manual3 2 04 13 12 CHAPTER 14 Operator Panels M Series Jog Panel The M Series operator panel is a sealed membrane keyboard that enables you to control various machine operations and functions The panel contains mom
23. M9 causes the PLC to stop the coolant system Default action M95 3 5 M10 Clamp On M10 causes the PLC to activate the clamp Default action M94 4 M11 Clamp Off M11 causes the PLC to release the clamp Default action M95 4 M25 Move To Z Home M25 moves the Z axis to the home position at the Z axis maximum rate The Z home position defaults to zero in machine coordinates but may be changed by changing the Z coordinate of the first Reference Point on the Work Coordinate System Configuration screen Default action GO lt Z home gt M Series Operator s Manual3 2 04 13 3 M26 Set Axis Home M26 sets the machine home position for the specified axis to the current position after the line s movement If no axis is specified M26 sets the Z axis home position Example M91 X home X axis to minus home switch M26 X set machine home for X axis there M92 Z home Z axis to plus home switch M26 set machine home for Z axis there M339 Air Drill M39 is a default air drill activation sequence with a timeout The sequence of operations is as follows M94 15 activate M function request 15 M103 2 start 2 second timer M100 15 wait for input 15 to open M95 15 deactivate M function request 15 M104 cancel timer NOTE This program will be canceled by timer expiration if input 15 does not open within 2 seconds after M function request 15 is activated The PLC program
24. See Chapter 15 for details See also Hot Keys later in this chapter M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 1 1 Status window The first line in the status window contains the name of the currently loaded job file Below the job name are the Tool Number Program Number Feedrate Override Spindle Speed and Feed Hold indicators The Feedrate Override indicator displays the current override percentage set on the Jog Panel The Feedrate label will turn RED if the rapid override is turn off If your machine is equipped with a variable frequency spindle drive inverter the Spindle indicator will display the current spindle speed The Feed Hold indicator displays the current status on off of FEED HOLD See Chapter 14 for descriptions of the Feed Hold Button Feedrate Override Knob and Spindle controls For a description of the Program Number see G65 in Chapter 12 or M98 in Chapter 13 The Part Cnt and Elapsed Time indicators appear when CYCLE START is pressed while a job is running The Part Count indicator displays the number of times the currently loaded job has been run They count increments by one after the completion of a run If a job is canceled prematurely the part count will not be incremented The Part counter shows the how many parts have been run with an up down arrow displayed to indicate the counting direction See the run menu for more information on the Part Cnt and Part setting The Part Time indicator displays how much time
25. Type X Y 0010 Demo Program Start Block NOO20 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 End Block NO080 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 Total Depth 0 5000 INC 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Depth Increment 0 1000 INC 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Clearance Height 0 1000 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home Plunge Rate EO 0070 Tap 0 0000 0 0000 0 1000 0080 Face 3 0000 6 0000 0 0000 Warningt 0090 Rect Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 Operator must program first pass 0100 Circ Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 at depth increment Plunge must 0110 Frame 1 7500 6 6625 0 0000 be programmed into this pass 0120 Thread 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 0130 MH Select Low Gear Range 0140 Rotary 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 0150 Comp Left 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 epth Rp 0170 End Prog 4 0000 8 0000 Home Math Teach Toggle Help Graph Mode F6 ES FY F3 accent F10 The Repeat to Depth feature is useful for repeating a part contour when the material being machined is too thick to cut in just one pass The contour formed by these operations may either be a closed contour or an open one Ifa non vertical plunge to the start of the contour is desired it must be programmed into the contour a vertical plunge between passes will be provided if one is not programmed Total Depth Indicates how deep the final depth pass is to be This is a positive value Note that because the contour has been programmed at a depth of one depth increment below
26. lt lt gt gt On Off Fi F2 E3 F4 E5 F6 E E8 Fo FIG 7 Math Help solution for arcs 3 and 4 TWH ARROWS Move Cursor ARROW Move Cursor TU ARROWS F8 Copy gt gt gt F8 Copy gt gt gt THARROWS Move Cursor M Series Operator s Manual Press to highlight the needed tangent point X coordinate in Math Help Tangent point T2 is the one you want this time Press to remove the graphic display and move the cursor to the arc operation This shortcut saves you from pressing lt F9 gt to hide the graphics each time The solid block cursor on the left side of the screen will be replaced by an outlined rectangle and the solid block will appear in the arc operation on the right Move the block cursor to the End X field of the arc operation Transfer the tangent point T2 value for X into the end point X coordinate The active fields on both sides of the screen advance automatically Transfer the tangent point T2 value for Y into the end point Y coordinate Move down to the radius field and enter the radius of the arc labeled ARC 3 in Figure 3 This radius is 1 2500 inches Also enter in No for the angle of this arc since it is greater than 180 3 2 04 10 70 Arc type EP amp R Mid x Y Z End x 0 7496 Y 1 0003 Z 0 0500 Center X Y Z Angle Radius 1 2500 Plane XY Direction CW Feedrate 10 0000 Angle lt 180 No F10 Accept Keep selected values F3 Arc G2 amp G3 The fou
27. lt F10 gt to save the Tool Library and exit Bin This field specifies which bin location or ATC carousel position that the tool is occupying Valid values are 1 shown as dashes through the maximum number of tools specified by machine parameter 161 A value of 0 indicates that the tool is in the spindle The F1 F3 keys will work when the cursor is in the Bin column lt F1 gt Clear Bin places dashes into the bin field same as entering 1 lt F2 gt Clear All places dashes into every bin field lt F3 gt Init sets T1 to Bin 1 T2 to Bin 2 T3 to Bin3 and so on all the way up to the maximum number of tools specified in machine parameter 161 Note For enhanced ATC applications the bin numbers will be updated when tool changes are completed For random or arm type tool changers tools in the spindle are placed into the bin where the next tool is picked up and not necessarily from the bin which it was originally taken Height This field specifies a default Height Offset H number to use with each tool Possible values are 1 to 200 Intercon uses this information to provide a default H value at each tool change CNC7 also uses this information to correct for the length of the tool that is used to establish the Z axis position in Part Setup see Chapter 4 Diameter This field specifies a default Diameter D number to use with each tool Possible values are 1 to 200 Intercon uses this information
28. not use M103 the control will automatically cancel the job 1 2 second after starting G81 For information on creating customized M functions review Macro M functions in Chapter 13 The M39 default air drill cycle has a time out of 2 0 seconds As a result if the cycle does not complete within 2 seconds then the cycle aborts and the output relay is turned off under PLC program control NOTE The PLC program must be involved in the execution of the cycle The PLC program is responsible for turning on relays based on M function requests and the status of program execution The PLC program must also stop all programmed machine functions when the program is canceled See the M39 description Chapter 13 for a sample of an air drill cycle M function G82 Drill with dwell VAAN VIVA Initial Point Initial Point OESE ENIRA p A os o a v Workpiece o Point R Workpiece 9 A ont R To EN E E N N a Point Point dwell P dwell P G82 Using G98 G82 Using G99 G82 is a general purpose drilling cycle similar to G81 However G82 includes an optional dwell at the bottom of the hole before retracting the tool This can make the depth of blind holes more accurate Example G82 XI Yl R 1 Z 5 P 5 drill to Z 5 dwell 5 seconds M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 22 G83 Deep hole drilling d rapid down clearance VAM set with G10 Ex G10 P83 R 02 Sets d to 02 Feed move Rapid move gt Initi
29. pressing lt F1 gt lt F1 gt lt F6 gt and lt F7 gt are described in Chapter 4 Part Setup 2 Manually jog the probe about 1 2 inch away from the surface you wish to define Make sure the approach direction to the part is set properly Probe the selected axis by pressing lt F4 gt When the surface is found the control will assume this point to be the new axis 0 3 If you want this probed surface to be something different than 0 enter the value by the using arrow keys to highlight Part Position Type in the value and press lt F10 gt Repeat steps 1 3 to set the remaining axes using the probe Any previously entered Edge Finder Diameter or Tool Number value will be discarded Finding Center Corner Points You can locate a point in the center of a bore boss slot web or channel using the probing cycles You can also find corner points even when they are not at right angles No Edge Finder Diameter need be entered since these cycles place the probe directly over the center or corner of the part To enter the Probing Cycles screen press lt F5 gt from the Set Part 0 Position screen Calibrating the Probe Tip Diameter You can calibrate the probe tip diameter to compensate for pre travel the amount that the probe deflects before it actually trips Simply enter a probe tip diameter of zero probe out a precision bore with a known diameter and enter the difference between the reported bore diameter and the found bore diameter as t
30. 0 0000 0100 Circ Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 0110 Frame 1 7500 6 6625 0 0000 0120 Thread 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 0130 0140 End Prog 4 0000 8 0000 Home Math Teach Help Graph Node F Fa F9 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 32 accent F10 This operation lets you directly enter M amp G codes into your Intercon part program Great care must be taken when using this function as you could cause unpredictable results in the controller if you accidentally changed positioning modes in your program or perhaps turned the spindle off during a cut Rotary Rapid Move If you have a fourth axis and it is rotary then the OTHER screen will allow you to make rotary moves by pressing lt F7 gt The fields are identical to the fields in the Linear Mill operation as shown below but the resulting move is a GO Rapid moving only the rotary axis Intercon Mill v6 11 Current Part E_ PART ICN Operation End N0140 Nove Rotary Axis Type x Y 0010 Demo Program 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 Rotary Axis B 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 Degrees 25 INC 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Minutes i 10 INC 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Seconds i 10 INC 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home Decimal Degrees DMAE LEI INC 0070 Tap 0 0000 0 0000 0 1000 0080 Face 3 0000 6 0000 0 0000 0090 Rect Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 0100 Circ Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 0110 Frame 1 7500 6 6625 0
31. 0 0000 Feedrate 20 0000 al Angle lt 180 Yes Math Teach Help Graph Mode cent F6 E8 F9 F10 The numbers in the different fields on the screen correspond to the following Arc Mill example shown here graphically Operation Type There are four ways to specify your ARC using an endpoint and a radius EP amp R using a center point and an angle CP amp A using a center point and an end point CP amp EP or using a mid point and an end point Three Point The Three Point arc is designed to be used in conjunction with Teach Mode When specifying a particular kind of arc you will not be able to modify certain fields For example if you are specifying an endpoint and a radius you will not be able to modify the mid point center point and angle fields This is because Intercon calculates the correct values for these fields Mid The X Y and Z coordinates of a point on the arc path somewhere between the start point and end point of the arc You will be able to modify this field only when specifying a Three Point arc Also the coordinate that does not lie in the plane of the arc cannot be edited it is automatically calculated End The X Y and Z coordinates of where the cutter will be once the arc move is complete You will not be able to edit this field if you are specifying a center point and angle CP amp A arc Center This is the X Y and Z position of the center of the arc You will not be able to edit this field if
32. 0 0100 Se Replay Pattern Zig dag Replay Feedrate 3 0000 Contalim nt Center Digitize File Name Radius X Not Containment Angle Full Y Set Multiple Patch No j p ptl Move Between Levels l Clearance Height Saer apial a F1 F2 F10 ESC Setting up a Radial Digitize Run To set up a digitize run edit the parameters shown Jog the probe tip to the starting height and to the center of the well to be digitized Then press F1 to define the center position for digitizing This center position will be used as the center of all radial digitizing runs until you leave the radial digitize menu or redefine the center If you are using a full angle you can now press CYCLE START to begin digitizing If you have specified partial angle press F2 to define the partial angle see setting the partial angle section in this chapter After defining the partial angle pressing CYCLE START will start the digitize run WARNING The probe must be able to retreat to the center from any position on the digitize surface If the digitize surface contains features that do not allow for the probe to exit after entering a probe crash may occur See radial digitize note 2 Radial Digitize Parameters Containment Radius The maximum distance from the center position to look for a digitize data point This parameter is used to contain the probe within a circle with this radius centered at the center position If the probe does not contact the surface
33. 4 3 2 04 7 8 Partial Digitizing Sector Setup If you set the Radial Digitize Containment Angle to Partial then you must set up the Digitizing Setup by pressing lt F2 gt from CNC7 Radial Digitize Screen WCS 1 G54 Current Position inches Job Name E_2_PART CNC 0 0000 Eccdrate 100 Spindle 0 Y 0 0 0 0 0 Feed Hold Off Z 0 0000 Stopped Partial Digitizing Sector 1 Edit the angle fields on the right OR Jog to the start or end point of the sector then use Start F1 or End F2 to set the start or end points 2 Press F10 to Save changes or ESC to exit Start Angle 0 00 End Angle 45 00 F1 F2 F10 ESC The partial sector can be by one of two methods One method is by editing the start and end angles directly The start angle is referenced from zero degrees and defines the beginning of the digitizing sector The end angle is referenced from zero degrees and defines the end of the digitizing sector The second method involves jogging the probe tip and touching off the digitize surface By moving the probe tip to positions on the digitizing surface one can set the angles To set the start angle jog the probe tip to the position on the digitizing surface where the digitizing is to begin and press lt F1 gt to define this as the start angle Notice that the picture of the sector and the start angle s value change to reflect these settings To define the end angle follow the procedure ab
34. 9999 allowed leading zeros required in filename rrrr is the repeat value program CNC is the name of the macro file and Arguments is a list of variable identifiers and values Arguments to macro calls are specified by using letters A Z excluding G L N O and P Macros are written just like normal programs However macro programs may access their arguments by using A B etc or by using numbers 1 for A 2 for B etc exceptions 4 6 for I K 7 11 for D H Arguments I J and K can be used more than once in a macro call with the first set of values stored as 4 6 the second as 7 9 etc to a maximum of 10 sets See example at the end of this G65 section A macro can use the negative of an argument by placing a minus sign before the No other arithmetic operations are supported Macros can call other macros up to 4 levels of depth Macro M functions and subprograms Macro M functions and subprograms can similarly call macros Macros 9100 9999 may be embedded into a main program using 091xx to designate the beginning of the macro and M99 to end it CNC7 will read the macro and generate a file 091xx CNC but will not execute the macro It will be executed when G65 is issued Example 1 Main program G65 TEST CNC A5 B3 X4 Macro TEST CNC Gl X X Y A Z B This call will produce G1 X4 Y5 Z 3 Example 2 Main program G65 TEST2 CNC I5 J3 K40 I 1 J2 IO JO Macro TEST2 CNC
35. CNC X 11 0863 Ferate 120 Y 0 4519 Z 3 5334 Waiting for PLC operation Stopped Motor Parameters Axis Label Motor Encoder Lash Comp Limit Home Dir Screw revs in counts reyvy Inches Rev Comp 1 ig 9 99970 8000 0 00000 0 0 0 0 2 Y 10 00120 8000 0 00000 0 0 0 0 N N 3 2 5 00050 8000 0 00000 12 11 12 11 N N 4 hx M 5 00000 8000 0 00000 0 0 0 0 N N 5 s N 3 09790 8192 0 00000 0 0 0 0 N N Save F10 A description of each of these parameters is listed below WARNING The Motor Parameters should not be changed without contacting your dealer Corrupt or incorrect values could cause damage to the machine personal injury or both Special function indicators These appear if present between the axis number and the label s axis is the spindle p axis is paired with axis h axis is a handwheel paired with axis pairing conflict See Machine Parameters for more information on setting up special functions M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 6 Label The letter you want to use to identify the axis The first three axes should normally be X Y and Z Ifa fourth axis is installed it is usually named W or B If you change a label for example from X to A the controller will then accept G codes for axis A instead of X If fewer than four axes are present the unused entries should be labeled N If an axis is manually operated it has an encoder but no moto
36. Depth Total 0 5000 INC 0080 End Prog 0 0000 0 0000 Home Increment 0 0000 Peck Clearance 0 0500 Plunge Rate BRR Toggle Hele craen Hoge ccent E3 F6 E8 Fg F10 The numbers in the fields on the screen correspond to the following example shown here graphically VAI e Chip Breaking Feed move Rapid move Surface Z 7p ty is eae ner Height Peck Mesa iJ Clear Incr Peck Bis f Clear i Incr Depth Where Total Depth Cycle Type Selects one of three drilling operations Drilling Chip Breaking or Deep Hole drilling Press lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt to toggle between the three choices Position Specifies the X and Y coordinates where the drilling will take place If either the X or Y coordinate is an incremental value you will have the option to drill multiple holes in a linear pattern See Canned Cycle Introduction 2 Surface Height Absolute Z axis position from where each incremental depth is measured Clearance Height This parameter specifies the Z axis heigh each hole being drilled M Series Operator s Manual t used when performing rapid moves to the position of 3 2 04 10 16 Rapid To Depth The depth below the Clearance Height but above the Surface Height to which the cutter rapid moves before beginning to drill the hole at the specified Plunge Rate Depth Total Depth of hole incremental as measured from Surface Height Depth Increment D
37. Error reading file used for cutter comp look ahead Job canceled Start of new job Parameter setting errors 701 702 703 704 705 Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed G10 error no R value on line NNNNN G10 used with no R value Job canceled Start of new job G10 error invalid D on line NNNNN G10 DO Rxx specified Job canceled DO cannot be set it is always zero Start of new job G10 error invalid H on line NNNNN G10 HO Rxx specified Job canceled HO cannot be set it is always zero Start of new job G10 error invalid P on line NNNNN G10 used with unknown P value Job canceled Start of new job G10 error No D H or P on line NNNNN G10 used without D H or P to assign value Job canceled Start of new job Canned cycle errors 801 802 Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed 3 2 04 Error No R point on line NNNNN No R value specified Job canceled Start of new job Error Q 0 on line NNNNN Q value of 0 specified Q used for G73 and G83 only Job canceled Start of new job 16 9 803 804 805 806 Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed
38. F4 Run Press lt F4 gt to change the way your part program will run An example screen appears below WCS 1 G54 Xx Current Position inches 0 0000 Job Hare TEST CHE Tool T1 Feedrate 120 Part Cnt 10 Spindle 0 Part t 0 Feed Hold OFF Job Finished Stopped Operator abort job cancelled Stopped Press CYCLESTART ta start job Stall detection disabled Y Z 0 0000 0 0000 Run Single Black Node Optional Stops Block Skips Job Repeat off off On off Run Time Graphics Part Count Repeat rakip i Block topa PS Fh F4 EG Resune ob Searc FE Rapid RTG sraph On Jorre F Fg Filo ae F1 Resume Job The Resume Job feature allows you to resume a previously canceled job at or near the point of interruption See the section in this chapter titled Canceling and Resuming Jobs for a further detailed explanation F2 Search Invoking this option will bring you to the Search and Run menu This menu will allow you to specify the program line block number or tool number at which execution of a program is to begin Program lines are numbered from the top of the file down with the first line numbered 1 To enter a block number place an N in front of the number To enter a tool number place a T in front of the number Pressing CYCLE START from here would start the program at the point you specified
39. G1 X 4 Y 5 F 6 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 13 Gl X 7 Y 8 F 9 Gl X 10 Y 11 F 12 This call will produce G1 X5 Y3 F40 G1 X 1 Y2 G1 X0 YO Example 3 Suppose a piece is to have notches of different lengths and depths along the x axis 25 deep 25 deep The macro variables would handle the length in the Y direction and depth in the Z direction 00002 G90 G1 Z0 F30 Z Z FS Cut to variable depth GOLY Y F10 Cut variable length G90 GO Z0 1 Retract The main program would call this macro five times each time specifying the depth and length required Main Program G90 GO X1 Y1 ZO 1 Move to first notch G65 P0002 L1 Y1 Z 25 Call macro and assign Y 1 and Z 5 G90 GO X2 5 Y1 G65 P0002 Ll Y1 5 Z 5 Call macro and assign Y 1 5 and Z2 5 G90 GO X4 Y1 G65 P0002 L1 Y2 Z 25 Call macro again G90 GO X5 5 Y1 G65 P0002 Ll Y1 5 Z 5 Call macro again G90 GO X7 Y1 G65 P0002 L1 Y1 Z 25 Call macro again End program M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 14 G68 G69 Coordinate Rotation on off G68 rotates program G codes a specified angle R G68 rotates all positions lines and arcs until a G69 is entered The center of rotation can be specified by X Y and Z values X Y for G17 plane If the center is not specified then a default center of rotation is used as determined by machine parameter 2 see page 15 11 for parameter 2 The default pl
40. G54 Current Position Inches Job Name C_ROD CNC _ ___TY UUUY 0 z 0 0 0 0 focira 1007 0 i 0 0 0 0 Spindle ma A 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0 Waiting for PLC operation Stopped 0 0000 Jog Parameters Axis Slow Jog Fast Jog Max Rate Deadstart Delta Umax Travel Travel inmin inmin inmin Cin min linzmin Inches Inches 5 170 205 4 0000 5 0000 30 0000 30 0000 50 100 170 5 0000 5 0000 30 0000 30 0000 36 36 36 4 0000 5 0000 30 0000 30 0000 21 36 36 5 0000 5 0000 999 0000 999 0000 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 10 0000 A description of each of these parameters is listed below NOTE Some of these values are set automatically by the Autotune option See PID Configuration below Slow Jog Determines the speed of motion on an axis when slow jog is selected and a jog button is pressed The slow jog rate cannot be set to a value greater than the maximum rate Fast Jog Determines the speed of motion on an axis when fast jog is selected and a jog button is pressed The fast jog rate cannot be set to a value greater than the maximum rate Max Rate Determines the maximum feedrate of each individual axis The feedrate on each axis can never exceed Max Rate even if the feedrate override knob on the front panel is turned up above 100 See also the Machine Parameters section for the Multi Axis Max Feedrate parameter that limits the feedrate along move vectors not just each individual axis NOTE The maxi
41. Manual 3 2 04 10 50 Part Creation Each feature of the part will become an operation in your program Before beginning decide where you want the X0 and YO reference For this particular part the center of the bolt hole pattern was selected Now start the Intercon program from the CNC7 Main screen press lt F5 gt for CAM Beginning from the Intercon File Menu press lt F1 gt File if the file menu is not shown the following series of keystrokes will describe the step by step process of designing the part shown in Figure 1 PRESS F1 F4 F10 F5 F6 ACTION COMMENTS New Fill in the program name FLANGE Enter your name in as the programmer Enter the description as Intercon Tutorial 1 Tool Describe the tool below The position values specify where to do the tool change This position should be a point outside of the workpiece so that the last tool can be removed from the chuck and the new tool can be inserted The Yes in the Actual Tool Change field turns off the spindle and coolant upon reaching this spot Use a 0 3750 inch diameter cutter The length and diameter are updated based on the offsets The longest tool should have a 0 0000 length N0020 Tool change Tool Number 1 Description 3 8 end mill Position X 2 0000 Y 2 0000 Tool H Offset 1 Tool Height 0 0000 Tool D Offset 1 Tool Diameter 0 3750 Spindle Speed 1000 Spindle Direction CW M3 Coolant Type Flood M8 Actual Tool Change Ye
42. Menus This parameter determines the password that the user must enter in order to gain supervisor access to the configuration menus M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 15 Value Meaning 54 0 No password required for supervisor access the user is not prompted for a password ABCD ABCD _ Password is 4 digits represented by ABCD Any other Password is 137 number Parameter 43 Automatic tool measurement options If this parameter is set to 1 the height of the tool detector parameter 71 will be subtracted from the measured height of the tool Parameter 44 TT1 PLC input number PLC input number that the TT1 is wired into on the PLC If a shared PLC input is used for the TT1 and the DP4 probe then the value can be left at zero or set to the same value as parameter 11 Warning If using a different PLC input for the TT1 and DP4 when setting the Z reference in the tool library with the DP4 make sure not to use a ruby probe tip The TT1 is continuity based and the ruby tip is not conductive Parameter 60 Digital Filter Size This parameter defines the PID output filter size for the motor outputs This parameter is meant to provide a software filter where no hardware filter exists in order to slow down the PID output frequency normally 4000 times sec or to supplement a hardware filter that appears to be inadequate It is the number of samples to average the PID output over For example a value of 2 says to aver
43. Pass Climb Amount 0 1000 Feedrate 2 0000 M F10 Accept Keep selected values F5 Cycle Access the list of available canned cycles F6 C Pckt Repeat above pocket cycle The center X value 4 0000 and the diameter is 0 7500 inches M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 61 N0060 Circular pocket Center X 4 0000 Y 0 0000 Surface Height 0 0000 Diameter 0 7500 Cleanout Yes Depth Total 0 5100 INC Per Pass 0 2500 Plunge Rate 2 0000 Plunge Type Ramped Plunge Angle 0 00 o Rough Cuts Conventional Stepover 0 2000 Feedrate 2 0000 Finish Pass Climb Amount 0 1000 Feedrate 2 0000 F10 Accept Keep selected values F5 Cycle Access the list of available Canned Cycles F5 R Pckt Cut the first rectangular pocket N0070 Rectangular pocket Center X 2 0000 Y 0 0000 Surface Height 0 0000 Length X 0 7500 INC Width Y 0 4250 INC Corner Radius 0 1875 Depth Total 0 2500 INC Per Pass 0 2500 Plunge Rate 2 0000 Plunge Type Ramped Plunge Angle 0 00 Rough Cuts Conventional Stepover 0 1000 Feedrate 2 0000 Finish Pass None Amount 0 0000 Feedrate 2 0000 F10 Accept Keep selected values F5 Cycle Access the list of available Canned Cycles F5 R Pckt Repeat above Pocket cycle The center X value lies at 3 0000 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 62 F10 F7 N0090 Comp left F10 F1 N0100 Rapid traverse F10 F3 N0080 Rectangular pocke
44. Prompt at which the list of skips may be modified Entering positive integers adds skips to the list while entering negative integers removes skips from the list Multiple entries can be processed at the same time by separating them with commas Skip List List of skipped copies currently selected LA _ a ak Ge Repeat 2 a Number of Copies 2 assssasnnnenned Losseeoeosossso Repeat 1 Number of Copies 4 skip copy 2 NOTE An array of repeats may be accomplished by doing a repeat of a repeat Mirror F3 in the Insert Subprogram Menu The Mirror feature is useful for reflecting a part contour over a line The contour formed by these operations may either be closed or open M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 37 Y Mirror Mirror Line Other original copy mirror line X offset Y offset mirrored copy Mirror Line Specifies the type of mirror line to use Choices are Horizontal Vertical and Other user defined X Offset Specifies the X coordinate of a point on the Mirror Line This field will not be visible if a horizontal mirror line is being defined Y Offset Specifies the Y coordinate of a point on the Mirror Line This field will not be visible if a vertical mirror line is being defined Angle Specifies the angle from the three o clock position of the Mirror Line This field will only be visible for a user defined mirror line and is used in conjunction with the X Offset and Y Of
45. Run option CYCLE CANCEL Pressing this key while a job is running will cause the control to abort the job currently being run The control will stop movement immediately clear all M functions and return to the main screen Hitting the escape key on the keyboard is equivalent to hitting CYCLE CANCEL TOOL CHECK Pressing this key while a job is running will cause the control to stop the normal program movement In addition the Z axis will be pulled to its home position and all M functions will be cleared The control will automatically go to the resume job screen M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 2 6 EMERGENCY STOP E Stop Pressing the EMERGENCY STOP key while a job is running will cause the control to abort the job currently being run The control will stop movement immediately clear all M functions and return to the main screen Also the power to all axes will be released Resuming a Canceled Job If a job is canceled using one of the methods described above it can be resumed in one of 2 ways Resume Job Screen F1 from the Run Screen Access the resume job screen by pressing lt F4 gt on the main screen to go to the run screen and then pressing lt F1 gt in the run screen to go to the resume job screen If the job was canceled by pressing Tool Check the control will go to the resume job screen automatically From this screen the user can modify tool offsets and the tool library turn block mode on and off turn o
46. Service and Installation manual for more information regarding these parameters Parameters 180 187 Inverter Parameters These parameters describe various properties of the inverter Parameters 188 199 Aux Key Functions These parameters are used to assign a function to aux keys 1 12 The following is the list of possible functions that can be executed when an aux key is pressed Function Parameter Function Parameter Value Value No Function 0 XYZ Set Absolute Zero 16 Input X Axis Position 1 One Shot Drill Bolt Hole Circle 17 Input Y Axis Position 2 One Shot Drill Array 18 Input Z Axis Position 3 Jog Axis 1 21 Set Absolute Zero 4 Jog Axis 2 22 Set Incremental Zero 3 Jog Axis 3 23 One Shot Drill 6 Jog Axis 4 24 One Shot Circular Pocket 7 Jog Axis 5 25 One Shot Rectangular Frame 8 Jog Axis 1 31 One Shot Frame 9 Jog Axis 2 32 One Shot Face 10 Jog Axis 3 33 Execute M Code file mli1 Jog Axis 4 34 Free Axes 14 Jog Axis 5 35 Power Axes 15 The Input Axis Position functions must be used with the Set ABS INC Zero functions After entering the desired value at the input field provided by the Input Axis Position function press an aux key assigned either the function Set ABS Zero or Set INC Zero m is the number of the M code to execute For example if the parameter value is set to 72
47. WARNING Do not spin the handwheel too quickly Damage to the machine or part may result Rapid Over The RAPID OVER key controls rapid override If the RAPID OVER LED is on the FEEDRATE OVERRIDE knob applies to rapid GO moves and to jogging If the RAPID OVER LED is off the FEEDRATE OVERRIDE knob will have no effect on rapid moves and jogging M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 14 2 Tool Check Press TOOL CHECK while no program is running to move the Z axis to its home position Press TOOL CHECK while a program is running to abort the currently running program The control will stop normal program movement pull Z to its home position clear all M functions and automatically display the Resume Job Screen From the Resume Job Screen you can change tool settings height offsets diameter offsets etc and resume the job with the new tool settings Single Block The SINGLE BLOCK key selects between auto and single block mode When the SINGLE BLOCK LED is on the single block mode has been enabled Single Block mode allows you to run a program line by line by pressing CYCLE START after each block While in block mode you can select auto mode at any time While in auto mode and a program is running you cannot select single block mode Auto mode runs the loaded program after CYCLE START is pressed Auto mode is the default LED off Cycle Start b When the CYCLE START button is pressed the M 400 M 39 Control will immediately begin processi
48. YO R 4 Z 6 Drill lower left hole Y1 5 R 4 Z 6 Drill upper left hole XI R 4 6 Drill upper right hole Yele R sA 2 26 Drill lower right hole G80 Cancel canned cycles M99 jEnd of subprogram The main program would call this subprogram three times Main program G90 GO X2 Y5 Z0 5 Move to first hole pattern M98 P0001 11 Call subprogram 00001 cnc G90 GO X4Y1 Z0 5 Move to second hole pattern M98 P0001 L1 Call subprogram G90 GO X6 Y5 Z0 5 Move to third hole pattern M98 P0001 L1 Call subprogram End program Another example is looping or consecutively repeating a section of code Here the subprogram will be part of the main program Main program G90 GO X0 YO Z0 1 M Series Operator s Manual3 2 04 13 6 G1 ZO F30 09100 Beginning of subprogram G91 Gl Z 0 1 F5 G90 X2 F30 Y2 XO YO M99 End of subprogram 9100 M98 P9100 L3 Repeat 09100 3 times M25 G49 End main program 2 2 0 Surface 0 0 0 2 0 0 N 0 1 v A 0 1 V A 0 1 V M99 Return From Macro or Subprogram M99 designates the end of a subprogram or macro and transfers control back to the calling program when executed M99 may be specified on a line with other G codes M99 will be the last action executed on a line If M99 is not specified in a subprogram file M99 is assumed at the end of the file Example G1 X3 M99 Move to X3 then return to calling program If M99 is encountered in
49. You answer N to the save question or you complete the above save process Exit You have made changes to the editor current file and have not saved them You answer Y to the save question Replace The file is modified in memory and on text disk Do you want to replace the original file lt current file name gt Y N Specify a new file name Do you want to replace the original file lt selected file name gt Y N Do you want to save changes in the file lt current file name gt Y N Perform the save file process above Specify file name to be loaded Do you want to save changes in the file lt current file name gt Y N Perform the save file process above Pattern string to search for Replacement string to substitute Perform the save file process above Table 2 User Dialogs M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 2 9 CHAPTER 3 Part Setup F1 from Setup General WCS 1 G54 Current Position inches Job Name C_ROD CNC X 1 0000 Feearate 1202 Spindle 0 Y 2 0000 Feed Hold Off Z 3 1 0 0 0 0 perator abort job cancelled Stopped Set Part 0 Position 1 Select Axis with F1 2 Jog to Touch Off on Part 3 Edit the Value if Necessary 4 Press F10 to Set Position Axis Part Edge Finder Approach Position Diameter From Xx 0 0000 0 0000 Right UCS 1 G54 Next Prey Next WCS Axis Auto Probe ycg wes CSR table Set Fl F4 Es E6 E E8
50. absolute position at a specified feedrate F2 Incremental Power Feed Press lt F2 gt to move an axis an incremental distance at a specified feedrate F3 Free XY Press lt F3 gt to release power to the X and Y motors allowing you to use your machine manually for these two axes F4 Power XY Press lt F4 gt to apply power to the X and Y motors allowing you to use your machine with the jog panel for these two axes M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 5 1 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 5 2 CHAPTER 6 The Utility Menu To get to the Utility Menu press lt F7 gt at the CNC7 Main Screen The model number will vary depending on your M Series Control model F1 Format Press lt F1 gt to enter the Format Screen that gives you a choice of formatting either a high density or a low density floppy disk The marks that distinguish a high density disk from a low density disk are an extra hole and the letters HD Utility Menu Model M 39 Software v8 00 Autonated by Centroid technology wuw centroidcnc con File Ops F PLC Format Diag E6 Fi Update F2 Logs E9 Option FB Backup F3 Restor F4 Report E F1 HD Pressing lt F1 gt at the Format Screen will display a prompt to press lt ENTER gt If you press lt ENTER gt the floppy disk will be formatted as high density 1 44M If you do not want to format the disk
51. accuracy of the positioning of your machine M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 7 Machine Parameters Pressing lt F3 gt from the configuration screen will display the machine parameters screen This screen provides you with a method of changing various parameters that are used by the control If you wish to change a field use the arrow keys to move the cursor and select the desired field Type the new value and press lt ENTER gt When you are done editing the fields press lt F10 gt to accept any changes you have made and save them Press lt ESC gt to return to the previous screen Setup A short description of the parameter will appear below the table In the screen below parameter 6 determines whether an Auto Tool Changer is installed 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 f 8 g 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 18 Auto Tool Changer Installed Next Table F3 Machine Parameters Save F10 lt F3 gt Next Table will toggle the display parameters between parameters 0 99 and parameters 100 199 NOTE Many machine parameters can also be set with the G10 G code Some of them are set by the Intercon setup menu M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 The following parameters are currently defined Default 0 2 G Code Interpretation Control Cd 3 Modal Tool and Height Offset Control 0 4 Remote File Loading Flag _ _ _ _ O 5 Suppress Machine Home Setup 0 6 Auto Tool Changer Installed CCS 0
52. an M6 whether customized or not performs the following a The atc error flag is set to zero b The tool number displayed on the screen is updated and this value is saved in the CNC7 JOB file c The tool library bin fields are updated in this manner If there was a valid tool in the spindle at the start of the M6 then the tool library bin field for this tool will be updated with either the putback field for that tool if nonrandom type or the current ATC carousel position for random type For both random and nonrandom types the putback field is set to 0 The putback field is an internal field for each tool in the tool library It can be displayed by using the CNC7CONV utility with the dt option to display the tool library For nonrandom types the new tool now in the spindle will have it s putback field updated to the current ATC carousel position For both random and nonrandom types the new tool now in the spindle has the bin field set to 0 3 The current ATC carousel position is constantly monitored When there is a change the ATC bin field in the CNC7 JOB file is updated and the file is saved The ATC carousel position is read from PLC bits OUT41 OUT48 which should be written by the PLC program in a binary format not BCD 4 At the start of running a job to include MDI mode the ATC error field is checked If this field is 1 then a warning message is displayed with a prompt to either clear the fa
53. be inserted right before the currently highlighted one The block number of the new operation is shown on the right side of the screen The operation types that you can insert are listed across the bottom of the screen F1 Rapid Traverse Press lt F1 gt from the Insert Operation screen to insert a Rapid Traverse You may see the following screen Intercon Mill v8 11 Current Part E_ _ PART ICH Operation End N0020 Rapid Traverse Type X Y 0010 Demo Program End x 0 0000 0020 Rapid Y 5 0000 0030 End Prog 0 0000 0 0000 Home Z 0 1000 Angle 2r0 00 Length 5 0000 Abs 2 Math Teach Inc Home Help Graph Mode accent Fi Fa E ES Fo Fidl M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 6 End When you first access the rapid traverse screen the cursor will be highlighting the first field End X This is the X coordinate of where the cutter will be after the rapid traverse has been completed Similarly Y and Z represent the coordinates of the cutter after the rapid traverse is completed The angle and length fields will be computed if you choose to enter the end point of the move Angle The destination may also be specified in terms of a counterclockwise angle from the three o clock position When combined with a length for the current move the corresponding X and Y coordinates for the destination will be calculated and placed in the correct fields The Z destination will remain unchanged however
54. by Intercon Intercon Mill v8 00 Current Part E_2_PART ICN Intercon File Menu Save Details As parete On Off F4 E5 E9 New Load i Save Fi F2 F3 F1 New Choosing lt F1 gt New will display the New file prompt above the function keys The name of the new program can be typed followed by the lt F10 gt or lt ENTER gt key to accept the new name After accepting the new name the program header information can be entered F2 Load Part Program from Disk ill v8 Current Part 222 1CN Load Part When you press lt F2 gt the screen at right is Directory C AINTERCON displayed FACE bette FLANGE The program to be loaded is highlighted The GOOD ISLANDS arrow keys can be used to move the cursor MANUAL around and highlight the file to be loaded The apes lt HOME gt lt END gt lt PAGE UP gt and lt PAGE a DOWN gt keys can be used to navigate the list of SA 10 files Names that are bracketed for example CLEANCIR aaa are the names of directories in the current EI a directory which is displayed at the top of the E_2_PART SA 6 ETB SA screen File to load S ICN It is also possible to start typing the name of the program to be loaded When typing has started M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 2 the characters appear in the File to load prompt above the function keys Different drives and directories can be accessed by typing in the path at the File t
55. contain the following fields Start Block Selects the first operation in the block of operations to repeat This operation must lie before the place in your program where you are trying to repeat operations End Block Selects the last operation in the block of operations to repeat Again this operation must lie prior to place in your program where you are trying to repeat operations but not precede the start block Clearance Height This field determines the Z height at which the tool is moved over the workpiece before being repositioned at the start of the contour This value must meet or exceed the maximum Z height of all operations contained within the contour If any operation places the tool at the Z home position then you must tie this value to the home position lt F2 gt Tie Z coordinate to home Plunge Rate This is the speed at which the tool is repositioned on the Z axis when moving to the beginning of the first move of the contour This has no effect on a plunge that you have programmed into the contour however this has the effect of providing a vertical plunge for you in the event that you do not program your own plunge into the contour Other fields specific to the various subprogram operations are described in the next few pages M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 35 Repeat to Depth F1 in the Insert Subprogram Menu Intercon Mill v6 11 Current Part E_ PART ICN Operation End N0160 Repeat to Depth
56. disappear Never system must be powered down CPU fault XX detected invalid stop reason from CPU7 M Series Operator s Manual 416 417 418 419 420 421 Effect Removed Prompt Cause Effect Removed Prompt Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause 3 2 04 Power down then power up the system The error should disappear Never system must be powered down Motion fault XX detected Invalid motion status from CPU7 Power down then power up the system The error should disappear never system must be powered down Abnormal end of job Job ended without reason Job canceled Start of new job Search data not found Requested search input data not found in loaded CNC file Removed Jogging start of new job other error Job canceled Start of new job Search line in embedded subprogram Requested search line is part of an embedded subprogram Search can only be used to start in the main program Job canceled Start of new job _ axis motor overheating CNC7 estimates that a motor has reached the warning temperature set in Parameter 29 No effect on a job which is currently running However a new job cannot be started until the motor has cooled below the warning temperature When next message appears Motor
57. execute if false gt part of the statement is optional and may be omitted The THEN may be omitted however lt expression gt must be enclosed in brackets The IF statement may follow other program codes on the same line Compound conditionals are possible but they cannot be nested The first THEN always pairs with the first IF ELSE always pairs with the first lt expression gt that evaluates to false All program codes executed are executed as part of the same block 3 2 04 M Series Operator s Manual 11 7 Examples Branch to N200 if machine position is okay otherwise go to N300 N100 IF 5041 LE 5 0 THEN GOTO 200 ELSE GOTO 300 Force subprogram parameter D to be within range IF D LE 0 005 D 0 005 Compound conditionals IF A LE 0 0 GOTO 100 ELSE IF A LE 2 5 GOTO 200 ELSE GOTO 300 IF A GT 0 0 IF D A GE 0 0 C SORT D A INPUT Prompt Operator for Input The INPUT macro prompts the operator for numeric input The general form of the INPUT statement is INPUT lt prompt gt lt variable gt where lt prompt gt is the message prompt for the operator and lt variable gt is the variable in which to store the input CNC7 will display a dialog with the given prompt and space for the operator response The operator may enter any numeric expression see above including variables as a response The
58. following operations Intercon Mill v8 00 Current Part E_Z_PART ICN NO020 Face Right Triangle Calculator B a A X i Y Unknown Angle 90 000 B X Unknown Y Unknown Angle Unknown C X Unknown Unknown Angle Unknown Length AB Unknown BC Unknown CA Unknown A gf Prev Next Clear Prev Next Hide Copy Copy Graphic Soln Soln All Solver Solver Math lt lt lt gt gt gt On Off Fi F2 F3 F4 E5 F6 E FS E9 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 42 F1 Prev Soln F2 Next Soln The Prev Soln and Next Soln options will cycle backward and forward respectively through the available solution sets for math solvers that may have multiple solutions A status line near the bottom left of the screen appears once a valid solution has been found The solution status line indicates the total number of solutions and the solution number that is currently represented by the graphic display on the right For example in an Arc Tangent Arcs math help the display solution status may be Solution 1 of 8 In this case the Prev Soln and Next Soln can be used to cycle through all eight of the solutions F3 Clear All The Clear All option removes all solutions It sets all fields for a particular solver to UNKNOWN F4 Prev Solver F5 Next Solver The Prev Solver and Next Solver options cycle backward and forward respectively through
59. has passed since the CYCLE START button was pressed The indicator will help you to determine how long it takes to mill a particular part The timer will not stop until the job is canceled It will continue to count for optional stops tool changes FEED HOLD etc Message window The message window is divided into a message section and a prompt section The prompt section of the window is the lowest text line in the window and will display prompts to the user For example the prompt Press CYCLE START to start job is displayed on the prompt line after power up The message section is the top four text lines of the message window This section will display warnings errors or status messages The newest messages always appear on the lowest of the four lines Old messages are shifted up until they disappear off the top of the message window See Chapter 17 for a description of the CNC7 error and status messages Options window Options are selected by pressing the function key indicated in the box For example on the main screen pressing the function key lt F5 gt selects the CAM option User window The information contained in this window is dependent upon on the operation the user is performing on the control If no action is being taken the window is empty For instance when the CYCLE START button is pressed and a job is processed correctly up to 11 lines of G codes will be displayed in this window for the user to observe during the Run
60. in progress Waiting for dwell time G4 executing Mnn or M6 Insert Tool NNN Tool library description message displayed if M function macro executing After specified time has elapsed Input search data Run search key pressed None After search data input Searching Run search in progress None Search complete Processing Run search mode Search successful Preprocessing job 16 2 Effect None 317 Message Waiting for automatic tool change Cause M6 executing with automatic tool changer Effect None Removed After changer signals that tool change is complete Abnormal stops faults Abnormal stops are detected in the following order PLC servo drive spindle drive lube ESTOP This means that if both the servo drive and the spindle drive have faulted the servo drive fault message would appear 401 Message PLC failure detected Cause CPU7 stopped with PLC failure bit set Effect Job canceled Removed When PLC failure bit removed Typical implementation correct PLC then press and release EMERGENCY STOP 402 Message PLC Online Cause PLC has returned on line Effect None 404 Message Spindle drive fault detected Cause CPU7 stopped with spindle drive fault bit set Effect Job canceled Removed when spindle drive fault removed by PLC Typical implementation Check inverter for fault or reset spindle contactor OCR then press and release EMERGENC
61. is first started the Main screen will appear as below WCS 1 G54 Current Position inches Job Name TEST CNC X aa n a a aa a a Tool T H Feedrate 100 Spindle 0 Y lt So FeedHold Off l Mae aes LC Stopped B Oe ee ee eee e Press CYCLE START to start job WARNING Machine Home Not Set Press CYCLE START to send machine to hone position F1 F3 F Before you can run any jobs you must set the machine home position If your machine has home limit switches reference marks or safe hard stops the control can automatically home itself If your machine has reference marks jog the machine until the reference marks are lined up see below before you press CYCLE START to begin the automatic homing sequence The control will execute the G codes in a file called CNC7 HOM in the C CNC7 directory By default this file contains commands to home Z in the plus direction then X in the minus and Y in the plus direction Typical Reference Marks If your machine does not have home limit switches or safe hard stops the following message will appear instead WARNING Machine Home Not Set 1 Jog all axes to their home positions 2 Press CYCLE START to set machine home In this case you must move the machine to its home position yourself using either the jog keys or the handwheels Once all axes are at their home positions press CYCLE START to set machine home M Se
62. left or right was selected before the canned cycle it will be turned off F9 Subprograms Intercon subprograms allow you to make additional copies of a programmed contour The copies may be repeated vertically to depth horizontally or radially or may be a mirror image of the original To create a subprogram first define the operations that will compose the contour Any type of program operation rapid linear mill arc mill canned cycle subprogram etc may be included in the contour These operations must be programmed at the Z depth at which the first pass will occur When you are finished doing this return to the Program Edit Menu Move to the place in the program where you want to repeat these operations and press the Insert Operation lt F2 gt key The operations will be performed once before the repeat operation occurs therefore the operations to compose the contour should be defined at the place in the program where they should first occur When you press lt F9 gt from the Insert Operation screen you will see the Insert Subprogram screen Intercon Mill v8 00 Current Part E Z PART ICN Operation End Type xX Y Z Select operation to insert 0010 Demo program 0020 Rapid 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home 0070 Tap 0 0000 0 0000 0 1000 0080 Face 3 0000 6 0000 0 0000 0090 Rect Poc 4 0000
63. misplaced Job canceled Start of new job Evaluation stack overflow M Series Operator s Manual 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Brackets or parentheses are nested too deeply Job canceled Start of new job Undefined variable The variable name does not exist Job canceled Start of new job Too many variables The space allotted for user defined variables has been exceeded Job canceled Start of new job Invalid variable name The variable name contains an illegal character Job canceled Start of new job Divide by zero Attempt to divide by zero Job canceled Start of new job Domain error Imaginary number would result square root of a negative number Job canceled Start of new job Invalid value in assignment Attempt to assign an illegal value to a system variable Job canceled Start of new job Variable is read only Attempt to assign a value to a read only system variable Job canceled Start of new job Cutter compensation errors 601 Message Cause Effect 3 2 04 Error no compensation in MDI G41 or G42 e
64. motor cabling paying particular attention to the ground connections Replace the cable if it is damaged or repair the motor connections Jog the motor awhile at the maximum rate using the fast jog buttons Check the fast jog rate 3 2 04 in the motor jog parameters screen to make sure it is set equal to the maximum motor rate If the motor seems to jump around rather than accelerate and decelerate smoothly then you are probably fighting an encoder error Swap the motor with one from another axis and see if the error follows the motor If it stays with the axis replace the CPU If it follows the motor replace the motor cable If the problem still persists replace the motor and encoder Start of new job _ axis full power without motion 90 Power PID Output gt 115 is applied to any axis and no motion gt 0005 inches is detected for more than the time specified in parameter 61 usually 5 seconds All axis motion is stopped and the CNC program is aborted The probable causes of this error are One of the axes is against a physical stop The servo drive has shutdown due to a limit switch input The Z home switch is the same as the Z limit switch If the axis has obviously run into a physical stop use the slow jog mode to move the axis away from the end Change the CNC program to remove moves that are out of bounds or rezero to a point that permits the required CNC moves to be made If th
65. motors 40 in lb motors 40 in Ib motors motors motors Parameter 31 Spindle Speed Output Port Parameter 31 determines the destination for the raw spindle speeds generated and output by the Control Below are the possible values for this parameter Note that if your machine uses a serial type spindle controller you should not set this parameter to 0 1 12 bits to CPU7 then to Koyo PLC amp PLCIO2 Direct o 8 bits to CPU7 controlled spindle and RTK2 12 bits to COM1 serial port j2 12 bits to COM2 serial port Parameter 32 Spindle Vector Drive Serial Port Baud Rate The baud rate e g 9600 19200 etc of the serial port at which the control should communicate with the SPIN232 board This parameter has meaning only if Parameter 31 is set to 1 or 2 for COM1 or COM2 spindle speed output Parameter 33 Spindle Motor Gear Ratio The gear or belt ratio between the spindle motor and the chuck in high gear range Should be greater than 1 0 if the motor turns faster than the chuck and less than 1 0 if the chuck turns faster than the motor Note this value applies to high range The ratio between high range and lower ranges is established by the gear ratio parameters 65 67 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 14 Parameter 34 Spindle Encoder Counts Rev This parameter controls the counts revolution for the spindle encoder If the encoder counts up when running CW M3 the value of this parameter must be positive If the encoder
66. move the cutter from the end of one contour to the beginning of the next contour This distance should be a positive value Radial Digitize Notes 1 A guide to possible radial digitizing paths is as follows M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 7 7 FULL CONTAINMENT ANGLE ZIG ZAG REPLAY PATTERN FULL CONTAINMENT ANGLE ONE WAY REPLAY PATTERN x Clearance path x Clearance path D between depth D between depth lt increments Ze x increments ra PARTIAL CONTAINMENT ANGLE ZIG ZAG DIRECT REPLAY PATTERN PARTIAL CONTAINMENT ANGLE ONE WAY CLEARANCE REPLAY PATTERN AX l Clearance path i xX 7 N See aad Cerin gt Clearance path wy A KN increments y a between depth y 7 increments eens a N we gt ke A Yy m 4 4 2 When radial digitizing make sure the probe can fully retract to the center position without obstructions Observe the two parts below The cross section on the left has no obstructions that could keep the probe from full retraction to the center position The cross section on the right does not allow the digitizing to retract to the center in Area A This area will cause a probe crash single patch digitizing of parts such as this should be avoided Use 2 or more patches to digitize the part on the right in this case you could divide the part in half horizontally and do each half separately IDEAL PART CENTER POSITION amp a M Series Operator s Manual PROBLEM PART CENTER POSITION
67. must be involved in taking away the drill output when the CNC program stops Example PLC program CNC_program_running is INP65 program running indicator M15 is INP47 M function 15 indicator drill_out is OUTS jair drill output relay drill_out M15 amp CNC_program running Drill On if M94 15 and the CNC program is running Drill Off if M95 15 or the CNC program is terminated M91 Move to Minus Home M91 moves to the minus home switch of the axis specified at the slow jog rate for that axis After the minus home switch is reached the tool is moved back until the home switch untrips and then the next encoder index pulse is reached Example M91 X move the X axis to the minus home switch G92 X 10 sets X minus home switch at 10 M92 Move to Plus Home M92 moves to the plus home switch of the axis specified at the slow jog rate for that axis After the plus home switch is reached the tool is moved back until the home switch untrips and then the next encoder index pulse is reached Example M92 X moves the X axis to the plus home switch G92 X 10 Sets X plus home switch at 10 M93 Release Motor Power M93 releases the motor power for the axis specified If no axis is specified then all axes are released M Series Operator s Manual3 2 04 13 4 Example M93 X releases the X axis M93 releases the motors on all axes NOTE Any axis freed within a CNC progr
68. next WCS cycles through WCS 1 18 lt ALT 1 gt lt ALT 0 gt Selects WCS 1 WCS 10 lt CTRL F1 gt lt CTRL F12 gt Executes Aux function 1 12 Notes This is a keyboard jog panel function See Chapter 14 for details Not available during jobs in jog panel or while handwheels are engaged M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 1 5 Mill M and G Codes This is asummary list of M and G codes See Chapters 12 13 for more information M00 M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M15 M16 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M39 M50 M51 M80 M81 M91 M92 M93 M94 M95 M98 M99 M100 M101 M102 M103 M104 M105 M106 M107 M108 M109 M115 M116 M120 M121 M122 M123 M125 M126 Stop for operator Optional Stop for operator Restart Program Spindle on CW Spindle on CCW Spindle off Start Tool Change Mist Coolant on Flood Coolant on Coolant off Clamp on Clamp off Unclamp tool air on Unclamp tool air off Home tool changer Orient spindle Pick up tool Move head up Move head to ATC level Rotate carousel Start tool put back Move to Z home Set axis home Air drill Index tool plus Index tool minus Carousel in Carousel out Move to minus home Move to plus home Release motor power Turn on input X Turn off input X Call subprogram Return from subprogram Wait for input to open Wait for input to close Restart program Programmed action timer C
69. of the part All of the part zeros the tool library setup and the Digitizing Probing information are entered in by the user in this window M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 1 2 Conventions Keystrokes are represented by enclosing the capitalized name of the key in less than and greater than symbols For example the A key is written as lt A gt and the enter key is written as lt ENTER gt The Escape key is written as lt ESC gt Key combinations such as lt ALT D gt mean that you should press and hold lt ALT gt then press lt D gt All data entry screens in the M Series Control use lt F10 gt to save changes Any menu in the M Series Control can be exited by pressing lt ESC gt This will take you back to the previous menu This also usually discards any changes you have made in that menu All program examples and software use the standard Cartesian coordinate system see the figure below If you are facing the mill the X axis is defined positive to your right the Y axis is defined positive to the mill and the Z axis is defined positive upward perpendicular to the XY plane The direction of motion is defined by the CUTTER motion not the TABLE motion Cutter X gt B You Press X y Apparent Cutter motion X Table lt lt Table moves to the left CW stands for clockwise and CCW stands for counterclockwise M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 1 3 Machine Home When the M Series control
70. of the part so that our tool would only penetrate a small portion of the material per pass We now want to repeat the outer contour operations until the tool has cut the entire way through the material the assumed material thickness is 0 5 inches The outer contour begins with the Plunge in operation N0110 and ends with the Linear Mill in operation N0170 Start Block 0110 End Block 0170 Total Depth 0 5100 INC Depth Increment 0 0500 INC Clearance Height 0 2500 Plunge Rate 5 0000 F10 Accept Keep selected values E7 Comp Hit the space bar until cutter compensation is turned Off Itis no longer needed N0190 Comp off F10 Accept Keep selected values F1 Rapid G0 Move the tool away from the part This is called a lead out move When cutter compensation is turned off the compensation is removed during the next move This must be done to allow the CNC7 software to correct its position N0200 Rapid traverse End X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Z 3 0000 Angle 174 29 Length 5 0249 F10 Accept Keep selected values ESC CANCEL Cancel Creation of the part is complete Intercon programs automatically turn the spindle and coolant off at the end F8 Graph Display a preview of the finished part Just make sure that the M Series Operator s Manual finished part is going to look the way you want it to The display shown in Figure 7 has rulers placed around the various view windows that are scaled to the same size as the
71. options This field determines the default interpretation of job dimensions and feedrates If Inches is selected all feedrates and dimensions will be interpreted as inches as well as any unit dependent parameters NOTE This field should rarely if ever be changed If you wish to run a job in units other than the default machine units use the G20 amp G21 codes M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 2 Maximum Spindle Speed High Range This field sets the high range maximum spindle speed for those machines that have a variable frequency spindle drive controller VFD All spindle speeds entered in a CNC program are output to the PLC as percentages of this maximum value If your machine is equipped with a dual range drive and VED the controller will not exceed the spindle speed set by this field while in high gear See the Machine Parameters section below for information on setting the gear ratios for medium and low gear ranges If your machine has a VFD but is not equipped with a dual range drive this field determines the maximum spindle speed Minimum Spindle Speed High Range This parameter is used to adjust the minimum spindle speed for the high range This parameter allows the operator to set the minimum value for spindle speed to a value other than 0 All changes in spindle speed are made in relationship to this value with this parameter as the minimum value The values stored can range from 0 to 500000 0 RPM Machine Home
72. part displayed to allow visual inspection of the part Remember this preview shows where the center of the current tool will move cutter 3 2 04 10 74 compensation is not represented except in pocket and frame displays View Y TOP 2 0 A A EENT EN Oo i 5 5 ar 7 05 ia FESE Set Time View Range Estim Redraw F2 F3 F E5 Graphing Done Job Name C_ROD ICN SETE N E OR O AEE A erie E E E ah A a E oO 25 3 0 35 4 0 45 X FEZ Zoom Zoom Zoom Pan ih out al F6 F F8 Fo FIG 9 Draw screen showing complete part ESC CANCEL F1 F10 M Series Operator s Manual Cancel Return to Main screen File Go to the File Menu Press lt F3 gt to save under the current file name or press lt F4 gt to save the program under a different name Post The CNC file needed to run this part on your mill will be generated at this time The Intercon program displays the operation number of the part it is processing as it works through each operation in memory Generating CNC Program Block 0050 3 2 04 10 75 As it processes each operation it checks for values that if used will cause incorrect code to be produced If such a value is found a message will appear on the screen alerting you of the problem For example a problem with a rectangular pocket may produce this message Message Corner radius too small for Cutter hit a key Changes to the part would then be required
73. press lt CTRL C gt to cancel the operation p Re Format Floppy Disk OL m HD DD Fi F2 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 6 1 F2 DD Pressing lt F2 gt will perform the same function as above except that the floppy disk will be formatted at double density 720K F2 Update To update your control software put the update disk in the floppy disk drive and press lt F2 gt The new software will then be automatically loaded onto the hard drive Once the new software is loaded the controller must be powered down to use the new software Failure to do this may cause unpredictable errors F3 Backup Press lt F3 gt to enter the Backup Files screen It is recommended that you back up the M Series Control s files on a regular basis Also you should label your diskettes clearly after backing up a Backup Files to Archive OT Config CNC ICN GEO Fi F2 F3 F4 F1 Config Press lt F1 gt to backup the Control s configuration files to floppy disk Hint It s good to have a backup of your Configuration F2 CNC Press lt F2 gt to list CNC files that are stored on the Controller in the directory C CNC7 NCFILES You can select the ones you want to backup with lt F1 gt or select all of them with lt F2 gt and then accept them with lt F10 gt Follow the on screen instructions The selected files will be backed up to one or more floppy disks F3 ICN Pressing lt F3 gt will do th
74. probe to a position make sure the machine Feedrate is slow less than 10 in min or damage to the probe may result Using a Probe as the Reference Tool Before you set the Z Reference make sure the probe Tool is entered into Parameter 12 on the Machine Parameters screen Make sure that Parameter 17 on the Machine Parameters screen contains a 0 Follow these steps to probe Z Reference M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 4 3 1 Load the probe into the machine 2 Jog the probe over the desired reference surface and press lt F1 gt 3 Press lt F3 gt and then CYCLE START the probe will find the Z Reference At this point the Z Reference is now entered into the Offset Library and is the reference height for all other tools Remove the probe and measure any other tool offsets manually as described earlier in this chapter Measuring Each Tool Offset Using a Fixed Detector Before measuring any tool height make sure you enter the probe or reference tool measuring location Do this by entering a reference point number 1 or 2 into Parameter 17 and entering the detector position as the corresponding Reference Return Point on the WCS Configuration screen Otherwise the machine may traverse to a location that could damage the probe or reference tool Also remember that if Parameter 17 is zero 0 the X and Y axes will not move before Z moves down Now that a permanent location has been set do the following Load reference tool preferabl
75. probe will be positioned at the center of the bore and the X and Y positions will be shown on the screen 5 Press lt ESC gt to return to the Set Part 0 Position screen F2 Boss Press lt F2 gt to enter the Boss screen A picture similar to the following will appear with instructions and two input fields Follow these steps 1 Press lt F1 gt to select the orientation of the probe with respect to the Boss You will see one of the screens shown below 2 Slowly jog the probe to the approximate orientation as shown in the picture Be sure to give enough space for the probe tip to clear any obstacles during the jog Enter the approximate Boss diameter Highlight the Z clearance amount by pressing the down arrow key Enter approximate distance in the Z direction the probe must move to lift up over the Boss 6 Press lt F10 gt to start the probing cycle A If the Z clearance you entered is too small the probe will stop and show an error message Correct the problem by repeating the previous steps If the approximate diameter you entered is too small the probe will bounce by 10 percent of its diameter across the top surface until 1 It finds the correct edge 2 The additional distance searched is equal to Parameter 16 or 3 The travel limit is reached We Once the probing cycle is complete the probe will be positioned at the center of the boss at the Z clearance level entered Press lt ESC gt to return to
76. s too hot job canceled CNC7 estimates that one or more motors have reached the limit temperature set in Parameter 30 16 5 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect The current job is canceled and power is released Start of new job after motors have cooled below warning temperature Jog Panel Offline Jog panel failure or loose cable All buttons on jog panel are inoperative By reconnecting jog panel cable and appearance of next message Jog Panel Online Loose jog panel cable has been reconnected All buttons on jog panel are operative Feedrate Override Offline Jog panel failure or loose cable Feedrate knob and some jog panel keys are inoperative By appearance of next message Feedrate Override Online Loose jog panel cable has been reconnected Feedrate Override knob is operative Spindle Override Offline Jog panel failure or loose cable Spindle knob and some jog panel keys are inoperative By appearance of next message Spindle Override Online Loose jog panel cable has been reconnected Spindle Override knob is operative MPG Offline MPG failure or loose ca
77. the first circle the X and Y coordinates for the second circle s center point and the second circle s radius F6 Tangent Arc Arc Arc Intercon Mill v8 00 Current Part BUGCO3 ICN NO020 Linear Arc Tangent Arcs Circle 1 X 2 000 Y 0 000 Radius 1 000 Circle 2 X 4 000 Ya 0 000 Radius 2 000 Circle 3 R 0 250 Y 3 307 C2 Radius 3 000 1 Tangent 1 X 1 438 T2 Y 0 827 Tangent 2 X 2 500 Ya 1 323 Solution 1 of 4 Prey Next Clear Prev Next Hide Copy Copy Graphic Soln Soln All Solver Solver Math lt lt lt gt On Off Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 E F8 E9 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 46 Given the center points C1 and C2 and radii of two arcs and the radius of a third arc find the center point of the third arc and the tangent points T1 and T2 You must enter the radius of the tangent arc the X and Y coordinates for the first circle s center point the radius of the first circle the X and Y coordinates for the second circle s center point and the second circle s radius F7 Intersection Line Line Intercon Mill v8 00 Current Part BUGCO3 ICN NO020 Linear Line Intersection Line Line 1 op ie J i x2 5 000 x L2P1 L1P2 Y2 5 000 x Angle 45 000 Line 2 x1 0 000 x T1 y1 5 000 x X2 8 000 x v2 eT x Angle 323 130 Inter X 2 857 section Y 2 857 j L1P1 x Given Space to Toggle Solution 1 of 1 L2P2 Prey
78. the main job file it will be interpreted as the end of the job If M99 is encountered in an M function macro file it will be interpreted as the end of any enclosing subprogram or macro or as the end of the job M100 Wait For Input to Open M100 waits for the specified input to open Example M94 7 turns on output 7 M100 1 waits for acknowledgment on input 1 M101 Wait For Input to Close M101 waits for the specified input to close Example M95 7 turns off output 7 M101 1 waits for acknowledge on input 1 M102 Restart Program M102 performs any movement requested and restarts the program from the first line The Z axis is NOT moved to the home position and the operator is NOT prompted to press the CYCLE START button to continue M Series Operator s Manual3 2 04 13 7 M103 Programmed Action Timer M103 starts a timer for the operations in a program If M104 stop timer is not executed before the specified time expires the program will be canceled and the message Programmed action timer expired will be displayed This function detects the failure of a device connected to the PLC and prevents further programmed action M103 and M104 must be used for air drill cycles Example Activate a device and wait for a response If there is no response within 4 5 seconds cancel the program M94 12 turn on relay 12 M103 4 5 start 4 5 second timer M100 4 wait for input 4 to open M104 input 4 opened can
79. the various math help solvers These options are shortcuts which have the same effect as pressing lt ESC gt to reach the main math help menu navigating to the previous or next math help option and then pressing lt ENTER gt F6 Hide Math The Hide Math option exits math help mode and returns to the operation edit menu Pressing lt F6 gt to invoke Math Help again will restore Math Help exactly as you left it After copying values from Math Help you can press lt F6 gt to hide Math Help then hit lt F10 gt to accept the values entered F7 Copy lt lt lt F8 Copy gt gt gt The Copy lt lt lt option will move the value from the selected edit operation field into the selected math help menu field and the Copy gt gt gt operation will move the value from the selected math help menu field into the selected edit operation field For both options the selected fields in the math help menu and the operation edit menu are advanced If the graphical display is visible when choosing one of these options the effect is to turn off the graphics display Only when the graphics display is off will the Copy operations actually copy values and advance field selections The currently selected fields have either a box drawn around them or are highlighted depending upon which menu is active The active menu which is either the math operation menu on the left hand side or the operation edit menu on the right hand side depicts the select
80. the workpiece surface the final depth assumes that one depth pass has already been performed and thus subtracts one depth increment from the total depth Depth Increment Specifies the distance to drop each time the contour is repeated This is a positive value that may not exceed the total depth of the operation When you have finished entering the required parameters press lt F10 gt to accept them An operation labeled gt D Rpt lt will be inserted into your program in front of the highlighted operation You may now edit this operation just as you would edit any other operation use the cursor keys to highlight the gt D Rpt lt operation then press lt ENTER gt NOTE If you wish to change the amount of the depth increment per pass after the contour has been programmed you must also change the Z depth of all the operations inside the contour to correspond to the new increment Linear Repeat F2 in the Insert Subprogram Menu The Linear Repeat feature is useful for repeating a part contour multiple times along a straight line The contour formed by these operations may either be closed or open M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 36 by Repeat Number of Copies 4 skip copy 2 pa A N CN SE O gt X increment lt original copy i Increment Specifies the X and Y distances between the start points of each copy of the contour Number of Copies The number of times to repeat the contour Skip Copy
81. then move from the defined center position towards the measurement position it was trying to approach when the unexpected probe contact occurred and continue digitizing Settings 1 and 2 should only be used with extreme caution because probe detection during some positioning moves is turned off and damage to the probe or work piece could occur Parameter 128 Handwheel MPG Mapping This parameter selects how the axes are paired for handwheel operation Each digit in the displayed number represents an axis The first axis is at the far right The value of each digit represents the companion axis 1 to5 A zero digit means no pairing The table below shows how the digits are mapped to axes Axis 5 4 3 2 1 Parameter value 0 0 0 0 0 Axis Companion Example Value 5 4 3 2 1 Comments 0 0000 No pairing 0 1000 1 4 Axes amp 4 paired 0 0043 4 3 Axes 1 amp 3 2 amp 4 paired 0 2100 2 1 Axes 1 amp 3 2 amp 4 paired 0 0021 2 1 Invalid does nothing Axes are paired with themselves M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 21 Only manual axes that are paired with powered axes will produce a valid configuration Manual axes specified by Parameter 128 must be properly configured as handwheel axes in the Motor Parameters screen of the Machine Configuration See the Machine Configuration section earlier in this chapter Parameter 129 Handwheel MPG Display
82. to allow proper code generation to proceed If no problems are encountered during code generation the following message appears Message CNC code generation successful You are now at the main menu again You are now finished designing your part In order to run your part you now need to return to the CNC7 software Program Finished M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 76 Milling The Part Now that the part has been programmed it is time to mill it Take your material and clamp it to the table Remember that the clamps must be positioned such that they do not interfere with the tool as it cuts You may choose either to place the clamps around the edges of the material for the entire process and let the part drop through upon completion or you may wish to pause after milling the circular pockets and place clamps through the holes to prevent the part from moving The second option decreases the chance of the part being marred because it moved during milling Now you need to set your XYZ reference points Insert your longest tool in the quill and follow the procedure listed below PRESS JOG KEYS F1 F1 F10 F1 F10 F1 F10 TOOL CHECK ESC CANCEL F2 F1 ACTION Jog Axis Setup Part Set Next Axis Set Next Axis Set Move tool to Tool Check position Cancel Tool Offsets M Series Operator s Manual COMMENTS Jog the table so that your tool rests on the stock at the locati
83. to be turned on value 0 Notes on Bit 5 This setting overrides only the DRO display options for an axis that has bit 0 set including the Rotary Display Mode bit 1 so that the display does not reflect a degree symbol or any indication of the number of rotations but appears as a linear axis Parameters 95 98 Autotune Move Distance These parameters hold the maximum distance that the control will move each axis in either direction from the starting point when Autotune is executed The default value for these parameters is 2 0 inches Parameter 99 Cutter Compensation Look ahead This parameter sets the default number of line or arc events for the G code interpreter to scan ahead when Cutter Compensation G41 or G42 is active Values of 1 to 10 are allowed for this parameter Parameters 100 115 Intercon parameters These parameters are some of the Intercon setup parameters See Chapter 10 for more information about these parameters Changing values will change Intercon settings and may effect the output of the G code program if it is re posted Parameter 120 Probe Stuck Clearance Amount This parameter specifies the distance that digitizing or probing functions will move to try to clear a stuck probe condition A stuck probe condition exists when the probe detects a point and then moves away but the probe input has not changed It is recommended that this parameter is not changed from its default value without consulting a qualifi
84. to change tools Press lt F10 gt to save changes and exit or lt ESC gt to exit without saving changes If you have both purchased the Tool Length Probing option and also have an automatic tool changer installed then you can press lt F4 gt to perform batch tool measuring by entering a list of multiple tool numbers You can inspect and change any of the 200 Height Offset H values and any of the 200 Diameter D values In most cases you will use the automatic tool length measurement features described below to set H values and you will enter D values manually based on the known or measured diameters of your tools Note that HO1 and D01 H02 and D02 H03 and D03 etc are displayed together on the same line for convenience only The Height and Diameter Offset Numbers can be used independently associations are made only in the Tool Library Height Offset This is the distance the control adjusts Z axis positions when tool length compensation G43 or G44 is used with a particular H value For example if HOO1 is 1 0 and the job contains G43 H1 then CNC7 will shift all Z axis positions down 1 0 to compensate for the shorter tool M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 4 1 To edit the Height Offset entries move to the desired height offset number with the arrow keys lt Page Up gt lt Page Down gt lt HOMES gt and lt END gt You can choose to manually edit or automatically measure the value Height Offsets values are me
85. to produce an exact copy of the digitized part To digitize rectangular surface areas press F1 see grid digitize section To digitize the inside of bores and wells press F2 see radial digitize section To digitize the contour of a part press F3 see contour digitize section Press lt F4 gt to select from the Probing Cycles See Chapter 8 of this manual When using a continuity touch probe clean the metallic surfaces you are digitizing using glass beading or some other suitable method This allows for better contact and produces a more accurate digitizing Brushless motor note If you experience excessive vibration on a brushless drive system use Parameter 10 to select smooth deceleration in digitizing probing moves See Chapter 15 for more information M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 7 1 Grid Digitize F1 from Digitize Screen WCS 1 G54 Current Position inches Job Name E_2_PART CNC X 0 0000 Feedrate 100 Spindle 0 Y 0 0 0 O 0 Feed Hold Off Z 0 0000 Stopped Grid Digitizing 1 Jog Probe Tip to Maximum Height X Patch Length 2 Jog Probe Tip to Surface Corner X Step Over 0 0100 3 Edit the Digitize Parameters Y Patch Width 1 0000 4 Press CYCLE START to Begin Y Step Over 0 0100 Z Maximum Depth 1 0000 Z Step Up 0 1000 Axis to Move First X Digitize File Name Replay Feedrate 3 0000 Multiple Patch No Replay Pattern Zig Zag F10 ESC Grid Digitize Run Setup To set up a di
86. to provide a default D value at each tool change To change the value type a new number and press lt ENTER gt Coolant This field specifies a default coolant type to use with each tool Possible values are FLOOD MIST or OFF Intercon uses this information to automatically insert M7 or M8 after a tool change To change the value press lt SPACE gt until the desired value is shown Spindle This field specifies a default spindle direction to use with each tool Possible values are CW CCW or OFF Intercon uses this information to automatically insert M3 or M4 after a tool change To change the value press lt SPACE gt until the desired value is shown Speed This field specifies a default spindle speed to use with each tool Possible values are 0 to 500000 Intercon uses this information to automatically insert an S code after a tool change To change the value type a new number and press lt ENTER gt Description This field contains a text description of the tool The description will appear in a prompt message on the screen when CNC7 reaches a tool change M6 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 4 5 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 4 6 CHAPTER 5 Power Feed F4 from Setup The Power Feed screen is used to command axis movement All the operations available on the Power Feed screen may also be performed in MDI with the appropriate M and G codes F1 Absolute Power Feed Press lt F1 gt to move an axis to an
87. to the C ICN directory and display all the files located in that directory A G CNC change to the A floppy drive root directory and display all files beginning with G that have a CNC extension TEST CNC display all files beginning with TEST that have one more character TESTA TEST1 etc and have the M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 2 2 CNC extension Using this ability is similar to using DIR and CD in DOS but leaving off the DIR or CD If you can only remember part of the file name or it is located in another directory these commands make it easier to locate See the DIR and CD commands in your PC DOS manual for further information Do NOT load non G code files and attempt to run or edit them This can cause serious damage to the machine and controller destroy the file or cause personal injury F3 MDI Press lt F3 gt to directly enter M and G codes one block at a time Enter one line of M or G codes and then press lt CYCLE START gt The controller will execute the command It will then prompt you for another line When you are finished entering commands press lt ESC gt The Rapid Override function key lt F9 gt appears while in MDI mode see below Examples Block G92X0Y0 _ Set the current XY position to 0 0 Block M26 Set the current Z position as Z home All of the functions of Part Setup and Power Feed can be performed in MDI mode by typing the appropriate G and M codes
88. tolerance while a job is running It is intended for use with a quill locking mechanism It allows the lock to distort and or slip a small amount when under stress If the quill moves more than the given tolerance the job will stop with a fault A typical setting for Parameter 77 is 0 005 inches Parameter 78 Display of Spindle Speed This parameter specifies how the spindle speed is determined and displayed in the CNC7 status window When set to 1 0 the spindle speed is determined from reading the encoder feedback from the axis specified according to parameter 35 which has the number of encoder counts revolution specified in parameter 34 When set to 0 0 the displayed speed is not measured the speed is calculated based upon the set speed spindle override adjustment and gear range Parameter 79 Auto Brake Mode PLC Bit for Uniconsole 2 This parameter specifies which PLC bit signals the state of automatic brake mode when using the Uniconsole 2 console type For other console types it has no effect This parameter can be changed to allow the Auto Brake mode key to be located in different positions on the Uniconsole 2 jog panel The PLC program must be updated to reflect any change in this parameter Parameter 80 Voltage Brake Message Frequency This parameter specifies the number of time the 450 Voltage brake applied message has to occur before we show it in the message window and message log A value of 0 or 1 will display the messa
89. tool changer strobe M101 5 wait for acknowledge on input 5 M95 16 turn off strobe M100 5 wait for acknowledge to be removed M108 Enable Override Controls M108 re enables the feedrate override and or spindle speed override controls if they have previously been disabled with M109 A parameter of 1 indicates the feedrate override 2 indicates the spindle speed override Example M109 1 2 disable feedrate and spindle speed overrides M108 1 r nable feedrate overrid M108 2 re enable spindle speed overrid M109 Disable Override Controls M109 disables the feedrate override and or spindle speed override controls It may be used before tapping with G85 to assure that the machine runs at the programmed feedrate and spindle speed It is not necessary to specify M109 with G74 or G84 those cycles automatically disable and re enable the override controls M109 cannot be used in MDI mode Example M3 S500 start spindle clockwise 500 rpm F27 78 set feedrate for 18 pitch tap M109 1 2 disable feedrate and spindle speed overrides G85 XO YO R 1 Z 5 tap a hole M108 1 2 P nable overrides M115 M116 M125 M126 Protected Move Probing Functions The protected move probing functions provide the capability to program customized probing routines The structure for these commands is Mnnn Axis pos Pp Ff where nnn is either 115 116 125 or 126 Axis is a valid axis lab
90. value can be positive or negative and the movement of the rotary axis will depend on the orientation of the axis Minutes The number of minutes you want to move the rotary axis Values for this field are between 0 and 59 Seconds The number of seconds you want to move the rotary axis Values for this field are between 0 and 59 Decimal degrees This is another method of entering the number of degrees If you choose to enter the movement of the rotary axis with the fields listed above the value of this field will be calculated automatically If you choose to enter the number of degrees with this field or make changes to it then the degrees minutes and seconds will be calculated or changed automatically Values for this field can be positive or negative Rotary movement defaults to zero degrees incremental To enter an absolute rather than incremental rotary position you must press F1 Abs Inc to toggle to absolute M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 8 F3 Arc Mill If you press lt F3 gt for ARC MILL from the Insert Operation screen you will see the following screen Intercon Mill v8 11 Current Part E_2_PART ICN Operation End N0050 Arc Type xX Y Z 0010 Demo Program Arc Type EP amp R 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 0040 Line T 0000 3 0000 1 0000 End X 10 0000 0060 End Prog r 0000 3 0000 Home Y 3 0000 Z 1 0000 Radius 1 5000 Plane XY Direction CY Connect Radius
91. work fine See Machine Be aware that use of this feature Parameters 4 axis on off Parameters for more may cause the handwheel to be information turned on and off when the axis is switched The distance per turn of the handwheel in 1x mode is determined by the following equation Distance Turn Distance Click Clicks Turn Parameter 40 is the distance click Motor parameter Revs Unit holds the Clicks Turn value You may adjust the Clicks Turn value to achieve a different distance per turn For example if Parameter 40 is 0 0001 inches and Clicks Turn is 100 the distance per turn is 0 01 inches To get 0 05 inches per turn use 500 clicks per turn This assumes that the encoder counts per rev is accurate Be aware that Axis Summing parameter 75 may conflict with handwheel configuration If you wish to use both handwheels and axis summing be sure that the manual input for axis summing is the first manual axis Axis summing cannot use a manual input that is used as a handwheel M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 28 CHAPTER 16 CNC7 Messages CNC7 Startup errors 101 Message Error initializing graphics cannot continue text mode Cause Missing GFT files or no VGA adapter found Effect Exit CNC7 with return code 63 Fix files and try again prompt from CNC7M4 BAT Removed By CNC7M4 BAT 102 Message Error initializing CPU7 cannot continue text mode Cause Error while sending
92. you are specifying an end point and radius EP amp R arc or a Three Point arc Also the coordinate that does not lie in the plane of the arc cannot be edited it is automatically carried forward from the last operation M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 9 Angle Number of degrees through which the cutter will travel This value must lie between 0 and 360 degrees You will be able to edit this field only if you are specifying a center point and angle CP amp A arc Radius Distance from the center of the arc to its edge This value must be greater than 0 You will only be able to edit this value if you are specifying an end point and radius EP amp R arc Plane This determines whether the arc is to be milled in the XY ZX or YZ plane If any of the Z coordinate values are tied to the Z home position only XY plane arcs may be selected Direction Determines whether the arc moves clockwise CW or counterclockwise CCW Note that the direction of XZ arcs is judged looking Y i e from the front of the machine This is natural but it is opposite of the way arcs are specified in G codes Intercon automatically makes this translation when it generates CNC codes Connect Radius This field works like the Linear Mill connect radius It allows for the blending of an arc into the next line or arc operation Feedrate Speed at which the cutter moves The feedrate can be toggled to modal fixed or slave this is indicated by the symb
93. 0 TOOL CHECK ESC CANCEL F2 F1 F10 ACTION Jog Axis Setup Part Set Next Axis Set Next Axis Set Move tool to Tool Check position Cancel Tool Offsets Save COMMENTS Jog the table so that your tool rests on the stock at the location that will represent X0 and YO Enter the main program CNC7 Setup screen We are going to establish the part XYZ zero at the current tool location Access the Part Setup options Set your X zero position at current tool location Select the Y axis next Set your Y zero position at current tool location Select the Z axis next Set your Z zero position at current tool location Moves the quill to the Z home position if the home position has been set Moves tool to Z limit switch and sets home position if not Leave Part Setup screen Access Tool Library Editor This is the place where we want to measure the actual heights of our tools since we could not set the actual values in Intercon You need to make sure that the tool diameter and height offset values are the correct ones for the tools you are going to be using Inspect the values for D001 H001 D002 and H002 D001 should be 0 1875 H1 should be 0 0000 the two inch tool D002 should be 0 2500 and H002 should be 1 0000 the one inch tool If any of these values are incorrect use the arrow keys to select the incorrect values Enter the new values in their places and press lt ENTER gt to accept them
94. 0 Position screen If the Z clearance you entered is too small the probe will stop and show an error message Correct the problem by repeating the previous steps If the approximate width you entered is too small the probe will bounce by 10 percent of its width across the top surface until 1 It finds the correct edge 2 The additional distance searched is equal to Parameter 16 or 3 The travel limit is reached Once the probing cycle is complete the probe will be positioned at the center of the web at the Z clearance level entered Press lt ESC gt to return to the Set Part 0 Position screen M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 8 4 F5 In Cnr Inside Corner Press lt F5 gt to enter the Inside Corner screen A picture similar to the following will appear with instructions and an input field The steps for this cycle are similar to that of a slot cycle The main difference is that you need to enter a clearance amount This clearance amount is the approximate distance upward on the Z axis that the probe needs to move to clear the corner Press lt F1 gt and the screen will cycle through one of the probe orientations shown here If the corner is rounded jog the probe far enough away for it to miss the curved area during the probing cycle at least twice the corner radius At the end of the probing cycle the probe will be positioned above the corner at the Z clearance level entered Press lt ESC gt to return to the Set Part 0 P
95. 0 1 0000 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home 0070 Tap 0 0000 0 0000 0 1000 0080 Face 3 0000 6 0000 0 0000 0090 Rect Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 0100 Circ Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 0110 Frame 1 7500 6 5000 0 0000 0120 Thread 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 0130 M4 Select Low Gear Range Stat 0140 Rotary 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 gt 3 S 0150 Comp Left 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 t 0160 Depth Rpt 3 0000 6 0000 0 4000 1001 Number 0000 0170 End Prog 3 0000 6 0000 Home Length 0 0000 Cutter Comp Off Feedrate 0 0000 Coolant Type Off M9 Spindle Speed 0 Spindle Dir Off M5 File odiu insert Cut reste Copy ents Graph Setup i Post F1 E2 E3 F4 E5 E6 E F9 F10 While in this mode different operations can be navigated and highlighted for additional actions by using the arrow keys and the lt HOME gt lt END gt lt PAGE UP gt and lt PAGE DOWN gt keys Teach Mode The X Y and Z keys will fill in a field with the current position for the related axis This feature works when editing most fields in an operation Press lt F9 gt when editing an operation to display a DRO M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 1 F1 File Choosing lt F1 gt File will display the screen below Intercon stores part designs in files identified with the extension ICN For example if you specify the name of a given part design as E_Z_CAM this part design will be saved on disk in a file called E_LZ_CAM ICN The ICN files are only readable
96. 00 INC 0070 Drill Depth Total 0 5000 INC 0080 End Prog 0 0000 0 0000 Home Increment 0 0000 Rapid Clearance 0 0500 Plunge Rate 20 0000 Toggle wae Graph F3 F6 E8 Toge Pec ep t F9 F10 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 17 The numbers in the fields on the screen correspond to the following example shown here graphically WAI Deep Hole Drilling Feed move ____ sy Rapid move nn gt EEEE PI gt O E Clearance Height raw aia Rapid To Depth i i Incr do do ci Rapid Depth LJ Ed fClear Incr Total Rapid Depth Depth Clear Oe Be ee a ko eed Sree co Surface Height Incr Depth Where Cycle Type Selects one of three drilling operations Drilling Chip Breaking or Deep Hole drilling Press lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt to toggle between the three choices Position Specifies the X and Y coordinates where the drilling will take place If either the X or Y coordinate is an incremental value you will have the option to drill multiple holes in a linear pattern See Canned Cycle Introduction 2 Surface Height Absolute Z axis position from where each incremental depth is measured Clearance Height This parameter specifies the Z axis height used when performing rapid moves to the position of each hole being drilled Rapid To Depth The depth below the Clearance Height but above the Surface Height to which the cutter rapid moves before beginning t
97. 0000 0120 Thread 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 0130 MH Select Low Gear Range 0140 Rotary 0150 End Prog 4 0000 8 0000 Home Abs Math Teach Inc Help Graph Mode freser Fi F FB Fg F10 F7 Cutter Compensation When you press lt F7 gt from the Insert Operation screen you will see the following screen Intercon Mill v8 11 Current Part EZ_PART ICH Operation End N0150 Cutter Comp Type x Y 0010 Demo Program Cutter Comp El 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home 0070 Tap 0 0000 0 0000 0 1000 0080 Face 3 0000 6 0000 0 0000 0090 Rect Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 0100 Circ Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 0110 Frame 1 7500 6 6625 0 0000 0120 Thread 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 0130 MH Select Low Gear Range 0140 Rotar 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 omp 0160 End Prog 4 0000 8 0000 Home Math Teach Toggle Help Graph Mode F6 ES Fg F3 accent F10 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 33 You can press lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt to select cutter compensation Left Right or Off Cutter compensation may be used with Linear Mill Frame Mill and Rapid Traverse operations For details on using cutter compensation see Chapter 2 of the M Series operator s manual The Rectangular Pocket Circular Pocket and Frame Mill canned cycles perform cutter compensation automatically If compensation
98. 1 0 Y1 0 Z0 rapid to start position xl yl Z0 G02 X2 Y2 Z0 R1 arce to X2 Y2 Z0 with radius of 1 small arc solution X Y Example 2 big arc solution negative radius G17 G90 F25 select XY plane and absolute positioning GOO X1 0 Y1 0 ZO rapid to start position x1 yl Z0 G02 X2 Y2 Z0 R 1 jarc to X2 Y2 Z0 with radius of 1 big arc solution METHOD 2 USING FINAL POINT AND PARAMETERS I J K Another way to specify a helical or circular operation is using the parameters I J K instead of the radius R The parameters I J and K are the incremental distances from the start point to the center of the arc I X center X start valid for G17 amp G18 J Y center Y start valid for G17 amp G19 K Z center Z start valid for G18 amp G19 Examples Circular motion See graph in method 1 example 2 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 4 G17 G90 F25 7select XY plane and absolute positioning GOO X1 0 Y1 0 Z0 rapid to start position xl yl Z0 G02 X2 Y2 Z0 J1 arc to X2 Y2 Z0 with radius of 1 Actual Tool Path ooeeveveveesmemee Tool Path Shape Extended Point X3 Y2 Z1 Point X2 Y1 Z0 iA x Helical motion G17 G90 F30 select XY plane and absolute positioning GOO X3 0 Y2 0 21 0 vapid to start position X3 Y2 Z1 GO2 X2 0 Y1 0 I 1 0 J0 0 20 0 CW XY arc from X3 Y2 to X2 Y1 Center at X2 Y2 7 Helical Z move from 1 to 0 G04 Dwell G4 cau
99. 11 the file CNC7 M72 will be executed when the Aux key was pressed All remaining parameters are reserved for further expansion M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 25 PID Configuration Pressing lt F4 gt from the Configuration screen will bring up the PID Configuration screen The PID Configuration screen provides qualified technicians with a method of changing the PID dependent data to test and configure your machine The PID Parameters should not be changed without contacting your dealer Corrupt or incorrect values could cause damage to the machine personal injury or both WCS 1 G54 Current Position Inches X 3 16089 recite 105x Spindle 1506 M 2 23898 0 00000 Y Z B 0 00000 Job Name TEST CNC Processing Stopped Processing Stopped Press CYCLE START to start job PID Configuration Axis Kp Ki Kd Limit Kg Kyi Ka Accel Max Rate X 1 000 0 00391 15 000 32000 0 oO 0 0 500 300 0 Y 1 000 0 00391 15 000 32000 0 0 0 0 500 300 0 Z 1 000 0 00391 15 000 32000 0 0 0 0 500 300 0 B 1 000 0 00391 15 000 32000 0 0 0 0 500 300 0 N 1 000 0 00391 15 000 32000 0 0 0 0 500 300 0 Axis Error Sum Delta PID Out Abs Pos Line PID Collection Program 0 0 OFF 2 1 Y 0 0 0 OFF 0 2 Z 0 0 0 OFF 0 3 B 0 0 0 OFF 0 4 N 0 0 0 DFF 0 5 PID Collection Axis X Density l1 Type 0 4 0 File PID Pros Collect tune Drag Laser Plot El EZ E3 E3 F E7 Fa F1 PID P
100. 4th K O is invalid These can be used as private R W 16 5th I P is invalid local variables in any program R W 17 18 Macro argument Q R or 5th J K or subprogram See R W 19 21 Macro arguments R T or 6th set of I K examples R W 22 24 Macro arguments U W or 7th set of I K R W 25 27 Macro arguments X Z or 8th set of I K R W 28 30 9th set of I K R W 31 33 10th set of I K R W Floating point value 100 149 User variables Initialized to 0 0 at start of job R W processing 150 159 Nonvolatile user variables Floating point value saved in R W CNC7 JOB file 2400 2401 2418 Active WCS WCS 1 18 CSR angles R W 2500 2501 2518 Active WCS WCS 1 18 Axis 1 values X R W 2600 2601 2618 Active WCS WCS 1 18 Axis 2 values Y R W 2700 2701 2718 Active WCS WCS 1 18 Axis 3 values Z Figstine pout value R W 2800 2801 2818 Active WCS WCS 1 18 Axis 4 values W R W 3901 Parts Cut Part R W 3902 Parts Required Part Cnt R W 4001 Move mode 0 0 rapid or 1 0 feed R 4002 Constant surface speed mode lathe only 96 0 on 97 0 off R 4003 Positioning mode 90 0 abs or 91 0 inc R 4005 Feedrate mode lathe only 98 0 units per min or R 99 0 units per rev 4006 Units of measure 20 0 imp or 21 0 metric R 4014 WCS 54 0 71 0 WCS 1 18 R 4109 Feedrate F R 4119 Spindle Speed S R 4120 Tool Number T Floating point value R 4121 Mill Current height offset number H R Lathe Current offset oo in
101. 8 0000 0 0000 0100 Circ Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 0110 Frame 1 7500 6 6625 0 0000 0120 Thread 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 0130 MH Select Low Gear Range 0140 Rotary 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 0150 Comp Left 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 0160 End Prog 4 0000 8 0000 Home Repeat Repeat Nirror Rotate Fi F2 E3 F4 You may now select the type of subprogram desired A typical subprogram screen appears as follows M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 34 Intercon Mill v6 11 Current Part E_ _PART ICN Operation End N0160 Repeat Type X Y 0010 Demo Program Start Block NOO020 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 End Block NO080 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 Increment X 2 0000 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Increment Y 1 0000 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Clearance Height 0 1000 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home Plunge Rate 10 0000 0070 Tap 0 0000 0 0000 0 1000 Number of Copies 10 0080 Face 3 0000 6 0000 0 0000 0090 Rect Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 Skip list 0100 Circ Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 003 005 00 EE 0110 Frame 1 7500 6 6625 0 0000 0120 Thread 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 0130 MH Select Low Gear Range 0140 Rotary 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 0150 Comp Left 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 epea 0170 End Prog 4 0000 8 0000 Home Math Teach Help Graph Mode accent Fa Fa Fg F10 All subprogram operations
102. Amount of material to be removed on the finish pass Finish Pass Feedrate Speed at which cutter performs finish pass Finish Pass Tool Number Tool number to be used for the finish pass Surface Height The Z axis position from where the incremental depth is measured Clearance Height This parameter specifies the Z axis height to which the tool is retracted before moving to different segments during a pocket cleanout Rapid To Depth The depth to which rapid positioning moves will be made to when moving the Z axis downward Depth Total The total depth of the pocket measured as an incremental depth from the surface height M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 30 Depth per Pass The depth amount of cut to be taken to reach the total depth This value must be greater than 0 0 and cannot exceed the total depth Depth Plunge Rate The feedrate at which the Z axis is moved when plunging to a lower depth After the cleanout parameters are accepted the a screen similar to the following appears Intercon Mill v8 00 Current Part E_2_PART ICN F2 Operation Type xX 0010 Demo program 0020 Line 0 0000 0030 Tool 1 0 0000 0040 Cleanout 0 0000 0050 Line 0 0000 0060 Line 3 0000 0070 Line 0 0000 0080 Line 0 0000 0090 End Cleanout 0 0000 0100 End Prog 0 0000 Linear Arc E3 End Y 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 3 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 2 5 0000 Home 0 2000
103. At Powerup This field controls how the machine will home at powerup Set Machine Home at Powerup to Limit Switch if you have limit home switches or safe hard stops for all axes and wish to use the switches or stops for homing Set Machine Home at Powerup to Ref Mark if you have fixed reference marks for any axis In Ref Mark homing axes that contain a zero 0 for the plus or minus home switch in the Machine Configuration designate that axis to have a Ref Mark home while non zero values specify Limit Switch homing Set Machine Home at Powerup to Jog if you need to manually move or jog the machine to its home position See Chapter 1 for more information about machine home PLC Type This field tells the controller which PLC type is installed The possible values are Absent Lite Normal and Dual The value should not be changed unless a different PLC type is installed Use the lt SPACE gt key to select among the four options The standard PLC types installed are dependent on your M series number and the options that may have been purchased Check the information sheet on page ix for which type of PLC is installed on your machine or check with your dealer for more information Console Type Set for type of console installed T for lathe M for mill Jog Panel Required This field tells the controller whether a Jog Panel must be installed in order to run jobs Screen Blank Delay This field determines the delay used fo
104. CENTROID M SERIES Operator s Manual Version 8 22 Rev 030826 U S Patent 6490500 2004 Centroid Corp Howard PA 16841 CNC Control Information Sheet Fill out the following and fax back to Centroid Tech support 814 353 9265 Date Company name Your name Address City State Zip Phone Fax Control Serial Number K Software Version Approx purchase date Dealer Machine Brand Machine type check below Knee Mill Machining Center Bed Mill Lathe Router Other Please indicate the messages word for word in the message window Message Window Example Error Messages CCU TIVIU UII IIC W Processing 3 Hoving 4 X axis position error 5 Stall job cancelled Describe the symptoms What does the system do or not do System Voltages requires an AC DC voltmeter Source L1 L2 VAC Source L1 L3 VAC Source L2 L3 VAC Drive Voltage VDC Measured at terminal 9 GND and 10 Vm on the servo drive E Stop Released Phase Converter Yes No Control Parameters Please fill in the parameter tables below To get to the parameter screens 1 Go to the Main screen of CNC7 software this is the screen that appears when your system is first turned on 2 Press lt F1 gt to enter the Setup screen 3 Press lt F3 gt to enter the Configuration screen 4 Type 137 in the window which asks for th
105. E9 E10 The Part Setup menu is used to set the part location or the coordinate system origin for the part lt F1 gt will display the position for the next axis If changes were made to the current axis but not yet accepted they will be discarded lt F6 gt will select the previous work piece coordinate system The position that will be set only affects the currently selected coordinate system lt F7 gt will select the next work piece coordinate system The position that will be set only affects the currently selected coordinate system lt F8 gt can be used to automatically detect coordinate system rotation This function key appears only when the software option for Coordinate System Rotation is unlocked lt F9 gt will open the Work Coordinate System WCS Configuration screen See the Work Coordinate System Configuration section later in this chapter for a complete description lt F10 gt will accept the position for the current axis correcting for edge finder diameter based on the approach direction if appropriate It will not automatically advance to the next axis M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 3 1 For description of lt F4 gt and lt F5 gt see Chapter 8 Operation Description Setting the part zeros establishes a coordinate system with an origin at the part zero The lt F1 gt Next Axis option selects the axis to be defined next This field toggles between axis X Y Z and the fourth axis if you have a 4 axis
106. ES DIGITIZE _PATH C CNC7 NCFILES CAD_PATH C CNC7 NCFILES Path tag Purpose of path INTERCON_PATH Main directory containing ICN files ICN_POST_PATH Directory INTERCON places CNC files created when posting ICN files DIGITIZE_PATH Directory digitize files are saved to Directory used by F4 key in Load Job menu when parameter 4 is set to 2 CAD_PATH Directory for CAD files generated with the DIG gt CAD option in the Utility menu M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 4 Machine Configuration Pressing lt F2 gt from the configuration screen will display the machine configuration screen in the edit window The machine configuration screen provides you with a method of changing machine dependent data If you wish to change the Jog or Motor parameters press lt F1 gt or lt F2 gt to select the Jog or Motor screens use the arrow keys to move the cursor and select the desired field Type the new value and press lt ENTER gt or press lt SPACE gt to toggle When you are done editing press lt F10 gt to save any changes you have made If you wish to discard your changes and restore the previous values press lt ESC gt Pressing lt ESC gt again will return you to the previous screen Setup F1 Jog Parameters Values should be recorded on the Control Parameters page at beginning of manual This screen contains jog and feedrate information See the figure below CS 1
107. Effect Job canceled Removed Start of new job 308 Prompt Waiting for input NN Cause M100 or M101 executing Effect Mnn or M6 Insert Tool NNN Tool library description message displayed if M function macro executing Removed After input is received 309 Prompt Waiting for CYCLE START button M Series Operator s Manual 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 Cause Effect Removed Prompt Cause Effect Removed Prompt Cause Effect Removed Prompt Cause Effect Removed Prompt Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Message Cause 3 2 04 MO M1 M100 75 or Block Mode Block Mode message displayed if CNC program running in block mode After CYCLE START pressed Waiting for output NN M100 or M101 executing Mnn or M6 Insert Tool NNN Tool library description message displayed if M function macro executing After output is in correct state Waiting for memory NN M100 or M101 executing Mnn or M6 Insert Tool NNN Tool library description message displayed if M function macro executing After memory is in correct state Waiting for PLC operation Mnn PLC program not clearing PLC operation in progress Mnn or M6 Insert Tool NNN Tool library description message displayed if M function macro executing After PLC program completes operation
108. Intercon comment generation 0 Intercon clearance amount 0 1 Intercon spindle coolant delay 3 0 Intercon corner federate override 50 0 Intercon modal line parameters 0 Intercon modal arc parameters 0 Intercon modal drilling cycle parameters 0 Intercon Help 0 Probe stuck clearance amount 0 10 1121 Grid digitize prediction minimum Z pullback 0 002 Grid digitizing deadband move distance 0 0002 123 Radial digitizing clearance move 0 123 Handwheel MPG mapping 0 Handwheel MPG display control 0 1130 Zaxis on off selection 0 1131 J4 axis on off selection 0 1132 5 axis heating coefficient Refer to text 136 5 axis cooling coefficient Refer to text Message log priority level 1 1000 Message log trim amount 1000 DRO properties load meters 4 5 digits DTG 0 E macro properties fast branching Feed hold threshold for feed rate override 0 Run Time Graphics 0 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 10 48 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 Parameter 1 Y jog Key orientation This parameter is a 3 bit field where bit 0 is not used in the mill software Bit 1 sets the direction of movement that the Y and Y jog keys would cause and bit 2 will swap the X and Y jog keys This should always be set to 0 except for very special applications Value lO NotUsed o o O 1 Flip movement direction of Y jog keys Exchange X axis and Y axis jog keys Yes 4 No 0 Parameter 2 G code Interpretation Control This parameter is a 3 bit field that cont
109. Intercon main menu will allow the currently highlighted operation to be modified When an operation is modified the fields for that operation are displayed on the right hand side When modifying an operation the lt PAGE UP gt and lt PAGE DOWN gt keys can be used to move up and down through the Intercon operations listed on the left hand side of the screen F3 Insert Choosing lt F3 gt will insert a new operation before the operation that is currently highlighted unless the highlighted operation is the first operation in which case the inserted operation will be inserted as the second operation F4 Cut Choosing lt F4 gt will cut remove the highlighted operation from the program The operation that is cut is placed onto the clipboard stack F5 Paste Choosing lt F5 gt will paste the last operation that was cut or copied into the clipboard stack into the current program line that is before the highlighted operation The number of operations that are currently in the clipboard stack is indicated by a number on the second line of the Paste key As long as you stay in Intercon the clipboard stack will remain intact You may cut and copy operations from one program and paste them into a different program F6 Copy Choosing lt F6 gt will copy the highlighted operation into the clipboard stack and advance the cursor to the next operation M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 3 F7 Copy Menus Choosing lt F7 gt w
110. M Series Operator s Manual 11 2 Q Parameter Q is used as a depth parameter in canned drilling cycles Example G73 X1 5 Y2 0 Z2 75 R 25 Q 25 F5 Q Sets the depth cut at 25 R Radius Return Point Parameter R can represent the radius a return point or a general parameter This is used as a variable for any of those values in the NC file R is similar to the P parameter Examples G10 D5 R 5 set D5 0 5 G81 XO YO Z 5 R 1 F15 drill to Z 5 with return height of 1 S Spindle Speed Setting Specifying a spindle speed causes the automatic spindle speed setting to be immediately updated Setting the spindle speed does not cause the spindle to start The maximum spindle speed is used to compute the output value to the spindle speed control circuit Example S1400 M3 Starts the spindle CW at 1400 RPM NOTE The Spindle Speed is used in conjunction with the maximum spindle speed to determine the actual spindle speed output to the PLC Also this only works when a VFD Variable Frequency Drive spindle drive is connected T Select Tool Prompts the operator to insert the proper tool or change tools when M6 is encountered Example T1 M6 Prompt operator to load tool number 1 T2 no action GOXOYO move to X0 YO M6 prompt operator to load tool number 2 Visible Comment Identifier The colon is used to indicate the start of a comment line within a CNC program The colon must b
111. M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 22 The parameters in the previous screen correspond to the following dimensions Surface eee CK Depth St nity Length X Start X and Y coordinates of the starting corner of the area to be faced Surface Height Z coordinate of the top of the area to be faced Length X axis dimension of the area to be faced If a negative value is entered for the length the facing will occur in the negative X axis direction from the X axis start position otherwise facing will occur in the positive X axis direction from the X axis start position Width Y axis dimension of the area to be faced If a negative value is entered for the width the facing will occur in the negative Y axis direction from the Y axis start position otherwise facing will occur in the positive Y axis direction from the Y axis start position Depth Incremental amount of material to be removed from Surface Height Step Increment Distance that the cutter will step over in the Y direction for each pass Plunge Rate Z axis speed of descent during facing The plunge rate can be toggled to modal fixed or slave this is indicated by the symbol beside the plunge rate field If the plunge rate is modal then it will have the M symbol or if it is fixed it will have the F symbol The slave plunge rate has no symbol and is set to the last modal plunge rate set in the program when the modal plunge rate changes all th
112. M functions M122 and M123 Bit Function Description Parameter Value 0 Suppress output of axis labels by M122 Yes 1 No 0 1 Insert commas between positions values with M122 and M123 Yes 2 No 0 2 Suppress spaces between positions values outputted by M122 and Yes 4 No M123 0 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 17 Parameters 73 74 Canned Cycle Parameters P74 specifies the number of the M function that is executed at the bottom of the G74 or G84 tapping cycle P73 specifies the retract amount used during a G73 peck drilling cycle Parameter 75 Summing Display Control This parameter indicates which axes are to be summed and how the results are to be displayed on the DRO The parameter can contain up to four digits The position and value of each digit has special significance as indicated in the tables below Parameter Depe Meaning Digit Paeti i e Sam off t s Column Axis1 4 4 AxistoSum _ _ 10 s Column __ Axis2 5 reserved D s Column Axis3 j Disable sispla 1 000 s I7 Display if moved Axis 4 gt f Column B8 Display if other moves 9 reserved Here are some examples using the axis summing display parameter Paramet er Sum Z axis 3 with M 4 display sum in Z DRO position 400 Sum Z axis 3 with M 4 display sum in M DRO position 3000 Sum Z axis 3 with M 4 display sum in Z DRO position 6400 and suppres
113. Message Cause Effect Removed Error No Z point on line NNNNN No Z value specified for canned cycle Job canceled Start of new job Error Ggg invalid on line NNNNN gg 76 86 87 88 Unimplemented canned cycle requested Job canceled Start of new job Error No Q value on line NNNNN Q value not specified for G73 or G83 Job canceled Start of new job Error No P value on line NNNNN P value dwell time not specified for G82 or G89 Job canceled Start of new job Miscellaneous errors 901 902 903 904 Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Ref point invalid on line NNNNN G30 with invalid P value must be 1 or 2 Job canceled Start of new job No prior G28 or G30 on line NNNNN G29 with no preceding G28 or G30 Job canceled Start of new job Warning No coordinates for G92 on line NNNNN G92 with no axis coordinates to set Remainder of line processed job continues When next message appears Invalid plane for arc on line NNNNN M Series Operator s Manual 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect R
114. Mill v8 00 Current Part BUGCO3 ICN N0020 Linear Arc Tangent Arc T1 Circle 1 X 0 000 Y 0 000 Radius 1 000 Circle 2 X 0 000 C2 Ye 0 500 Radius 0 500 Tangent X 0 000 Y 1 000 C1 Solution 1 of 1 Prev Next Clear Prev Next Hide Copy Copy Graphic Soln Soln All Solver Solver Math lt lt lt gt gt On Off Fi F2 E3 F4 E5 F6 E F8 E9 Given the center points CP1 and CP2 and radii R1 and R2 of two arcs find the point T at which they are tangent You must enter the X and Y coordinates for the first circle s center point the radius of the first circle the X and Y coordinates for the second circle s center point and the second circle s radius M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 45 F5 Tangent Line Arc Arc Intercon Mill v8 00 Current Part BUGCO3 ICN NO020 Linear Line Tangent Arcs Circle 1 x 0 000 Y 0 000 Radius 1 000 Circle 2 xX 4 000 2 Radius 1 500 Tangent 1 X 0 125 Y 0 992 C1 C2 Tangent 2 X 3 813 Y 1 488 Solution 1 of 4 Hide Math F6 Next Soln F2 Prey Clear Prev Soln All Solver F1 E3 F Given the center points CP1 and CP2 and radii R1 and R2 of two arcs find the lines defined by T1 T8 tangent to both arcs Next Solver Copy Copy Graphic y K lt gt gt gt On Off Er Fs You must enter the X and Y coordinates for the first circle s center point the radius of
115. Move cursor to beginning of End line Page Up Move cursor to end of line Page Down Scroll up one screen Ctrl Page Up Scroll down one screen Ctrl Page Down Move to beginning of file Move to end of file Delete character under cursor Del Deleting at end of line joins with next line Delete character in front of Deleting at beginning of line joins cursor to preceding line Delete current line Displays list of all editor commands Pressing any key returns to the editor Load a file for editing Ifa file name is specified for a file that does not exist a new file will be created M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 2 8 See user dialog table below Save current file to disk See user dialog table below Quit using editor See user dialog table below Specify string to search for this is a case sensitive search Exit Search forward Search forward again Replace Replace all occurrences of one text string with another string See user dialog table below Escape Cancel current dialog sequence Table 1 Editor Function Descriptions The table below describes the dialog sequences involved in using editor functions Function Condition Question Save file A file with the current name already exists You answer N to the replace question You choose a file name that already exists Load file You have made changes to the current file and have not saved them You answer Y to the save question
116. N 5 YN o x cas res eee re Cart aes Fa J oo Ser e J he ze wee an 5 y 0 7500 x 0 4250 1 2500 R 3 1500 FIG 1 Part to be machined Part Creation The process of creating a part is called part programming Each feature of the part will become an operation in your program Before beginning decide where you want the X0 and YO reference For this particular demo the center of the Bolt Hole pattern was selected for convenience Beginning from the Intercon File Menu press lt F1 gt File if the file menu is not shown the following series of keystrokes will describe the step by step process of designing the part shown in Figure 1 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 58 PRESS F1 F4 N0020 Tool change ACTION COMMENTS New Create a new program by filling in the appropriate program name we recommend C_ROD and your name Press Enter or lt F10 gt to accept the new name Enter Intercon Tutorial 2 for the description Press lt F10 gt to accept Tool M6 Describe the tool below The position values specify where to do the tool change The Yes in the Actual Tool Change field turns off the spindle and coolant upon reaching this spot Use a 2 0000 x 0 1875 inch cutter The height and diameter are updated based on the offsets The longest tool should have a 0 0000 height offset If this tool does not have the desired spindle CW and coolant Flood settings you should also select these va
117. N0120 Thread Mill Type X Y 0010 Demo Program Center Xi 4 0000 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 Y 8 0000 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 Diameter 2 0000 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Threads 7 Inch 20 0000 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Thread Pitch 0 0500 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home Thread Type Right hand 0070 Tap 0 0000 0 0000 0 1000 Thread Direction Top to Bottom 0080 Face 3 0000 6 0000 0 0000 Tool Type Single Point 0090 Rect Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 Thread Approach Internal 0100 Circ Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 Feedrate 30 0000 0110 Frame 1 7500 6 6625 0 0000 Surface Height 0 0000 0120 Thread Clearance Height 0 1000 INC 0130 End Prog 1 7500 6 56625 Home Rapid to Depth 0 1000 INC Depth Total 0 5000 INC Plunge Rate f 10 0000 Number of Passes Math Teach Help Graph Mode accent Fa FB Fg F10 Multiple Thread Mill Single Thread Mill 3 10 28 The parameters on the screen correspond to the following Major Diameter Minor Diameter Sy Z Surface Height z5 m gt Threads Inch mm lt Internal Thread External Thread Where Center X and Y coordinates of the center of the thread mill operation Diameter Major diameter of thread for external thread milling and minor diameter for internal thread milling Thread Unit Number of threads per inch or mm Used to calculate thread pitch Thread Pitch Thread pitch calculated from threads unit f
118. O 100 When comparison rounding is off the EQ usually returns false If parameter 144 is set to 9 the programmer can shorten the previous example to IF A EQ B THEN GOTO 100 Parameter 145 Advanced Macro Properties Fast Branching This parameter turns fast branching on 1 and off 0 The other bits of this parameter are reserved for future use If fast branching is disabled CNC7 searches forward in the program for the first matching block number and resumes searching if necessary from the top of the program For this reason backward branches take longer than forward branches and backward branch times depend on the total program size If the program is sufficiently large use of the GOTO statement could introduce temporary pauses M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 23 When fast branching is enabled CNC7 remembers the locations of block numbers as it finds them during program execution Backward branches always take place immediately The first forward branch to a block not yet encountered will take additional time as CNC7 searches forward for the block number however subsequent forward branches to that block number will take place immediately The trade off for using fast branching is that all line numbers at a given level of program or subprogram must be unique and programs will use more memory approximately 16kilobytes of memory for every 1000 block numbers in the program Parameter 146 Feed Hold Thr
119. Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 Plunge Type Ramped 0100 Circ Foc Plunge Angle 0 00 0110 End Prog 4 0000 8 0000 Home Rough Cuts Conventional Stepover 0 1950 Feedrate 30 0000 Finish Pass Climb Amount 0 0200 Feedrate 30 0000 Abs Math Teach Tne Graph Mode Accept Fi Fa Fa Fg F10 The parameters on the screen correspond to the following dimensions M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 25 Total Dept Surface Height Where Center X and Y coordinates of the center of the circular POCKET Surface Height Z axis position from which each incremental depth is measured Diameter Diameter of circular pocket Cleanout If cleanout is Yes all the material in the pocket will be removed If cleanout is No a circular frame mill will result with the cutter starting in the pocket center and arcing its way out and then going around the frame Depth Total Total depth of the circular pocket Depth Per Pass Depth of each individual pass Depth Plunge Rate Z axis speed of descent Depth Plunge Type Straight or Ramped Straight plunge does a vertical Z plunge with no X Y movement Ramped plunge does a zigzag plunge limited by the Plunge Angle entered below Depth Plunge Angle The maximum limit angle allowed for a ramped plunge A special value of 0 means that there is no limit angle Note that this field means nothing if the Plunge Type is Straight Rough Cuts Selects type of rough cut conventional or climb U
120. Pressing lt F9 gt redraws the project at its original size Use the arrow keys to select the new screen center before zooming in or out 1 9 0 Space Feed Rate Override amp Hold If no jog panel is attached or Keyboard has been selected as the jog panel type the number keys 1 9 and 0 choose feed rate overrides 10 90 and 100 respectively The space bar toggles feed hold on and off M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 41 Math Help Intercon provides a math assistance function to solve the trigonometric problems common in part drawings To enter Math Help press lt F6 gt from any Edit Operation screen The first time that you invoke Math Help the following screen appears which shows all available solvers Intercon Mill v8 00 Current Part E_2_PART ICN N0020 Face Math Help Chooser B Fl OETI F2 Triangle Other F3 Tangent Line Arc F4 Tangent Arc Arc F5 Tangent Line Arc Arc F6 Tangent Arc Arc Arc F Intersection Line Line F8 Intersection Line Arc F9 Intersection Arc Arc The figures on the right are a graphical representation of the highlighted solver on the left Pressing lt ENTER gt will display another menu that has various fields particular to the type of problem that is being solved The graphic below displays the Right Triangle Calculator menu The options that are available on the function keys are the same for every type of math help solver and perform the
121. Setting the Tool Number equal to zero tells the controller that you are using the reference tool Example 2 You are using a tool other than the reference tool and not a ball nose cutter Set Tool Number to the number this tool is assigned in the tool library Example 3 You are using a ball nose cutter other than the reference tool Set Part Position to the position of the surface plus the nose radius of the ball nose cutter set Tool Number to the number this tool is assigned in the tool library The Tool and Offset libraries must be up to date before setting the Z axis Part Zero Setting up the 4 or 5 AXIS Set Part 0 Position 1 Select Axis with F1 2 Jog to Touch Off on Part 3 Edit the Value if Necessary 4 Press F10 to Set Position Axis Part Standoff Approach Position Distance from B 0 0000 0 0000 Position enter the offset you want between the position of the edge finder and the desired position of the origin Standoff Distance this field is a generic parameter Its physical meaning will depend on the specific nature of your machine s fourth axis It is the distance between the center of the tool and the point at which the tool is touching the part surface Approach from enter the direction the edge finder is approaching the part from Enter the correct direction given the nature of your 4th Axis Using Multiple Coordinate Systems If you will be using multiple coordinate systems you must s
122. Setup menu displays function keys lt F5 gt lt F6 gt to switch the axes Parameter 130 Options Hundred s Digit Function Description Parameter Value add Bit1 Axis motor power when switching to 1 power all axes off 0 power 3rd two axis mode off only Bit2 Use 4 encoder input for scale input 2 Use 4 encoder input 0 no manual input Bit3 Use 5 encoder input for scale input 4 Use 5 encoder input 0 no manual input Parameters 132 5 Axis Heating Coefficient Enabled Axis A B C W YZ Ten s Digit 1 2 3 6 8 9 Disabled Axis N M One s Digit 1 2 3 This parameter sets the heating coefficient for the 5 axis See parameters 20 30 for more information Parameters 136 5 Axis Cooling Coefficient This parameter sets the cooling coefficient for the 5 axis See parameters 20 30 for more information Parameter 140 Message log priority level This parameter controls the messages that are written to the message log which can be accessed through the lt F9 gt Logs function in the Utilities menu With the Log Level set to 1 CNC7 logs numbered error messages and most other messages except Moving Jogging Stopped etc At Log Level 9 all messages are logged including user prompts Message logging can be disabled be setting this parameter to 1 M Series Operator s Manual 15 22 Parameter 141
123. Start of new job No closing quote The closing quotation mark in a quoted string is missing Job canceled 16 7 508 509 510 511 513 514 515 516 517 Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Start of new job Macro nesting too deep Macro nesting limit exceeded on attempt to invoke a subroutine Job canceled Start of new job Option not available Attempt to access a locked software option Job canceled Start of new job Too many macro arg s Too many arguments were given in a G65 macro call Job canceled Start of new job Missing parameter A parameter is required or expected but not found Job canceled Start of new job Expected Error in expression to left of missing or orphaned parameter Job canceled Start of new job Empty expression The expression contains no operands Job canceled Start of new job Syntax error in expression Illegal character in number variable or function Job canceled Start of new job Unmatched bracket parenthesis Brackets or parentheses are paired improperly or
124. Use the up and down arrow keys to move from field to field Clearance Amount Spindle Coolant Delay and Corner Feedrate Override require a value to be typed in the other fields have fixed values which may be toggled by using the lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt keys M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 4 Comment Generation When this field is set to Enabled Intercon will put a comment describing the operation type before each block Disabling Comment Generation will make the CNC files generated by Intercon smaller Clearance Amount This is the distance that Intercon raises the Z axis above the programmed surface height in pockets facing and frame mills when traveling across the work piece Spindle Coolant Delay Set this delay to the time in seconds you want Intercon to wait for the spindle to get up to speed and the coolant to begin flowing Corner Feedrate Override This is the percent feedrate that will be used in the corners of rectangular pockets and inside frame mills The default value is 50 Modal Operations These options specify whether to automatically insert the same operation after the first has been accepted Once modal insert mode has begun press lt ESC gt to insert a different operation Rotary 4 Axis This option specifies whether 4 axis movement fields appear in Linear and Rapid moves and whether or not the Intercon program will post 4 axis information This option affects the value in machine parameter 94
125. Y STOP 405 Message Lubricant level low Cause CPU7 stopped with low lube fault bit set Effect Current job continues to run but a new job cannot be started Removed when low lube fault bit removed by PLC Typical implementation add lube then press and release EMERGENCY STOP M Series Operator s Manual 406 407 408 409 Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed 3 2 04 Emergency Stop detected CPU7 stopped with no fault bits set Fault Job canceled prompt when Emergency Stop released X limit 1 tripped CPU7 stopped with limit switch status Job canceled Start of new job when limit cleared Programmed action timer expired M103 time expired before M104 encountered Job canceled Start of new job _ axis lag Lag Distance Allowable Following Error is detected on any axis for more than 1 5 seconds Where Lag Distance Feedrate inch min 0005 inch int 240 000 ints min Allowable Following Error All axis motion is stopped and the CNC program is aborted The probable causes of this error are 1 The machine is doing a very heavy cut 2 The maximum rates or the acceleration values for the motors are set too high 3 The motors are undersized for the application Job canceled 1 If the problem is occasional heavy cuts slowi
126. abeled New Radius Step 6 Change the font Right click on the Reduce Re use Recycle text When the font attribute box pops up select Dutch outline italic Press lt ESC gt Step 7 Generate the G Code Type lt CTRL G gt to generate the G code Since you are running the demo the G code generated will contain B s Step 8 Save this G code Press lt ESC gt and then lt F gt for file lt S gt to save The default directory should be c cnce7 ncfiles and the default extension cnc Press lt ENTER gt after a filename is typed Step 9 Exit Millwrite Press lt ESC gt and lt Q gt uit to return from the G code editor Press lt ESC gt again and E lt X gt it to DOS You will be prompted to choose to save the file Choose no and you will be returned to the main screen of your controller Step 10 Load the G code Press lt F2 gt to load the file that you saved in Step 4 At this point you may lt F8 gt Graph to view a backplot of the G code file or if your part and tool setup has been set you may begin to engrave To learn more about Millwrite run it again and load a sample file lt ESC gt lt F gt ile lt O gt pen Press gt or move the mouse to the right Make changes to the line of text such as the Height Slant Angle and Wrap radius View these effects as you did in Step 2 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 9 2 CHAPTER 10 Intercon Software Introduction Centroid s Intercon Conversational Softwar
127. age the PID output over 2 samples which would reduce the PID output frequency to 2000 4000 2 times sec The default value of this parameter is 1 no averaging Parameters 61 62 Stall Detection Parameters The M Series control will detect and report several stall conditions The low power stall occurs if the control has been applying a specified minimum current for a specified time and no encoder motion has been detected This may indicate a loose or severed encoder cable A high power stall occurs if the control has been applying at least 90 current for a specified time and no motion greater than 0 0005 has been detected This may indicate a physical obstruction Parameter 61 is the time limit in seconds for a high power stall The default is 0 5 seconds Parameter 62 is the PID output threshold for a high power stall The default is 115 Parameter 63 High Power Idle PID Multiplier This parameter holds the value of a constant used for motor temperature estimation when an axis is not moving and no job is running but there is power going into the motor to maintain its position The default value is 1 5 This temperature estimation is intended to detect early if an axis is stopped against some abnormal resistance such that it will probably overheat later Parameter 64 Fourth Axis Pairing This feature enables the 4th axis motor to be run in a paired fashion with any of the other 3 axes This parameter is set to 1 2 or 3 to indicate th
128. ake longer than forward branches and backward branch times depend on the total program size If the program is sufficiently large use of the GOTO statement could introduce temporary pauses When fast branching is enabled parameter 145 1 then CNC7 remembers the locations of block numbers as it finds them during program execution Backward branches always take place immediately The first forward branch to a block not yet encountered will take additional time as CNC7 searches forward for the block number however subsequent forward branches to that block number will take place immediately The trade off for using fast branching is that all line numbers at a given level of program or subprogram must be unique and programs will use more memory approximately 16kilobytes of memory for every 1000 block numbers in the program IF THEN ELSE Conditional Execution Program symbols G codes M codes and GOTO commands may be executed conditionally using the IF statement The general form of the IF statement is IF lt expression gt THEN lt execute if true gt ELSE lt execute if false gt where lt expression gt is any valid expression lt execute if true gt is one or more program codes to execute if lt expression gt evaluates to true non zero and lt execute if false gt is one or more program codes to execute if lt expression gt evaluates to false zero All parts of the IF statement must appear on the same line The ELSE lt
129. al Point O eee ee A oh ee re Workpiece A A i PETERE i bo ae wa Se TPE a ie Oa ae Seon SN Q EAE EEE Ae A an E d Q Petit rie A fede ah Are ets 2 np dno oe Ne G83 Using G98 d rapid down clearance WVV set with G10 Ex G10 P83 R 02 Sets d to 02 Feed move gt Rapid move gt Initial Point Point R pte 4 AAJA l E A a A A ts amp 3d a Te ere eee fa E i RS S Q EERE EEEE er 2 PERTE G83 Using G99 G83 is a deep hole drilling cycle It periodically retracts the tool to the surface to clear accumulated chips then returns to resume drilling where it left off The retract and return are performed at the rapid rate Because there may be chips in the bottom of the hole the tool does not return all the way to the bottom at the rapid rate Instead it slows to feedrate a short distance above the bottom This clearance distance is selected by setting Parameter 83 with G10 see example below Example G10 P83 R 05 set clearance to 05 G83 X0 YO R 1 Z 2 0 5 drill 2 deep hole in 0 5 steps M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 23 G80 cancel canned cycle G84 Tapping Optional Feed move J Rapid move gt Pitre Mall poia 0000 Wet pO Initial Point A Point R ont ow Spindle CW Point Z Point Z ATIA Spindle CCW Dwell P Spindle CCW Dwell P G84 using G98 G84 using G99 G84 performs right hand tapping using a floating t
130. all axes to the reference point no intermediate point NOTE As with GO positioning moves the Z axis will move separately If Z is moving up the usual case Z will move first then the other axes If Z is moving down the other axes will move first then Z Because of this it is rarely necessary to specify an intermediate point different from the current position M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 6 G29 Return from Reference Point G29 moves all axes to the intermediate point stored in a preceding G28 or G30 command It may be used to return to the workpiece If a position is specified the machine will move to that position in local coordinates after reaching the intermediate point G29 may only be specified after G28 or G30 though there may be intervening moves Examples G29 move all axes back from reference point to intermediate point G29 X1 Y2 move all axes to intermediate point then move to X1 Y2 NOTE As with GO positioning moves the Z axis will move separately If Z is moving up Z will move first then the other axes If Z is moving down the usual case for G29 the other axes will move first then Z G30 Return to Secondary Reference Point G30 functions exactly like G28 except that by default it uses the second reference point from the Work Coordinate System Configuration table and the P parameter may be used to request either reference point Examples G30 G91 Z0 move Z axis direct
131. am should not be used in that program afterwards Incorrect positioning may result M94 M95 Output On Off There are sixteen user definable M function requests M94 and M95 are used to request those inputs to turn on or off respectively M function requests 1 16 are mapped to the PLC as inputs 33 48 as shown in the following table On Off PLC On Of PLC Input Input M94 1 M95 1 33 M94 9 M95 9 1 M94 2 M95 34 M94 10 M95 10 f M94 6 M95 6 38 M94 7 39 M94 15 M95 15 47 M95 8 40 M95 16 M Function request to PLC Input map 2 3 4 M94 5_ _M95 37 5 6 q 8 M94 8 M95 8 M94 1_ M94 2_ M95 3 35 94 4 M94 5_ M94 6_ M947 M948 sea peed i eee M94 4 _M95 or l Ee l Ee 4 40 i To use M94 and M95 to control a function external to the servo control such as an indexer the input request must be mapped to one of the PLC outputs in the PLC program See M94 M95 function usage in the PLC section of the service manual Example M94 5 6 turns on output requests 5 and 6 NOTE Requests 1 2 3 4 and 5 are by default used to control the spindle CW spindle CCW flood coolant clamp and mist coolant NOTE The request number need not be and generally is not the same as the M function number or the PLC output number For example M3 turns on output request 1 PLC Input 33 which may activate PLC output 14 M98 Call Subprogram Optional M98 calls a use
132. an be used in G code programs to select KA the coolant type to be enabled In manual mode flood coolant and mist coolant are controlled by separate keys When switching from automatic to manual mode both flood and mist coolant are turned off automatically Coolant Flood M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 14 3 WA In manual coolant control mode flood coolant can be toggled off and on by pressing this key The LED D will be on when flood control is selected in either automatic or manual mode Coolant Mist sT In manual coolant control mode mist coolant can be toggled off and on by pressing this key The LED will be on when mist control is selected in either automatic or manual mode Auxiliary Function Keys AUX1 AUX12 The M Series jog panel has nine auxiliary keys some of which may be defined by customized systems Brake Auto Off The BRAKE AUTO OFF key controls the operation of the spindle brake if present on the mill If the LED is on the brake is ON or is in automatic mode meaning every time the spindle is started the brake will automatically release and every time the spindle is stopped the brake will be applied If the LED is off the brake will always be released The default for this key is AUTO Spindle Controls Spindle CW CCW PA Z The SPINDLE CLOCKWISE COUNTERCLOCKWISE keys determine the direction the D spindle will turn if it is started manually If the spindle is started automatically the directio
133. ancel programmed action timer Move minus to switch Move plus to switch Output BCD tool number Enable override controls Disable override controls Protected probing move Protected probing move Open data file overwrite existing file Open data file append to existing file Record position s and or comment in data field Record value and or comment in data field Protected probing move Protected probing move G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G09 G10 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 Rapid Positioning Linear Interpolation Circular or Helical Interpolation CW Circular or Helical Interpolation CCW Dwell Exact Stop Parameter Setting Circular Interpolation Plane Selection XY Circular Interpolation Plane Selection ZX Circular Interpolation Plane Selection YZ Select Inch Units Select Metric Units Return to Reference Point Return from Reference Point Return to Secondary Reference Point Cutter Compensation Cancel Cutter Compensation Left Cutter Compensation Right Tool Length Compensation Tool Length Compensation Tool Length Compensation Cancel Scaling Mirroring Off Optional Scaling Mirroring On Optional Offset Local Coordinate System Origin Rapid Position in Machine Coordinates Select Work Coordinate System 1 Select Work Coordinate System 2 Select Work Coordinate System 3 Select Work Coordinate System 4 Select Work Coordinate System 5 Select Work Coordinate System 6 Exact Stop Mode Cutting Mode Call Macro Rotate Can
134. ane of rotation is G17 X Y Y Y Y 3 3 5 2 2 4 1 1 x x p x 3 4 5 4 5 1 2 3 Original Unrotated Part Part rotated 45 about X4 Y2 Part rotated 45 about X0 YO Example GO X3 0 Y1 0 Rapid to position G68 R45 X4 Y2 Rotate 45 degrees centered on X4 Y2 G1 X5 0 Y1 0 F20 Start part profile X90 Y3 s0 X4 125 Y3 0 G3 X4 0 Y2 875 J 0 125 G1 X4 0 Y2 125 G2 X3 875 Y2 0 I 0 125 G1 X3 125 Y2 0 G3 X3 0 Y1 875 J 0 125 G1 X3 0 Y1 0 End part profile G69 Rotate Off G73 G80 G81 G82 G83 G85 G89 Canned Drilling Cycles G74 G84 Canned Tapping Cycles Z direction Operation G code machine at bottom of Z direction Use hole hole Intermittent Rapid traverse High speed G7 3 Feed peck drilling Set with the cycle Q parameter Feed Spindle CW Feed Counter then tapping G74 Dwell Set Left hand with the thread P parameter parameter Cancels canned M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 15 Dwell Set with the P parameter Intermittent Feed Set with the Q parameter Spindle CCW then Dwell Set with the P parameter Dwell Set with the P parameter Table 1 Canned drilling and tapping cycles Canned Cycle Operation VIVA o i P gt Rapid traverse j p Feed Operation 1 ihosodasatuopesatecaaebenate A Point I initial point Operation 2 i Operation 6 v see G98 and G99 Point R oo A Operation 3
135. anned Cycles When you choose the Canned Cycle operation by pressing lt F5 gt the following screen appears Intercon Mill v8 11 Current Part E_Z2_PART ICN Operation End Type X Y Z Select operation to insert 0010 Demo Program 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home Ee eee eee 0070 End Prog 0 0000 0 0000 Home Clean out E9 Drill Bore i Tap l Face Frare AO Fi F2 E3 F4 E Canned Cycle Introduction 1 Using Pattern and Repeat Drilling boring tapping Selecting the Drill Bore or Tap canned cycle will give you four choices selecting lt F1 gt Drill is shown below Bore and Tap will have the same menu selections as drill except with Drill is replace with Bore or Tap Rect Circ Pocket Pocket Thread E5 F6 FS Current Part DRILL_R ICN yp 2 Select operation to insert 0010 Header 0020 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home 0030 Drill 1 1250 1 1250 0 1000 0040 Drill 1 8750 4 1250 0 1000 E a 0050 End Prog 1 8750 4 1250 Home All canned cycle operations using the Drill BHC Bolt Hole Circle or Drill Array are identical to their equivalent using the lt F1 gt Drill single hole selection The use of the Drill BHC or Drill Array however offers the option to drill more than one hole in a pattern dictated by the new fields in the men
136. ap head The spindle speed and feedrate should be set and the spindle started in the CW direction before issuing G84 By default G84 uses M4 to select spindle CCW at the bottom of the hole and M3 to re select spindle CW after backing out of the hole Alternate M functions may be specified by setting parameters 74 for CCW and 84 for CW See G10 for examples The tap will continue to cut a short distance beyond the programmed Z height as the spindle comes to a stop before reversing When tapping blind holes be sure to specify a Z height slightly above the bottom of the hole to prevent the tool from reaching bottom before the spindle stops The exact distance you must allow will depend on your machine and the diameter and pitch of the tapping tool Note If rigid tapping is enabled a Q may be used to set the thread lead or pitch However because Q is not modal in the case of Rigid Tapping you must specify Q on every line at which Rigid Tapping is to occur WARNING Do not press FEED HOLD or CYCLE CANCEL while the tap is in the hole Example M3 S500 F27 78 start spindle CW set up for 18 pitch tap G84 X1 Y1 R 1 Z 5 tap a 0 5 deep hole at X1 Y1 YIS and another one at Xl Y1 5 G80 cancel canned cycle M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 24 G85 Boring G85 Using G98 G85 Using G99 G85 is similar to G81 except that the tool is retracted with a feedrate move instead of a rapid move G85 may be used for tapping with r
137. arameters These parameter values should be recorded on the Control Parameters page at beginning of manual This option is for qualified technicians only Altering these values will cause DRAMATIC changes in the way the servo system operates leading to possible machine damage DO NOT attempt to change these parameters without contacting your dealer NOTE Some of these values are set automatically by the Autotune option See F5 Autotune The parameters Kp Ki Kd Limit Kg Kv1 and Ka at the top of the edit window are values used by the PID control algorithm These parameters should not be changed at any time The remaining two PID parameters are acceleration time and maximum rate These parameters are described below Accel Acceleration Time the time required for an axis to accelerate to its maximum rate Although each axis has its own acceleration time the actual acceleration time used during a job will be the slowest time of all the axes DO NOT change this field unless you have a thorough understanding of its operation Max Rate See section Machine Configuration Jog Parameters above WARNING Improper PID values can ruin the machine cause personal injury and or destroy the motor drives F2 PID Collection Program This option allows qualified technicians to test the PID parameters by entering up to 5 lines of G codes to be executed with the Collect Data command below M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 26 F3 C
138. ard drive You can use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the file you want to load Once the job file name you wish to load is displayed on the Job to load line press lt F10 gt If you wish to use the Remote feature with an RS 232 null modem cable you should run the INTERSVR program supplied with IBM DOS on the attached computer If you wish to use the feature with a network connection the server should be a suitable DOS compatible LAN server See Remote Drive and Directory in Chapter 6 if you need to set up a default drive and directory for the Remote feature Subdirectories are shown at the end of the list with square brackets and around the name If the current directory is not the root directory a parent directory reference is shown as the last item of the list signified by an up arrow next to the name Advanced users The Job to load line can perform functions similar to the DOS commands DIR and CD See the examples below If you type The screen will CNC display all files in the current directory that have a CNC extension For display all files in the current directory that begin with F move up one directory and display all files located in that directory A change to the last selected directory on the A floppy drive and display all files located in that directory change to the root directory of the current drive and display all the files located in that directory CAICN change
139. are editing a value in a table or menu you cannot adjust feed rate override M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 14 8 MDI and the Keyboard Jog Panel Many of the keys used by the keyboard jog panel are also possible commands to MDI To use the keyboard jog panel functions in MDI you must press lt Alt J gt You may jog use the handwheels or any other jog panel function Press lt Alt J gt or lt Esc gt to return to MDI M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 14 9 CHAPTER 15 Configuration F3 from Setup WCS 1 G54 Current Position inches Job Name _PC_TEST CNC X F 0 0 0 0 0 ie Doe Part Cnt 0 Spindle 0 Part 30 Y 0 0000 Fsdhoa off Z 0 0000 Stopped Press CYCLE START to start job Configuration Contrl Mach Parms PID con acn Pans Pap General The first five options lt F1 gt through lt F4 gt will display a set of parameters Each option is explained in detail below The lt ESC gt key will return you to the previous screen Setup The configuration option provides you with a means for modifying the machine and controller configuration The majority of information in this section should not be changed without contacting your dealer Some of the data if corrupt or incorrect could cause personal injury or machine damage Password When you press lt F3 gt from the Setup Screen you may be prompted to enter a password This level of security is necessary so that use
140. asured using the Z Reference position The Z Reference position is the Z axis position when the tip of the reference tool is touching the work surface The reference tool should always be the longest tool The Height Offset value for end mills and drills is the difference between the Z axis position when the tip of the tool is touching the work surface and the Z Reference position The Height offset value for ball nose and bull nose cutters is the difference between the Z axis position when the center of the tool is at the work surface and the Z reference position Because it is not possible to position the tool in this way you must instead move the tip of the tool to the work surface and then manually edit the value to subtract the tool nose radius To manually edit a Height Offset value simply type the desired value and press lt ENTER gt To manually measure Height Offset values use the following procedure Establishing the Z reference position Press lt F1 gt to select the Z Reference setting function Insert the longest tool into the tool holder you can use the jog keys or the TOOL CHECK key to assist you Jog the tip of the tool down to the top of the work surface Press lt F10 gt to save this Z Position as the Reference Position NOTE The parts Z zero must be set before setting the Z reference Measuring each tool height Z position for tool minus Z position for Reference tool Insert the desired tool into the tool holder Jo
141. at the X Y or Z axes are paired with the 4th axis This is intended to drive 2 screws on opposite sides of a table probably a router table or gantry system Set this parameter to 0 default to indicate that no other axis is paired with the 4th axis a Default Pair with Y Axis Pair with Z Axis M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 16 Parameters 65 67 Spindle Gear Ratios These parameters tell the control the gear ratios for a multi range spindle drive Up to four speed ranges are supported high range is the default Parameters 65 67 specify the gear ratio for each lower range relative to high range For example if the machine is a mill with a dual range spindle and the spindle in low range turns 1 10 the speed it turns in high range then parameter 65 should be set to 0 1 Parameter 65 is the low range gear ratio Parameter 66 is the medium low range gear ratio Parameter 67 is the medium high range gear ratio These parameters work in conjunction with the PLC program which uses the states of INP63 and INP64 to signal to the CNC7 software which range is in effect according to the table below Spindle Range PLC High Medium High Medium Low Low INPUT Range Range Range Range INP63 0 1 1 0 INP64 0 0 1 1 Parameter 68 Minimum Rigid Tapping Spindle Speed This parameter holds the value that the spindle slows down to from the programmed spindle speed towards the end of the tapping cycle The lower
142. ate the portion of the part that is skipped Solid lines indicate the portion of the part that will be machined F9 Rapid On Off This function key toggles Rapid Override The On or Off label indicates the state to which the Rapid Override feature will toggle to when pressed It does not indicate the current state It has the same effect as the Rapid Over key discussed in Chapter 14 F10 RTG On Off This function key toggles the Run Time Graphics option If the option is turned on Run Time Graphics automatically starts when the CYCLE START button is pressed This option must be turned on for Run Time Graphics to be used If the option is turned off Run Time Graphics cannot be started while a job is running M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 2 4 F5 CAM Choose lt F5 gt from the Main Menu to load an installed CAM software package Currently the default CAM system is Intercon Interactive Conversational software Your dealer can install other CAD CAM packages If more than one CAD CAM program or on line software package has been installed a menu will appear that allows you to choose the appropriate program When you exit the CAD CAM software you will return to the M Series Control Main Screen A part created in Mastercam Engraving or ICN will automatically be loaded into the CNC7 main program The part program must be stored in one of the following directories in order for it to be automatically loaded Engraving Loads files fr
143. ation for the CSR measurement There are four possible orientations which are from the front pictured above the back and the left and right sides lt F2 gt is used to determine the CSR angle without probing The user jogs an edge finder to two positions along one wall These positions will be used for computing the CSR angle lt F3 gt is used to set the CSR angle for the current WCS to zero lt F4 gt is used to set all CSR angles to zero lt F6 gt and lt F7 gt are used to cycle through the available WCS systems lt F9 gt is a shortcut to the Work Coordinate System Configuration Screen described above M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 3 7 The instructions on how to perform a CSR measurement are numbered on the screen Distance The distance the X axis in front or back orientation or Y axis in right or left side orientation will move to probe the second point If the distance is negative the axis will be moved in the negative direction Clearance Amount The distance the Z axis will be moved upward when moving between the first probe point and the second probe point The clearance move will only be made when using the Auto option of the Movement Between Points Movement Between Points can be toggled between Jog and Auto modes In Auto mode the clearing moves are made automatically as well as the move to the second point In Jog mode a prompt will be displayed in the center of the screen after the first poin
144. ayed operation are shown in the lower left corner of the screen The help bar that appears at the bottom of the screen shows which option will be activated upon pressing that key Many of the keys on the help bar work in conjunction with the arrow keys which have the following functions Key lt Left Arrow gt Move crosshairs left Rotate XY plane left lt Right Arrow gt Move crosshairs right Rotate XY plane right Rotate Z axis down Rotate Z axis up lt ENTER gt Accept screen center Accept axis orientation Cancel Pan or Zoom Cancel Rotate Table 1 Pan Rotate Arrow Key Functions M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 40 F1 2D 3D Pressing lt F1 gt selects the format of the project display This may take the form of the three plane display 2 D or the isometric display 3 D View TOP Graphing Done Job Name FLANGE1 ICN View 3 D T 00 03 25 Graphing Done Job Nane FLANGE1 1ICN ne 15 i z Bees SAME Oy Mir SES SL A PO a I TN CV TS ER LEE G54 20 15 10 05 in 05 10 15 20 x 2D Set 3D Range Ft E 2D Set Range F Tine Estim F4 Time Zoom Estin Ban F6 Zoom Redraw Pan Th all 3D Rotate E6 E FB F9 Fi F2 FB Three plane 2D Isometric 3D Zoom Zoom Out In F Zoom Zoom Dut A 1l F9 Redraw E View F2 F2 View Rotate In thr
145. be used for a fine digitize along the Y axis A larger value should be used for a rough digitize along the Y axis This distance should be a positive incremental value M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 7 2 Z Maximum Depth The maximum distance the Z axis moves below the starting height If the probe does not contact the surface at the maximum depth that data point will be recorded as being at the maximum depth and digitizing will proceed with the next point Z Step Up The distance the Z axis moves up after making contact before the control attempts to move X or Y A small value should be used when digitizing parts with gentle slopes a larger value should be used when digitizing parts with many steep walls Axis to Move First The axis either X or Y which moves all the way across the digitize area with each pass Digitize File Name The base name of the file in which the digitize data is stored The file has an extension of DIG for CNC replay and an extension of DOC when translated for import into Mastercam Level 2 Replay Feedrate The feedrate to include with the G1 command on the first line of the data file If the data file is run as a CNC program this is the feedrate at which the machine will retrace the digitized surface Multiple Patch Indicates whether or not this digitizing is a continuation of an earlier digitizing Choose NO if the current digitizing is the first or only digitize run for the part to be digitized Choo
146. be used with the control A negative value must be entered if a normally open probe is to be used with the control The absolute value of Parameter 18 will directly reflect the PLC input the Spindle Inhibit is wired to When this parameter is set Digitizing and Probing cycles will not run unless a probe or touch off block is connected This parameter is used to prevent the tool or probe from crashing into the table The default for this parameter is 0 which disables this feature Parameter 19 MPG modes The MPG is a hand held device that is used as an alternate way of jogging the machine This parameter defines the MPG s mode of operation M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 13 Function Description Parameter Value jo Enable MPG when powering up control Yes 1 No 0 1 MPG speed limit x100 2 x10 0 Parameters 20 30 Motor Temperature Estimation These parameters are used for motor temperature estimation Parameters 20 29 and 30 correspond respectively to the ambient temperature of the shop the overheat warning temperature and the job cancellation temperature all in degrees Fahrenheit Parameters 21 through 24 are the heating coefficients for each of the four axes Parameters 25 through 28 are the cooling coefficients for each of the four axes The following table contains the default values for parameters 20 through 30 ee T e e Number 8A Drive 12A Drive 15A Drive 15A Drive 25A Drive 15 in lb 29 in lb 29 in lb
147. before reaching the maximum radius that data point will be recorded as being at the maximum radius and digitizing will proceed with the next point M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 7 6 Z Patch Depth The depth of the patch to be digitized along the Z axis A positive value will cause digitizing to proceed in the Z direction from the starting point a negative value will cause digitizing to proceed in the Z direction Z Step The distance to move between points on the Z axis A smaller value should be used for a fine digitize along the Z axis A larger value should be used for a rough digitize along the Z axis This distance should be a positive incremental value Outer Stepover The distance to move between points on one contour A smaller value should be used for a fine digitize along any one contour A larger value should be used for a rough digitize along any one contour This distance should be a positive incremental value Replay Pattern Indicates the replay movement pattern If Zigzag is selected the replay pattern will alternate between positive and negative angle directions CW and CCW on each successive contour If CW or CCW is selected the replay pattern will maintain a constant angle direction throughout the playback Replay Feedrate The feedrate to include with the G1 command on the first line of the data file If the data file is run as a CNC program this is the feedrate at which the machine will retrace the digitized sur
148. bit map at homing screen Yes 2 No 0 Bit 0 suppresses the requirement to set machine home before running If bit 0 of Parameter 5 is 0 machine home must be set before jobs may be run If bit 0 of Parameter 5 is 1 machine home is not requested or required NOTE Parameter 5 Bit 0 is separate from the Machine Home at Powerup flag in the Control Configuration Screen Parameter 5 Bit 0 determines whether you must home the machine the Machine Home at Powerup flag determines how you will home the machine if you must do so Parameter 6 Automatic Tool Changer Installed This parameter tells the control whether you have an automatic tool changer installed on your machine This field affects the action of M6 in your CNC programs See M6 under M functions in Chapter 13 It also affects whether the ATC key is present in the Tool Offset Setup and whether to save the last tool change number in the job files Auto Tool Changer NOT Installed 1 Auto Tool Changer Installed Parameter 7 Display Colors This parameter determines what combination of colors will be used for display If you have a color display set this parameter to 0 If you have a monochrome display especially a monochrome LCD panel set this parameter to 1 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 12 Parameter 8 Available Coolant Systems This parameter is used by Intercon to determine what coolant systems are available on the machine It should be set as follows Mist Coolan
149. ble MPG is inoperative By reconnecting MPG cable and appearance of next message MPG Online Loose MPG cable has been reconnected MPG is operative M Series Operator s Manual 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 Message Cause Effect Message Cause Effect Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause 3 2 04 CPU7 PIC Offline Power supply or hardware problem Power down then power up the system The error should disappear CPU7 PIC Online CPU7 is back on line None External PLC Offline Koyo PLC Direct failure or loose cable None When PLC failure removed or cable reconnected External PLC Online PLC failure corrected None _ idling too high Releasing power Axis is not moving and no job is running but axis has stopped against some abnormal resistance Power to motors is released Start of new job _ axis runaway Check motor wiring Axis was moving more than 120 in min while power was supposed to be off Motor may be wired backwards or may be a shorted servo drive Power to motors is released Start of new job after wiring or servo drive failure has been removed Servo drive shutdown This error message is produced by hardware detection of a physical error The servo drive hardware originates this error messag
150. bles allow you to do many things that would otherwise be impossible Nevertheless using branching and conditional execution can introduce undesirable and even unpredictable behavior into your programs Undesirable effects can occur simply by graphing a program The least of these undesirable effects could be entering an endless loop failing to draw anything or wiping out all the information in your tool library or WCS settings It is your responsibility to make sure that undesirable things do not happen in your programs You must monitor the job processing and search modes in your program if necessary and take appropriate action Until you are confident of the actions of your program you should step through it one block at a time to confirm your program logic GOTO Branch Execution To branch to another line within the same program or subprogram use the statement GOTO lt expression gt where lt expression gt is any expression that evaluates to a valid block number in the program GOTO causes an immediate branch to the specified destination Program codes preceding a GOTO on the same line will be executed normally Any program codes following GOTO on the same line will cause an error If fast branching is disabled parameter 145 0 then CNC7 searches forward in the program for the first matching block number and resumes searching if necessary from the top of the program For this reason when fast branching is disabled backward branches t
151. cara Point Workpiece r Workpiece Point R O Point R Og ere d YR anene 4 r Z Z Point Z G81 using G98 G81 using G99 G81 is a general purpose drilling cycle The hole is drilled in a single feedrate move and then the tool is retracted at the rapid rate Example G90 Absolute positioning GOT X3 00 1 50 2 5 G01 mode before canned cycle G99 Set for R point return G81 X3 250 Y1 75 Z 650 R 1 F3 p Dri Ll sats X32 VN S15 X4 5 Y3 5 7 Drill at X4 5 Y3 5 G80 Cancel canned cycle return to Gl G81 Drill Cycle Transformation to G81 Air Drill Cycle G81 may be modified to execute an M function instead of moving the Z axis by setting parameter 81 to the desired M function Example use is for air actuated drills Example Execute M39 each time a new G81 position is given G10 P81 R39 Set parameter 81 to 39 G81 air drill with M39 G81 X5 Move to X5 and execute M39 Y3 Move to Y3 and execute M39 To revert to Z axis drilling specify M function 1 Example G10 P81 R 1 Set parameter 81 to 1 G81 drilling cycle M function 39 is designed for general air drill use See the description of M39 in the M functions section M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 21 A different M function may be used instead but any M function used must be a macro file that uses the M103 and M104 commands to time the cycle see the example in the M function section under M103 If the macro file does
152. ce 3 0000 6 0000 0 0000 0090 Rect Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 0100 Circ Poc 4 0000 8 0000 0 0000 0110 Frame 1 7500 6 6625 0 0000 0120 Thread 4 0000 8 0000 0 1000 0130 End Prog 4 0000 8 0000 Home or rra Pootant Cian Z Home aa Rotary Fi F2 F3 F4 E5 F6 E7 Press lt F1 gt to enter a comment up to 35 characters long which will be displayed in the generated CNC program Press lt F2 gt to change the actual state of the spindle Press lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt to toggle between CW CCW and OFF Press lt F3 gt to change the actual state of the coolant Press lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt to toggle between FLOOD MIST and OFF Press lt F4 gt to turn the Clamp ON and OFF Press lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt to change the clamp state Press lt F5 gt to send the Z axis to its home position Pressing lt F6 gt from the OTHER screen displays the following screen Intercon Mill v6 11 Current Part E_ PART ICN Operation End N0130 M amp G Codes Type X Y 0010 Demo Program N41 Select Low Gear Rangel 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 Warning Any M amp G codes 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 entered here will be 0040 Line r 0000 3 0000 1 0000 unrecognizable by Intercon 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Careful consideration must 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home be taken before using this 0070 Tap 0 0000 0 0000 0 1000 function 0080 Face 3 0000 6 0000 0 0000 0090 Rect Poc 4 0000 8 0000
153. cel Rotate High Speed Peck Drilling Counter Tapping Canned Cycle Cancel Drilling and Spot Drilling Drill with Dwell Deep Hole Drilling Tapping Boring Boring with Dwell Absolute Positioning Mode Incremental positioning Mode Set Absolute position Initial Point Return R Point Return Rotation of Plane Selection XY Rotation of Plane Selection ZX Rotation of Plane Selection YZ M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 1 6 CHAPTER 2 CNC7 Main Screen Option Descriptions F1 Setup This will bring up the Setup menu as shown below WCS 1 654 Current Position inches Job Name _PC_TEST CNC 1 0 0 0 0 Ueda hes Part Cnt 5 Spindle 0 Part t 14 a 0 35 1 A Feed Hold Off MDI 0 y 0 0 0 0 Ppa aTOR abort job cancelled Stopped re PP 0 0 0 Press CYCLE START to start job Setup CNC v8 01 N lt x Automated by Centroid technology wuww centroidcnc con Part Tool Fl F2 conti Feed zoff WOff l ATC E3 F4 E5 E6 E F1 Part This key displays the Part Setup menus which are explained in Chapter 3 F2 Tool This key displays the Tool Setup menus which are explained in Chapter 4 F3 Config This key displays the Configuration menu which is explained in Chapter 15 F4 Feed This key displays the Feed menu which is discussed in Chapter 5 F5 3 Axis Toggle This key will only be displayed if Machine parameter 130 is set See C
154. cel timer NOTE The PLC program must detect the cancellation of the program and deactivate all programmed machine functions Example 7PLC program CNC_program_running is INP65 program running indicator M12 is INP44 M function 12 indicator relay_out is OUT5 relay On Off relay_out M12 amp CNC_program_running Relay On if M94 12 and the CNC program is active Relay OfL if M95 12 or the CNC program is terminated M104 Cancel Programmed Action Timer M104 stops the timer started by the last M103 executed M105 Move Minus to Switch M105 moves the requested axis in the minus direction at the current feedrate until the specified switch opens Example M105 X P5 F30 move the X axis minus at 30 min until A switch 5 opens G92 X10 Sets X position to 10 M106 Move Plus to Switch M106 moves the requested axis in the plus direction at the current feedrate until the specified switch opens Example M106 X P3 F30 move the X axis plus at 30 min until switch 3 opens G92 X10 Sets X position to 10 M107 Output BCD Tool Number M107 sends the current tool number to the automatic tool changer via the PLC The number is sent as BCD M107 does not set the tool changer strobe or look for an acknowledgement from the changer see M6 M Series Operator s Manual3 2 04 13 8 Example M107 send request for tool to changer M95 16 turn on
155. checks for values that if used will cause incorrect code to be produced If such a value is found a message will appear on the screen alerting you of the problem For example a problem with a Frame Mill may produce this message Message Corner radius too small for Cutter hit a key Changes to the part would then be required to allow proper code generation to proceed If no problems are encountered during code generation the following message appears Message CNC code generation successful You are now finished designing your part In order to run your part you now need to return to the CNC7 software Program Finished M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 55 Milling The Part Now that the part has been programmed it is time to mill it Take your material and clamp it to the table Remember that the clamps must be positioned such that they do not interfere with the tool as it cuts You may choose either to place the clamps around the edges of the material for the entire process and let the part drop through upon completion or you may wish to pause after milling the circular pockets and place clamps through the holes to prevent the part from moving The second option decreases the chance of the part being marred because it moved during milling Now you need to set your XYZ reference points Insert your longest tool in the quill and follow the procedure listed below PRESS JOG KEYS F1 F1 F10 F1 F10 F1 F1
156. clearance 4 Press lt CYCLE START gt to start the probing cycle Once the probing cycle is complete the probe will move away from the surface by the amount entered in Parameter 13 Recovery Distance The dimension where it found the surface will be shown on the control Press lt ESC gt to return to the Set Part 0 Position screen Probe Parameters Various probing parameters can be set on the Machine Parameters screen see Chapter 15 Make sure you enter these parameters before you begin using the probe If these parameters are not entered properly damage to the probe may result PLC Input Number and Contact State Parameter 11 A single value 1 through 240 A positive number indicates Closed on contact a negative number indicates Open on contact Touch Probe Tool Number Parameter 12 A single value 0 through 200 used to look up the length offset and tip diameter of the probe in the Offset Library Recovery Distance Parameter 13 The additional distance the probe moves off of a surface after contact is broken before attempting to traverse parallel to the surface Fast Probing Rate Parameter 14 Used for positioning moves and initial surface detection this parameter is determined by machine response and permitted probe deflection as well as desired tolerance The default setting is 25 inches min Slow Probing Rate Parameter 15 Used for final measuring moves this parameter is determined by a speed accuracy tra
157. counts up when running CCW M4 the value of this parameter must be negative Parameter 35 Spindle Encoder Input This parameter specifies the axis input to which the spindle encoder is connected Input from the spindle encoder is required for the spindle slaved movements used in the Rigid Tapping cycles So if Rigid Tapping is used this parameter must be set to the correct value Otherwise this value is generally ignored A value of 2 means the third encoder input a value of 3 means the fourth encoder input a value of 4 means the fifth encoder input Parameter 36 Rigid Tapping Enable Disable This parameter is a 3 bit field that enables or disables Rigid Tapping and its options Bit 1 and 2 have no meaning unless bit 0 is turned on jo s Enable Rigid Tapping Yes 1 N0o 0 Eoo sending Wait for Index Pulse during Rigid Yes 2 No 0 Tapping j2 Allow Spindle Override during Rigid Tapping Parameter 37 Spindle Deceleration Time This parameter is used in conjunction with parameter 36 when rigid tapping is enabled This sets the amount of time required for the spindle to decelerate before it switches direction during a rigid tapping operation Parameter 38 Multi Axis Max Feedrate This parameter is used to limit the feedrate along all commanded move vectors This parameter can be used to limit the speed of multi axis moves on machines that may have enough power to move a single axis rapidly but starve out
158. deoff The default setting is 3 5 inches min Maximum Probing Distance Parameter 16 The maximum distance that a probing cycle searches for a surface in a given direction if no travel limits have been entered The default is 10 inches A larger value should be entered for the hole and slot cycles if you are measuring very large features Detector Location Return Point Parameter 17 A non zero value specifies the number of the reference return point entered into the WCS Configuration directly above a permanently mounted tool detector There are two separate return points available enter 1 or 2 A Zero 0 indicates that the tool detector is not permanently mounted automatic tool measurement will be performed without XY movement M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 8 6 Chapter 9 Engraving Introduction Centroid offers an optional engraving package which uses engraving software called Millwrite Purchase of this option includes a user manual for the software To launch the engraving software press lt F5 gt from the main screen and select Millwrite from the options shown on the screen To operate the engraving software you can use the mouse and keyboard on conjunction with each other or you can use the keyboard alone Since many operators do not use a mouse these instructions are for keyboard only operation of the engraving software In general the engraving software is a conversational style programming format that prompt
159. dle operation lt Alt A gt Spindle Auto Toggles between automatic and manual Always with few Manual spindle operation exceptions 1 3 lt Shift gt Spindle Decreases the spindle override by 10 Only in jog panel or lt gt Override and during a job 10 2 4 lt Shift gt Spindle Increases the spindle override by 10 Only in jog panel or lt gt Override 10 and during a job 2 4 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 14 7 Legend Key s Function Description Availability Notes lt gt Spindle Decreases the spindle override by 1 Only in jog panel any Override and during a job 1 1 2 4 lt gt Spindle Increases the spindle override by 1 Only in jog panel ant Override 10 and during a job 1 2 4 lt Alt O gt Tool Check Performs a tool check Always with few exceptions 1 lt Alt W gt MPG on off Turns MPG handwheel control on and off Available most times that jogging is available lt l gt or lt gt Incremental Selects incremental or continuous jog mode Only in jog panel Continuous Jog Press again to select the opposite mode Selection Ctrl as Incremental Fast and temporary incremental continuous Only in jog panel modifier Continuous Jog mode switch Hold down simultaneously with a jog key This is like holding down the Shift key to type a capital letter instead of pressing Caps Lock
160. ds to the plc bit state M125 and M126 will generate an Unexpected probe contact error message if the specified plc bit state is triggered again stopping any running job In summary the M115 and M116 commands are to be used when one expects contact to be made and M125 and M126 commands are to be used when one does not expect any contact to be made Example Finding the center of a vertical slot In this example it is assumed that there is a probe connected to INP15 and that the probe tip is positioned somewhere in the slot such that movement along the X axis will cause a probe trigger G20 Set mode to English 15 X P 15 F20 Move X minus waiting for probe trip at 20 ipm 16 X P15 F5 Move X plus until no contact at 5 ipm 100 5041 Record the point in user variable 100 f x 167X P 15 F20 Move X plus at 20 ipm until probe trip 15 X P15 F5 Move X minus at 5 ipm until probe clears 100 5041 2 Move X to center of slot gw ome oe a M120 Open data file overwrite existing file This M function will open the requested data file for writing If no drive or directory is specified with the file name then the file will be opened in the same directory as the CNC program If the file cannot be successfully opened then an error will be returned ultimately terminating the job If a data file is already open when M120 is called that file will first be closed then the new file opened Examp
161. e the X coordinate of a second point and the angle from horizontal the Y coordinate of a second point and the angle from horizontal F9 Intersection Arc Arc Intercon Mill v8 00 Current Part BUGCO3 ICN Arc Intersection Arc Circle 1 K 0 000 Y 0 000 Radius 3 000 Circle 2 x 4 000 He Y 0 000 Radius 4 000 Int 1 x1 1 125 y1 2 781 Ci C2 Int 2 X2 1 125 Y2 2 781 Ti NO020 Linear Next Soln F2 Prey Soln F1 Clear All E3 Prey Solver F4 Next Hide Solver Math Copy Copy Graphic K lt gt gt gt On Off E Fs M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 48 Given the center points CP1 and CP2 and the radii R1 and R2 of two arcs find the intersection point s I1 and I2 of the arcs You must enter the X and Y coordinates for the first circle s center point the radius of the first circle the X and Y coordinates for the second circle s center point and the second circle s radius M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 49 Intercon Tutorial 1 This is a step by step instructional example of going from blueprint to part with Intercon The tool path to be created is for the part shown in Figure 1 For instructional purposes this part will be programmed to cut into stock held in 3 fixtures 6 inches apart along the X axis 3 0000 LE H amp FIG 1 Blueprint of flange part and the 3 fixtures M Series Operator s
162. e Multiple G52 codes are not cumulative subsequent shifts replace earlier ones The G52 shift may therefore be canceled by specifying a shift of zero If you are using multiple coordinate systems the G52 shift amount will affect all coordinate systems M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 11 Example GO X0 YO move to origin M98 P9100 call subprogram G52 Y4 shift coordinate system 4 inches in Y GO X0 YO move to new origin M98 P9100 call subprogram again with new coordinates G52 YO restore unshifted coordinate system G53 Rapid Positioning in Machine Coordinates Optional G53 is a one shot code that performs a rapid traverse using machine coordinates It does not affect the current movement mode GO G3 or coordinate system G54 G59 G53 may only be used with absolute positioning G90 Example G53 X15 Y4 ZO move to 15 4 0 in machine coordinates G54 G59 Select Work Coordinate System Optional G54 through G59 select among the six work coordinate systems Subsequent absolute positions will be interpreted in the new coordinate system Example G54 GO X0 YO Z0 select first WCS move to origin G2 X1 I 5 2 5 mill something GO Z 1 G55 X1 Y1 select second WCS move to 1 1 Using Extended Work Coordinate Systems There are actually total of 18 workpiece origins The extra workpiece origins are not accessible on the WCFG menu they can only beset using Set Part 0 Po
163. e a rotary fourth axis The rotary field descriptions are the same as that of the Linear Mill operation See F2 Linear Mill below F2 Linear Mill If you press lt F2 gt for LINEAR from the Insert Operation screen a screen similar to the following appears Intercon Mill v8 11 Current Part E Z_PART ICH Operation End NOO6O Linear Type X Y 0010 Demo Program End Xi 7 0000 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 Y 3 0000 0030 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home Z 1 0000 0040 Line 4 0000 0 0000 1 0000 Angle 18 43 0050 Line 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 Length 3 1623 Line Connect Radius 0 0000 0070 End Prog 4 0000 2 0000 Home Feedrate 12 0000 Math Teach Toggle Help Graph Mode accent F3 F6 FB F9 F10 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 7 The numbers in the different fields on the screen correspond to the following Linear Mill example shown here graphically End When you first access the linear mill screen the cursor will be highlighting the first field End X This is the X coordinate of where the cutter will be after the linear move has been completed Similarly Y and Z represent the coordinates of the cutter after the linear move is completed The angle and length fields will be computed if you choose to enter the end point of the move Angle The destination may also be specified in terms of a counterclockwise angle from the three o clock position When combined with a length for the curren
164. e allows you to quickly create part program right at the control without having to be a G code expert Intercon will prompt you to enter values from your print that describes the geometry of the part Intercon will display graphics of the part as you are creating it helping you quickly proceed through part programming Intercon generates a G code program from the geometric information you have entered This is an advantage in several ways 1 The G code program generated by Intercon can be edited using the built in Centroid G code editor lt F6 gt 2 Intercon programs can be interrupted and restarted even in the middle of a canned cycle You can purchase an offline version of the Intercon software for use on your desktop PC You will need to purchase a hardware key which will allow the offline version to run Simply plug the key into the computer install the required drivers and run it Intercon Main Screen When you access Intercon through the lt F5 gt CAM option in the CNC7 Main screen the part program will be displayed if the current job loaded in CNC7 had an associated Intercon program If the job file in CNC7 did not have an associated Intercon program the lt F1 gt File menu will be displayed Intercon Mill v8 00 Current Part E_2_PART ICN Operation End Type X Y Z 0010 Demo program 0020 Rapid 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 000
165. e an extension of DOC F6 PLC Diag Runs PLC diagnostic program to check PLC I O Do not attempt to troubleshoot the PLC without the assistance of your dealer F7 Report Generates a backup of system configurations in a text file on the floppy drive Your dealer may then use the disk for servicing and troubleshooting purposes F8 Options Shows the software options that you have purchased or added to your control F9 Logs Shows the messages and errors that have been logged by the control F1 Errors Displays the error message log Use lt PgUp gt lt PgDn gt lt Home gt amp lt End gt to view lt Esc gt to exit F2 Stats Displays counts of errors logged Use lt PgUp gt lt PgDn gt lt Home gt amp lt End gt to view lt Esc gt to exit F3 Export Exports the log to a floppy disk Insert a floppy and press lt Enter gt M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 6 4 CHAPTER 7 Digitize F9 from Main Menu WCS 1 G54 Current Position inches Job Name 2TEST CNC 0 0 0 0 0 L P Spindle 0 Count 112 0 0000 Feed Hold Off 0 0000 Tere Fi F2 E F4 The Digitize feature of CNC7 is used to digitize a rectangular surface area grid an inside circular bore area radial or a contour The digitizing process creates a file with M amp G codes that represent the digitized surface If the digitizing probe tip is chosen to match the milling cutter size the digitized file can be loaded and run
166. e arc can be specified by the user in a 3D form both in G17 G19 and in G117 G119 all I J K values are allowed at the same time with G2 and G3 Any arc center component outside the circular plane is ignored Example G00 X0 YO Z1 rapid move GO3 G18 X1 YO ZO K 1 F20 p arc mill GOO XO YO Z1 1 retract move G01 Zl move to start of contour G03 G118 P1 000000 X0 9998 YO 0175 Z0 K 1 arc mill rotated about Z e NOTE G117 G119 will not be permitted while cutter compensation is turned on Also scaling is not allowed while G117 G119 is specified and G117 G119 is not allowed while scaling is active M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 27 CHAPTER 13 CNC Program Codes M functions M functions are used to perform specialized actions in CNC programs Most of the M series Control M functions have default actions but can be customized with the use of macro files Macro M functions Most M Series CNC M functions from 0 through 90 can be fully customized Exceptions are M2 M6 and M25 that can be customized but will always move the 3rd Z axis to the home position before executing the macro M function commands No M functions above 90 may be customized with macros The default action listed will be performed unless that M function has been customized To create a macro for an M function a file must be created in the C CNC7 directory The file s name must be CNC7 Mxx where xx is the M function number used to call the macro M functi
167. e axis is not on a physical stop check the limit switch to 16 4 412 413 414 415 Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Prompt Cause Effect Removed Prompt Cause Effect Removed Prompt Cause see if it is tripped If it is then the software is commanding a move into the switch but the hardware is shutting the move down Go to the motor setup screen and enter the limit switch if this is applicable Make sure the switch input is not unstable or noisy If it is then replace the switch If the problem persists it may be necessary to create separate home and limit switch inputs Use slow jog to move opposite the direction causing the error and clear all limit switches Jog toward the direction causing the error if no motion occurs then a servo drive failure is indicated Start of new job _ axis encoder connection is bad Axis is enabled but a differential encoder signal is not detected May indicate a loose or severed encoder cable or a bad encoder All axis motion is stopped and the CNC program is aborted Reconnect encoder or repair encoder and or encoder cable CPU Failure 01 power down CPU7 has experienced a problem with the PC reset line Power down then power up the system The error should disappear Never system must be powered down CPU Failure 02 power down CPU7 detected CPU failure Power down then power up the system The error should
168. e following slave plunge rates change until the next modal plunge rate is encountered Feedrate Speed of the cutter during facing The feedrate can be toggled to modal fixed or slave this is indicated by the symbol beside the feedrate field If the feedrate is modal then it will have the M symbol or if it is fixed it will have the F symbol shown below The slave feedrate has no symbol and is set to the last modal feedrate set in the program when the modal feedrate changes all the following slave feedrates change until the next modal feedrate is encountered Rectangular Pocket F5 in the Canned Cycle Menu Pressing lt F5 gt Rectangular Pocket from the Canned Cycle Selection Menu displays the following screen M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 23 Intercon Mill v8 11 Current Part E_ _PART ICN Operation End N0090 Rectangular Pocket Type X Y 0010 Demo Program Center Xi 4 0000 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 Y 8 0000 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 Surface Height 0 0000 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Length x 5 0000 INC 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Width Y 3 0000 INC 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home Corner Radius 0 2500 0070 Tap 0 0000 0 0000 0 1000 Depth Total 0 5000 INC 0080 Face 3 0000 6 0000 0 0000 per Pass 0 1000 0050 Rect Foc Plunge Rate 10 0000 0100 End Prog 3 0000 6 0000 Home Plunge Type Ramped Plunge Angle 0 00 Rough Cuts Conventional S
169. e if it detects either an overcurrent or overvoltage condition The particular hardware condition is reflected on the servo 16 6 439 44 442 443 444 Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed drive LEDs Once the servo drive detects this error condition it stops all motion and removes power to the motors The hardware indicates the presence of this condition to the CNC7 software via the servo drive fault input to the PLC The particular condition can be resolved by observing the servo drive LEDs This message is removed and the condition is reset only if the ESTOP is pressed and released The PLC program that is responsible for latching this condition is also responsible for clearing this condition _ axis servo drive processor failure Logic power failure or processor failure No motor power Power complete unit down and check connections to drive _ axis overvoltage Drive input power greater than 350 vdc No motor power Check input voltage and cycle start _ axis undervoltage Drive input power less than 80 vde No motor power Check input voltage and cycle start _ axis commutation encoder bad Bad connection from encoder No motor power Check encoder cable and cycle input power _ axis over
170. e is measured from R and R is measured from the initial tool position M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 18 Example Part surface height is Z 0 initial tool position is X 50 Y1 0 Z 625 Drill 0 50 deep hole at X1 0 Y1 0 clearance height R is 0 10 above surface Absolute Incremental G90 G91 G81 X1 Y1 R 1 Z 5 G81 X 5 YO R 525 Z 6 G80 G80 G73 High Speed Peck Drilling VAM iaie WVW Rapid move gt Saai po tial ir S he o Point aoe leas my J2 G73 using G98 G73 using G99 G73 is the peck drilling cycle The hole is drilled in a series of moves down at feedrate a distance Q up at the rapid rate the retract distance and then down again at feedrate The retract amount is set with G10 as shown in the example below Example G90 Absolute positioning GOI X3 00 Y1 50 2 5 G01 mode before canned cycle G98 Set for initial point return G10 P73 R 1 Sets the retract amount to 1 G73 X3 250 Y1 75 Z 650 R 1 00 325 F3 j Peck drill at X3 25 Y1 75 X45 Y 3 5 Peck drill at X4 5 Y3 5 G80 Cancel canned cycle return A to G01 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 19 G74 Counter Tapping Optional Feed move Prcevaveserserters MN 3 PMO bromek PO a Initial Point Poj i y PointR Workpiece a Font Row ae Spindle CCW UMMETA N Point Z 1 Point Z Spindle CW Dwell P Spindle CW Dwell P G74 u
171. e password Press lt ENTER gt to accept this 5 Press lt F2 gt Machine for Jog and Motor parameters Jog Parameters Motor Encoder revs inch counts rev To obtain the control configuration info press ESC at the PID screen then press F1 Control DRO display units Console type Jog Panel Type Machine units Jog panel required Max spindle high range Screen blank delay Machine home at powerup RS232 Drive amp Directory Parameters To obtain following parameter info press ESC at the Control Configuration screen and then press F3 Params Param Value Param Value Param Value Param Value Param Value Param Value ee dza ee Ee J4 s s 2 bA Eo pae ae a TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 Introduction Window Description 1 1 Conventions 1 3 Machine Home 1 4 Keyboard Operation 1 5 CHAPTER 2 CNC7 Main Screen Option Descriptions 2 1 Canceling and Resuming Jobs 2 6 Canceling a Job in Progress 2 7 Resuming a Canceled Job 2 7 M Series CNC G Code Editor Description 2 8 CHAPTER 3 Part Setup F1 from Setup Operation Description 3 2 Part Setup Examples 3 4 Work Coordinate Systems Configuration 3 5 Coordinate Systems Rotation 3 7 CHAPTER 4 Tool Setup F2 from Setu Offset Library 4 1 Automatic Tool Measurement 4 3 Setting up Tool Height Offsets 4 3 Tool Library 4 4 CHAPTER 5 Power Feed F4 from Setup CHAPTER 6 The Utility Menu F1 Fo
172. e probe bypasses a contact point on the Y axis it will continue moving in the X direction across the center line until it reaches the patch length limit and faults out Canceling a job Unlike grid or radial digitizing if you cancel a contour before it is completed you will not be able to backplot to the point of interruption to continue the cycle You will need to start over Before running a job Before running a job created by contour digitizing you will need to add some information to the file to define any required tool change cutter compensation and height offset commands 1 Do a search in the G code for the phrase Add Comp Here 2 Refer to the descriptions of G40 G41 and G42 in Chapter 12 3 Add the proper G code to the file after the Add Comp Here prompt 4 Save the file and run your job M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 7 12 NOTE Refer to the Probe Parameters section at the end of this chapter before using any probe CHAPTER 8 Probing Part Setup with Probing Single axis single surface probing is available on the Set Part 0 Position screen using the Auto lt F4 gt key This allows you to probe various surfaces to define the part coordinate system Multi axis and multi surface probing cycles are available on a separate screen accessible from Set Part 0 Position with the Probing lt F5 gt key These allow you to locate the center points and corners of differently shaped parts To enter Part S
173. e same function as above except that this will back up the ICN files that are stored on the Controller in the INTERCON directory specified in PATHM IND F4 GEO Pressing lt F4 gt will do the same as above except that this will back up the Mastercam Geometry files that are stored on the Controller in the directory C NC GEO M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 6 2 F4 Restore Press lt F4 gt to restore files that were previously saved with the Backup lt F3 gt option When restoring files be sure to have the proper back up disk ee Restore Files from Archive mi Config CNC ICN GEO Fi F2 F3 F4 F1 Config Press lt F1 gt on this screen to restore the Controller s configuration from a floppy disk backup F2 CNC Press lt F2 gt on this screen to restore CNC files from a floppy disk backup This will restore to the C CNC7 NCFILES directory E3 ICN Pressing lt F3 gt will restore ICN files from a floppy disk backup This will restore to the INTERCON directory F4 GEO Press lt F4 gt to restore Mastercam Geometry files from a floppy disk backup This will restore to the C NC GEO directory M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 6 3 F5 File Ops Press lt F5 gt to access an additional file options screen These options operate on the CNC files stored on the Controller s hard drive The controller s CNC files are stored in the C CNC7 NCFILES directory F1 Import Press lt F1 gt
174. e the first character on the line 3 2 04 M Series Operator s Manual 11 3 Example select absolute positioning G90 XY plane G17 Visible comments will be displayed on screen with the G codes Internal Comment Identifier The semicolon is used to indicate the start of an internal comment within a CNC program line All characters after the semicolon are ignored when the program is temporarily omit the remainder of a line run Internal comments are used to document NC programs or Example G90 select absolute positioning G17 XY plane Gl X1 Y1 F10 GO X0 YO GO selected with no movement Numerical Expression The left bracket and right bracket are used to delimit a numerical expression Numerical expressions can contain floating point numbers or user and system variables in combination with mathematical operators and functions The left parenthesis or bracket and right parenthesis or bracket can be used between the first left bracket and last right bracket to force operator precedence or associatively A bracketed numerical expression can be used anywhere a number would be used Comparison operators eq ne etc have built in rounding specified by parameter 144 Without this rounding eq would usually return false when comparing two numbers calculated in different ways Comparison operators and logical operators amp amp
175. e the origin is to get to the left edge of the part The Edge Finder is approaching the part from the X direction and has a diameter of 25 inches Once this data is entered and lt F10 gt is pressed the X axis DRO display will read 1 125 This means the center of the Edge Finder is sitting to the left minus of the origin by 1 125 inches The X axis origin is now 1 inch into the part This value is computed by Position Approach from Edge Finder Diameter 2 Where Approach from is the sign of the approach direction In other words if the approach direction is minus then the value is Position Edge Finder Diameter 2 1 0 25 2 1 125 Work Coordinate Systems WCS Configuration Press lt F9 gt from the Part Setup screen to display the Work Coordinates System WCS menu The Work Coordinate Systems screen provides access to soft travel limits reference points and coordinate system origins Make sure your Home position has been set properly Otherwise the positions of each coordinate system will not be in the appropriate position M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 3 5 When you enter the Work Coordinate System Configuration screen the DRO display will automatically switch over to machine coordinates as an aid to entering numbers All the values on this screen are represented in machine coordinates F1 Travel Limits and Reference Return Points The lt F1 gt key is used to set the soft travel limits and the refer
176. e using multiple work coordinate systems positioning in all coordinate systems will be changed by the same amount 4 in X 3 in Y 2 in Z and 4 in W in the example below Example GO X5 Y3 Z 2 W5 Moves to the specified location G92 X1 YO ZO Wl Sets the current position to the absolute position specified M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 26 G98 Initial Point Return G98 sets the Z return level to point I as pictured in Figure 1 in the Canned Cycle Section G98 is the default setting G99 R Point Return G99 sets the Z return level to point R as pictured in Figure 1 in the Canned Cycle Section G117 G118 G119 Rotation of Pre set Arc Planes G117 G118 and G119 have the same functionality as G17 G18 and G19 respectively except that they include 2 optional parameters P and Q to specify the arc plane rotation away from the pre set arc plane P specifies the arc plane angle of rotation in degrees around the first axis and Q specifies the arc plane angle of rotation around the second axis G117 G119 For the G117 plane the first axis is X and the second axis is Y For the G118 plane the first axis is Z and the second axis is X For the G119 plane the first axis is Y and the second axis is Z If P and or Q is not specified the angles are assumed to be 0 degrees If both P and Q parameters are 0 then the plane is assumed to be an orthogonal pre set arc plane The center of th
177. easured Length X axis dimension of the frame mill Rectangular frame only Width Y axis dimension of the frame mill Rectangular frame only M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 27 Diameter Diameter of the frame mill Circular frame only Corner Radius Radius of curvature of the corners On an Inside frame corner radius must be greater than the current cutter radius Rectangular frame only Depth Total Total depth of the frame mill Depth Per Pass Depth of each individual pass Plunge Rate Z axis speed of descent Plunge Type Straight or Ramped Straight plunge does a vertical Z plunge with no X Y movement Ramped plunge does a zigzag plunge limited by the Plunge Angle entered below Plunge Angle The maximum limit angle allowed for a ramped plunge A special value of 0 means that there is no limit angle Note that this field means nothing if the Plunge Type is Straight Cut type Selects type of cut conventional or climb use lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt to toggle between them Feedrate Speed at which the cutter performs frame mill NOTE To make a circular frame mill of radius R specify R as the Corner Radius and set the Length and Width parameters equal to 2 x R Thread Milling F8 in the Canned Cycle Menu When you press lt F8 gt Thread Milling from the canned cycle menu the following screen is displayed Intercon Mill v6 11 Current Part E_ PART ICN Operation End
178. ed answer Yes during the tool change If you do not want to remove the current tool but instead want to alter its diameter or length offsets e g for doing a finish pass while using cutter compensation you may want to use a diameter offset which is slightly larger than the actual tool for the first passes then use the actual tool diameter for the finish pass answer No to this question Spindle and coolant will not be automatically turned off if you answer No here Press lt F10 gt when you are finished to accept these values If you have changed any field other than the Tool Number of the Actual Tool Change field or position you will actually make changes to the CNC7 Tool Library At the end of the program Intercon always turns off the spindle and coolant and returns the Z axis to the home position These codes do not need to be entered at the end of your program If you answer Yes the Tool Change operation will be accepted and the new tool library values will be applied If you answer No all changes to the tool library will be discarded however modified values for the Tool H Offset and Tool D Offset fields will be retained in the current Tool Change operation The Tool Change operation will be accepted At the end of a program Intercon always turns off the spindle and coolant and returns the Z axis to the home position These codes do not need to be entered at the end of your program M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 11 F5 C
179. ed at which cutter performs rough cuts Finish Pass Selects type of finish pass climb conventional or none at all Use lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt to toggle between them Finish Pass Amount Amount of material to be removed on the finish pass Finish Pass Feedrate Speed at which cutter performs finish pass The feedrate can be toggled to modal fixed or slave this is indicated by the symbol beside the feedrate field If the feedrate is modal then it will have the M symbol or if it is fixed it will have the F symbol shown below The slave feedrate has no symbol and is set to the last modal feedrate set in the program when the modal feedrate changes all the following slave feedrates change until the next modal feedrate is encountered Circular Pocket F6 in the Canned Cycle Menu When you press lt F6 gt Circular Pocket from the Canned Cycle Selection Menu this screen is displayed Intercon Mill v8 11 Current Part E Z_PART ICH Operation End N0100 Circular Pocket Type x Y 0010 Demo Program Center Xi 4 0000 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 Y 8 0000 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 Surface Height 0 0000 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Diameter 2 0000 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Cleanout Yes 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home Depth Total 0 5000 INC 0070 Tap 0 0000 0 0000 0 1000 per Pass 0 1000 0080 Face 3 0000 6 0000 0 0000 Plunge Rate 10 0000 0090 Rect
180. ed by a powered axis must have travel limits set handwheel Motor Label M Handwheel input must be a Parameters manual axis Motor Motor Revs Unit Number of clicks per rev If the wheel has no detents use Parameters 100 Motor Encoder Counts Rev Actual number of counts Use higher resolution encoders for Parameters generated per rotation of the smoother operation handwheel Motor Lash Limits Homes 0 0 0 Do not apply to handwheels Parameters Motor Direction reversed Screw N N Do not apply to handwheels Parameters Compensation Machine Parameter 19 MPG Modes As desired to select MPG on at Be sure to enable or disable 100x Parameters power up and MPG speed operation here See Machine limit Parameters for more information Machine Parameter 40 Basic Jog 0 0001 in or 0 002 mm by This specifies the distance per Parameters Increment default click in x1 mode Note Also used for jogging Machine Parameter 41 Handwheel Set to 100 for 100x movement This speed will be used in 100x Parameters 100x Speed User Jog If this is too fast choose a mode Increment smaller value Machine Parameter 128 Handwheel As needed to achieve the See Machine Parameters for more Parameters Mapping desired mapping information Machine Parameter 129 Handwheel 0 will work fine Handwheel See Machine Parameters for more Parameters Display display will be suppressed information Machine Parameters 130 131 Z and 0 will
181. ed field by highlighting the entire field The non active menu displays the active field with a box drawn around it Use the arrow keys to select fields as described below F9 Graphic On Off The Graphic On Off option will toggle the graphical representation of the math help menu on the display M V gt Arrow Keys Select Fields The lt LEFT gt and lt RIGHT gt arrow keys are used to navigate between the math menu and the edit menu The lt UP gt and lt DOWN gt arrow keys are used to navigate within a menu To choose fields for the Copy option above use the lt UP gt and lt DOWN gt arrow keys to highlight the desired field in the menu and use the lt LEFT gt or lt RIGHT gt arrow keys to switch menus M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 43 Other features common to all math help operations In some math help operations there will be an asterisk character that appears immediately to the right of a field This character marks the field as a given field which means that the value of this field will be held constant in the process of solving the math equations F1 Triangle Right F2 Triangle Other Intercon Mill v8 00 Current Part E_2_PART ICN N0020 Face Triangle Calculator B A X Unknown Y Angle Unknown B X Unknown Y Unknown Angle Unknown C X Unknown Y Unknown Angle Unknown Length AB Unknown BC Unknown CA Unknown Hide Math F6 Nex
182. ed technician M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 20 Parameter 121 Grid digitize prediction minimum Z pullback This parameter specifies the minimum distance the Z axis will move upward when pulling back from a surface The digitizing function attempts to predict the slope of a part surface because time is saved when the Z axis does not have to travel upward to the starting Z depth for every digitized point When probe contact is made traversing in the XY plane this parameter specifies the minimum distance the Z axis moves upward before attempting another XY plane move Smaller values are better when the surface being digitized has smooth curves Larger values are better for surfaces that have steep walls It is recommended that this parameter is not changed from its default value without consulting a qualified technician Parameter 122 Grid digitizing deadband move distance This parameter specifies a deadband distance used for internal calculations when doing a clearance move It is recommended that this parameter is not changed from its default value Parameter 123 Radial Clearance Move This parameter only applies to radial digitizing and determines what type of positioning move the digitizing probe will make should it encounter an unexpected probe contact with the surface of the part during Radial Digitizing Unexpected probe contact is defined as probe contact occurring while the probe is traversing towards the user defined cen
183. ee plane 2D view lt F2 gt switches the point of view to a different plane In isometric 3D view lt F2 gt enables the arrow keys to rotate the figure The arrow keys actually rotate a larger version of the YZX axes figure that shows the orientation in which the part will be redrawn Press lt F2 gt to redraw without leaving rotation mode Press lt Enter gt or lt F5 gt to redraw and return the arrow keys to pan mode Press lt Esc gt to cancel rotation F3 Set Range Press lt F3 gt to specify the range of operations to draw You will be prompted for a start block and an end block F4 Time Estimate Press lt F4 gt to hide or display the time estimate F5 Redraw Pressing the lt F5 gt key will cause the simulation to start again from the first operation Redraw F6 Pan When using the pan feature the project can be recentered in the display windows of the three plane display or rotated around the center of the isometric display screen To enter pan mode simply press the lt F6 gt key or press one of the arrow keys A set of crosshairs will appear Adjust the center of the crosshairs to the new desired center Press lt Enter gt or lt F5 gt or lt F6 gt to redraw the part with the new screen center point F7 F8 amp F9 Zoom In Zoom Out amp Zoom All The project can also be viewed in an enlarged or reduced state by pressing the lt F7 gt or lt F8 gt keys to activate Zoom In and Zoom Out respectively
184. el i e X Y Z etc pos is an optional position p is a plc bit number which can be negative f is a feedrate in units per minute For M115 and M116 functions the indicated axis will move to pos if specified until the corresponding plc bit p state is 1 unless p is negative in which case movement is until the plc bit state is 0 A p value of 1 to 80 or 1 to 80 specifies plc bits INP1 INP80 81 to 160 or 80 to 160 specifies plc bits OUT1 OUT80 and 161 to 240 or 161 to 240 specifies plc bits MEM1 MEM80 Warnings are generated in the CNC7 message window for Missing P value and Invalid P value M Series Operator s Manual3 2 04 13 9 If pos is not specified M115 will move axis in the negative direction and M116 will move axis in the positive direction Note that is pos is specified then if does not matter whether M115 or M116 is used If pos is not specified the movement is bounded by the settings in the software travel limits In the absence of software travel limits movement is bounded by the maximum probing distance Machine Parameter 16 In cases where pos is specified it is still bounded by the software travel limits If the bounded position is reached before the awaited plc bit state is found a Probe unable to detect surface error will be generated which will stop any running job For M125 and M126 protected move functions the behavior is identical to that of the M115 and M116 commands except in regar
185. elp values calculated for the last arc The screen will look like figure 6 below Intercon Mill v8 00 Current Part C_ROD ICN N0130 Arc Arc Tangent Arcs Arc Type EP amp R Circle 1 X 4 0000 0 0000 Radius 0 6250 End X 3 7746 Circle 2 X 0 0000 Y 0 5829 Y 0 0000 2 0 0500 Radius 1 2500 Circle 3 X 2 638 Y 3 5210 Radius 3 1500 Radius 0 0000 Plane Y Tangent 1 X 3 7746 Direction Y Y 0 5829 Connect Radius 0 0000 Tangent 2 X 0 7496 Feedrate 10 0000 Y 1 0003 Angle lt 180 Yes Solution 2 of 8 Prev Next Clear Prev Next Hide Copy Copy Graphic Soln Soln All Solver Solver Math lt lt lt gt gt gt 0n 0ff 1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E E8 E9 FIG 6 New arc 2 entry screen shown with solution for arcs 1 and 2 of Figure 3 TUUP DOWN Move Cursor F8 Copy gt gt gt F8 Copy gt gt gt F6 Hide Math M Series Operator s Manual If necessary move the block cursor to the Tangent 2 X field as shown above The rectangle at End X shows that it will be the destination of the copy Transfer the tangent point T2 value for X into the end point X coordinate The active fields on both sides of the screen advance automatically Transfer the tangent point T2 value for Y into the end point Y coordinate Hide Math Help temporarily 3 2 04 10 68 t UP DOWN F10 F3 t UP DOWN F6 F9 F1 Move Cursor Move down to the radius field and enter the radius of
186. emoved Message Cause Effect Removed Message 3 2 04 I J or K specified with wrong plane e g K with G17 or I with G19 Job canceled Start of new job Warning 0 radius arc on line NNNNN Arc move was specified with zero radius Move is done as a linear move job continues When next message appears Warning unknown arc on line NNNNN Position of arc move could not be determined from parameters e g G91 G2 X0 YO R1 Move is done as a linear move job continues When next message appears _ axis travel exceeded on line NNNNN Software travel limit would be exceeded by the requested move Job canceled Start of new job Option not available on line NNNNN A code for an extra cost option was specified but the option has not been licensed Job canceled Start of new job Program too long job canceled Attempt to run a job over 640K in length without the unlimited program size option Job canceled Start of new job No subroutines in MDI Specified 09100 09999 in MDI which would begin an embedded subprogram MDI canceled Start of new job Illegal recursion 16 10 Cause Attempt to execute a Cause subprogram or macro that calls itself either directly or Effect indirectly Removed Effect Job canceled Removed Start of new job 1005 Message Cause 912 Message Too many subprogram calls Cause Attempt to run a job with 20 or Effect more level
187. en F2 Repeat We programmed the part to cut one copy only We now want to repeat the part 2 more times at an incremental distance of 6 inches along the X axis The part can now be cut into the stock mounted into the two other fixtures The part begins with the circular pocket in operation 0030 and ends with the linear mill in operation 0050 Press lt F2 gt to enter Home for Clearance Height N0060 Repeat Start Block N0030 End Block N0050 Increment X 6 0000 Y 0 0000 Clearance Height Home Plunge Rate 2 0000 Number of copies 2 F8 Graph Display a preview of the parts This preview can be used to detect problems that may occur if the part was cut now ESC CANCEL Cancel Return to Repeat Subprogram F10 Accept Keep selected values if you wish to cut these two extra parts M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 54 If you do not wish to do this press lt ESC CANCEL gt ESC CANCEL Cancel Creation of the part is complete Intercon programs automatically turn the spindle and coolant off at the end F1 File Press lt F3 gt to save the part under its current name Press lt F4 gt to save it under a new name F10 Post The CNC file needed to run this part on your mill will be generated at this time The Intercon program displays the operation number of the part it is processing as it works through each operation in memory Generating CNC Program Block 0050 As it processes each operation it
188. ence return points for the machine The travel limits are measured from machine home If machine home is at the minus end of the axis then a positive value should be entered indicating how far the machine can move in the positive direction until it reaches the other end of its travel If machine home is at the plus end of the axis then a negative value should be entered indicating how far the machine can move in the negative direction until it reaches the other end of its travel The machine will never be allowed to move beyond the machine home position In the example above the home positions for the X and Y axes are at the minus limit and the home position for the Z axis is at the plus limit The reference return points are used with the G28 and G30 codes see Chapter 12 They are specified in machine coordinates The Z coordinate of the first reference point is also used as a Z home position by the M2 M6 and M25 codes see Chapter 13 F2 Origin Use the lt F2 gt key to specify the locations in machine coordinates of the origins of the first six work coordinate systems This option is a convenience and is not an absolute necessity for setting work coordinate system origins If you want to set the origins for the rest of coordinate systems you must use the Part Setup menu If the software option Coordinate System Rotation is unlocked the CSR angle for each of the first six work coordinate systems can also be set All coordinate
189. entary membrane switches which are used in combination with LED indicators to indicate the status of the machine functions W OEFA LIDreKED FrEE OrCAD aa a JI eam Buoe eursec A X 8 M N CIMCEXREIOO FEEDRATE OVERRIDE Fig 1 M Series Jog Panel M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 14 1 The M Series operator panel is a sealed membrane keyboard that enables you to control various machine operations and functions The panel contains momentary membrane switches The M Series jog panel can be customized as to the location of various keys The jog panel displayed in the figure above is representative of a default configuration found on most M series controls Axis Jog Buttons X X Y Y Z Z 4TH 4TH The yellow X Y Z and 4TH keys are momentary switches for jogging each of the four axes of the machine There are two buttons for each axis Only one axis can be jogged at a time Slow Fast Ks The slow fast key is located in the center of the Axis Motion Controls section and is labeled with the turtle and rabbit icon shown to the right The turtle represents slow jogging mode When SLOW jog R is selected LED on and a jog button is pressed the axis moves at the slow jog rate If FAST jog is selected the axis will move at the fast jog rate See Chapter 15 for information on setting the fast and slow jog rates for each axis Inc Cont INC CONT selects between incremental and continu
190. epth of each individual peck Peck Clearance Distance the tool retracts before drilling the next peck Plunge Rate Z axis speed of descent during drilling The plunge rate can be toggled to modal fixed or slave this is indicated by the symbol beside the plunge rate field If the plunge rate is modal then it will have the M symbol or if it is fixed it will have the F symbol The slave plunge rate has no symbol and is set to the last modal plunge rate set in the program when the modal plunge rate changes all the following slave plunge rates change until the next modal plunge rate is encountered Deep Hole Drilling F1 in the Canned Cycle Menu option 3 If you press lt F1 gt Drilling from the Canned Cycle Menu you will gain access to three types of drilling operations Drilling Chip Breaking and Deep Hole drilling The current drilling operation in use is reflected in the field Cycle Type and pressing lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt toggles between all three In this section we will examine the third option Deep Hole drilling Intercon Mill v8 11 Current Part E_2_PART ICN Operation End N0070 Drill Type xX Y Z 0010 Demo Program Cycle Type 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 Position xX 20 0000 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 Y 40 0000 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Surface Height 0 1000 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Clearance Height 0 1000 INC 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home Rapid to Depth 0 10
191. eries Operator s Manual 3 2 04 14 4 Press SPIN START when automatic mode is selected to restart the spindle if it has been paused with SPIN Press the SPIN START key when manual spindle mode is selected to cause the spindle to start rotating Spin Stop Press the SPIN STOP key when manual spindle mode is selected to stop the spindle Press SPIN STOP O when automatic mode is selected to pause spindle rotation and can be restarted with SPIN START WARNING SPIN STOP should only be pressed during FEED HOLD or when a program is NOT running Feedrate Override This knob controls the percentage of the programmed Feedrate that you can use during feedrate cutting moves lines arcs canned cycles etc This percentage can be from 2 to 200 Spindle Override This knob is the percentage of the Spindle Speed that will be used by variable frequency spindle drive In AUTO Mode the SPINDLE OVERRIDE knob is a percentage override 2 200 of the programmed Spindle Speed see Chapter 12 for how to assign a spindle speed In Manual Mode the knob controls Spindle Speed directly from 0 to the maximum spindle speed Feed Hold Feed Hold decelerates motion of the current movement to a stop pausing the job that is currently running Pressing CYCLE START will continue the movement from the stopped location Emergency Stop EMERGENCY STOP releases the power to all the axes and cancels the current job immediately upon being pressed EMERGENCY STOP also re
192. es Used in conjunction with the Threads Unit to calculate the plunge rate WARNING The spindle speed must be set before performing this operation Dwell Time Delay at bottom of hole before starting ascent This is used for a floating tap to allow the spindle time to reverse direction at the bottom of the hole A default value of 0 1 seconds is suggested This field will be hidden if a reversing tap head is used the tap head will reverse direction when the quill begins ascending NOTE When using low gear for tapping the spindle may turn opposite the direction specified The operator is responsible for setting the correct spindle speed and direction Facing F4 in the Canned Cycle Menu If you press lt F4 gt Facing at the Canned Cycle Selection Menu the following screen is displayed Intercon Mill v6 11 Current Part E_ _PART ICN Operation End NOO80 Face Type x Y 0010 Demo Program Start Xi 3 0000 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 yi 3 0000 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 Surface Height 0 0000 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Length x 3 0000 INC 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Width Y 3 0000 INC 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home Depth 0 5000 INC 0070 Tap 0 0000 0 0000 0 1000 Step Increment 0 1000 0080 Face Feedrate 30 0000 A 0090 End Prog 0 0000 0 0000 Home Plunge Rate 10 0000 F Math Teach Toggle Help Graph Mode F6 ES Fg F3 accent F10
193. es into contact with the part At each point of contact the X and Y coordinates will be recorded in the data file The probe will continue around the contour until it returns to the starting point to complete the cycle Based on the starting point and the first point of contact the digitize software will determine if the contour is internal or external M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 Contour Digitize Parameters Copy Type Toggle between CAM or Wall Use CAM for precise replication of regular shapes and use Wall following for contours with irregular shapes Irregular X Patch Length The length of the contour to be digitized along the X axis Y Patch Width The width of the contour to be digitized along the Y axis Axis Step Over The distance to pull back away from the surface in the X and or Y direction between A larger value should be used for a rough digitize along the Y axis This distance should be a positive incremental value Digitize File Name The base name of the file in which the digitize data is stored The file has an extension of CAM for CNC replay and is stored in the C CNC7 NCFILES directory Replay Feedrate The feedrate to include with the G1 command on the first line of the data file If the data file is run as a CNC program this is the feedrate at which the machine will retrace the digitized surface Plunge Rate The feedrate the Z axis plunges between successive depth passes Z Surface He
194. eshold for Feed Rate Override This parameter sets the lowest value permitted as the feed rate override percentage before feed hold is engaged Feed hold will be released when the override percentage is greater than this value Parameter 150 Run Time Graphics This parameter controls the default value of the Run Time Graphics option in the Run Menu If this parameter is set to 0 0 the RTG option in the Run Menu defaults to OFF when CNC7 is started If the parameter is set to 1 0 the RTG option defaults to ON when CNC7 is started Parameters 152 5 Axis Autotune Accel Time and Ka This parameter sets the autotune accel time and Ka for the 5 axis See parameters 87 90 for more information Parameters 156 5 Axis Autotune Move Distance This parameter sets the autotune move distance for the 5 axis See parameters 95 98 for more information Parameter 160 Enhanced ATC This parameter controls enhanced automatic tool changer ATC options A value of 1 indicates a nonrandom type of ATC and a value of 2 indicates a random type ATC A value of 0 disables enhanced ATC features A warning is displayed when attempting to enable enhanced ATC features as these features work in conjunction with specific PLC programs The enhanced ATC option has the following characteristics 1 The beginning of an M6 call whether it be a customized CNC7 M6 routine or not flags the job file setting the ATC error flag field to 1 2 The end of
195. essed CNC7M4 BAT probably not running Exit CNC7 with return code 60 By CNC7M4 BAT Return code 61 text mode Edit button pressed CNC7M4 BAT probably not running Exit CNC7 with return code 61 By CNC7M4 BAT Return code 62 text mode CAM button pressed CNC7M4 BAT probably not running Exit CNC7 with return code 62 By CNC7M4 BAT Return code 63 text mode CPU7 not responding or CNC7 HEX CNC7 PLC or font file is missing or damaged Exit CNC7 with return code 63 By CNC7M4 BAT Return code 64 text mode A floating point math error occurred Exit CNC7 with return code 64 By CNC7M4 BAT Return code 65 text mode CNC7 CFG file is missing or damaged 16 1 Effect Exit CNC7 with return code 65 Removed By CNC7M4 BAT Messages and Prompts in the Operator Status Window Status messages 301 Message Stopped Cause No operations in progress Effect None 302 Message Moving Cause Motors are moving while a CNC program is running Effect None 303 Message Paused Cause Motion is paused while a CNC program is running FEED HOLD Effect None 304 Message MDI Cause CPU7 running in MDI mode Effect None 305 Message Processing Cause CPU7 running in a mode other than MDI Effect None 306 Message Job finished Cause Normal end of CNC program Effect None 307 Message Operator abort job canceled Cause ESC or CYCLE CANCEL pressed
196. et the part position separately for each coordinate system Follow the instructions above to set the position for each axis in the first coordinate system then press lt F2 gt to select the previous work coordinate system or lt F3 gt to select the next work coordinate system Move to the next fixture and repeat the process The currently selected coordinate system is displayed below the axis picture on the Part Setup screen It is also displayed above the DRO at all times For a description on setting up each coordinate system see the Work Coordinate System Configuration section later in this chapter M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 3 3 Part Setup Examples Example 1 Setting the X axis Part Zero with no offset See diagram below Edge Finder lt Desired X axis Origin If you wanted the left edge of the part to be the origin for the X axis 1 Move the Edge Finder to the left edge of the part 2 Press lt F1 gt until the Axis label displays X 3 Move the cursor to the Edge Finder Diameter field 4 Type 25 and press lt ENTER gt 5 Press lt SPACE gt until Left is displayed 6 Press lt F10 gt to accept the values Axis Position Edge Finder Approach Diameter From X 0 0 25 Left Since no offset is being applied Position is zero The Edge Finder is approaching the part from the X direction and has a diameter of 25 inches Once this data is entered and lt F10 gt is pressed the X a
197. etup from the Main Screen press lt F1 gt and then lt F1 gt again Brushless motor note If you experience excessive vibration on a brushless drive system use Parameter 10 to select smooth deceleration in probing moves See Chapter 15 for more information WCS 1 G54 X Y Z B Current Position inches Job Name A CNC 0 0 0 0 0 Hires cae Spindle 0 0 0000 ae Off 0 0000 Operator abort job cancelled Stopped o 0 00 MDI Set Part 0 Position 1 Select Axis with F1 2 Jog to Touch Off on Part 3 Edit the Value if Necessary 4 Press F10 to Set Position Next Axis Part Edge Finder Approach Position Diameter From a X 0 0000 0 0000 Ee X gt WCS 1 G54 Press SPACE to change Prev Next Axis Auto Probe WCS WCS WCS Set F1 F4 E5 F6 F E9 F10 WARNING Before manually jogging any probe make sure the machine Feedrate is slow less than 10 in min or damage to the probe may result Automatically Setting Part 0 Part zero can be found using the probe The Probe Tool Number is defined in Machine Parameter 12 Make sure the probe length offset and diameter are set properly for this tool in the Offset Library The Edge Finder Diameter will be set automatically To set part 0 using the probe M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 8 1 1 Select the current work coordinate system by pressing lt F6 gt or lt F7 gt Then select the axis you want to probe by
198. eversing tap heads such as the Tapmatic NCR series Example 1 G85 XL Y1 R 1 Z 5 bore a 0 5 hole at X1 Y1 G80 cancel canned cycle Example 2 M3 S500 F27 78 start spindle CW set for 18 pitch tap M109 1 2 disable feedrate and spindle overrides G85 XL YI RL Ases tap hole at X1 Y1 to a depth of 0 4 M108 1 2 reenable feedrate and spindle overrides G80 cancel canned cycle M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 25 G89 Boring cycle with dwell Point Z Dwell P G89 Using G98 G89 Using G99 G89 is similar to G85 except that it includes an optional dwell at the bottom of the hole before retracting the tool Example G89 X1 Y1 R 1 Z 5 P 1 bore 0 5 hole at X1 Y1 dwell 1 seconds G80 cancel canned cycle G90 amp G91 Absolute Incremental Positioning Mode G90 selects absolute positioning and G91 selects incremental positioning In absolute positioning all coordinates are relative to the origin 0 0 0 0 In incremental positioning all coordinates are distances relative to the last point G90 Absolute positioning G91 Incremental coordinates Example G90 X2 Y3 moves the X and Y axes from the current position to the new position referenced from the absolute machine A zero G91 X1 YO moves the X axis 1 inch referenced from the last X position the Y axis does not move G92 Set Absolute Position G92 sets the current absolute position to the coordinates specified If you ar
199. exceptions 1 lt Ctrl F1 gt Aux 1 Executes the corresponding Aux function and Always with few Aux 12 signals the PLC A custom PLC program is exceptions 1 3 lt Ctrl required to act upon jog panel signals F12 gt lt Alt C gt Flood Coolant Alt C turns flood coolant on and off Alt E Always with few and and Mist turns mist coolant on and off Both flood and exceptions 1 3 lt Alt Q gt Coolant mist may be on at the same time Either key automatically selects manual coolant mode If requested by CNC7 Alt C and Alt E will select Auto Coolant Mode Press either when prompted lt Shift gt Feed Rate Decreases the feed rate override by 10 Jog panel job run or lt _ gt Override graphing and some 10 other times 2 4 lt Shift gt Feed Rate Increases the feed rate override by 10 Jog panel job run or lt gt Override 10 graphing and some other times 2 4 lt gt Feed Rate Decreases the feed rate override by 1 Jog panel job run Override graphing and some 1 other times 2 4 lt gt Feed Rate Increases the feed rate override by 1 Jog panel job run Override graphing and some 1 other times 2 4 lt Alt R gt Spindle On Off Alt R turns the spindle on clockwise if the Always with few and CW CCW spindle is off otherwise it turns the spindle exceptions 1 3 lt Alt Q gt off Alt Q is similar except counter clockwise Either will automatically select manual spin
200. face Digitize File Name The base name of the file in which the digitize data is stored The file has an extension of DIG for CNC replay Containment Angle Indicates whether or not the digitizing is to follow a full circle or a partial sector Choose Full if O to 360 degrees is desired Choose Partial if some other angles are needed These partial angles can then be changed later see setting the Partial Digitizing Sector Setup section that follows Multiple Patch Indicates whether or not this digitizing is a continuation of an earlier digitizing Choose No if the current digitizing is the first or only digitize run for the part to be digitized Choose Yes if the current digitizing is not the first digitize run for the part If Yes is selected specify the name of a digitize file of a previous multiple patch Move Between Levels This field is enabled only if Partial and CCW or CW option is selected It indicates the move between Z levels on replay of a partial sector radial digitize file This move may now be done in three different ways Clearance which goes to the clearance height as in previous versions Center which goes to the digitizing center and then to the Z level of the next pass and Direct which goes directly to the starting point of the next pass Clearance Height This field is enabled only if Partial CCW or CW replay pattern and Clearance Move type option is selected This distance indicates the clearance height needed to
201. from the CNC7 tool library You may then edit the length offset diameter offset and diameter values if you wish to redefine your tool The length value is not editable Description Description of the tool selected above from the tool library Position X and Y coordinates for the place at which the tool change will occur This should be a place at which the current tool can be removed from the quill and the new tool can be inserted Tool H Offset Index in the offset library between 0 and 200 of the actual tool height offset Tool Height Tool height associated with the H offset selected above This field is not editable Tool D Offset Index in the offset library between 0 and 200 of the actual tool diameter Tool Diameter Tool diameter associated with the D offset selected above Spindle Speed Speed at which the spindle will rotate when the spindle is started after the tool change Spindle Direction Direction in which the spindle will turn after the tool change If this is set to CW or CCW the spindle will be started automatically after the tool change Press lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt to toggle between CW CCW and Off Coolant Type Type of coolant to activate after the tool change If this is set to Flood or Mist the selected coolant system will be started automatically after the tool change Press lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt to toggle between Flood Mist and Off Actual Tool Change Determines whether an M6 code is generat
202. fset fields to define the mirror line Rotate F4 in the Insert Subprogram Menu The Rotate feature is useful for rotating a part contour multiple times around a given point The contour formed by these operations may either be closed or open Y Rotate Number of Copies 11 Start angle original copy angle center of i increment rotation Center The XY location of the center of rotation Start Angle The angle from the original copy at which the first copy will be placed A positive angle indicates a counterclockwise rotation while a negative angle indicates a clockwise rotation Angle Increment The angle at which each copy after the first will be placed from the first copy A positive angle indicates a counterclockwise while a negative angle indicates a clockwise rotation Number of Copies The number of times to rotate the contour End Angle The angle at which the final rotated copy will start not the angle at which it will end A positive angle indicates a counterclockwise rotation while a negative angle indicates a clockwise rotation M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 38 Skip Copy Prompt at which the list of skips may be modified Entering positive integers add skips to the list while entering negative integers remove skips from the list Multiple entries can be processed at the same time by separating them with commas Skip List List of skipped copies currently selected e NOTE T
203. g lt F5 gt and lt F6 gt Use the arrow keys to highlight the value to be adjusted Press lt F5 gt to increase the offset value by 0 001 or 0 02 mm in Metric mode Press lt F6 gt to decrease the offset by the same amount If the cut parts are undersized use lt F5 gt to cut less material If the cut parts are oversized use lt F6 gt to cut more material M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 4 2 Automatic Tool Measurement Z minus single surface probing using the TT 1 tool touch off post is available in the Tool Offset Library NOTE Make sure the proper parameters are set as per Chapter 8 and the detector is plugged in and is at the correct location on the table WARNING When first testing the TT 1 hold the TT 1 in hand and touch the unit off the tool to confirm correct setup Incorrect setup may cause damage to the machine tool and or operator Setting the Z Reference TT 1 Using the longest tool for the job to be run or the designated reference Tool tool press lt F1 gt then lt F3 gt and then CYCLE START The Z axis will Touch Off then move down until the tool touch off is detected The Z reference will Block be set at that position Setting the Tool Height Offsets Pressing lt F3 gt and then CYCLE START at the prompt will cause the Z axis to move down until the tool touch off is detected the resulting tool length will be entered in the table same as with lt F2 gt Manual The Z axis then returns to its h
204. g keys or the TOOL CHECK key can be used to assist you Jog the tip of the tool down to the top of the work surface If the tool is a drill or end mill press lt F2 gt to measure the height If the tool is a ball nose or bull nose cutter press lt F2 gt to measure the height and then subtract the tool nose radius After a tool height is measured the next Height Offset entry is automatically selected When the edit is complete press lt F10 gt to save the Offset Library and Exit Examples assuming Z Reference 1 5 If the tool position is 1 75 then the tool height 0 25 If the tool position is 1 75 and nose radius is 25 then the tool height 0 50 If the tool position is 2 25 then the tool height 0 75 If the tool position is 2 75 and nose radius is 125 then the tool height 1 375 Diameter This field tells the control the distance to adjust when cutter diameter compensation G41 or G42 is used with a particular D value For example if DOO1 is 0 5 and the job contains G41 D1 CNC7 will adjust all X Y positions 0 25 half the tool diameter to the left of the programmed tool path To edit the Diameter entries move to the desired diameter offset number with the arrow keys lt Page Up gt lt Page Down gt lt HOME gt and lt END gt You must manually edit the Diameter Offset value Type the desired value and then press the lt ENTER gt key You can make small adjustments to Height Offsets and Diameters usin
205. g program lines were scaled 3 1 in the X direction 2 1 in the Y direction and 1 1 in the Z direction If no scale factor is specified the default is 1 1 for all axes Example Mirroring G51 X 0 5 YO 0 2 0 I 1 Jl Ki turn mirror on GOO X0 0 YO 0 21 0 vapid traverse to X0 YO Z1 G01 X1 0 YO 5 21 0 lt LIne EO X150 Y eS Za G01 X0 0 Y1 0 21 0 line to XO Y1 zi G01 X0 0 YO 0 21 0 line to XO YO Z1 G50 cancel scale Y 2 1 ct 0 X 0 1 2 3 2 1 0 1 Original Triangle Mirrored Triangle If scaling factors are the same for all the axes parameter P can be used Example G51 X1 0 Y2 0 20 0 P2 5 scale all axes a factor of 2 5 If an arc is scaled with uneven scaling factors the result will depend on how the arc center and radius were specified 1 If the arc radius was specified with R the radius will be scaled by the larger of the two circular plane scale factors The result will be a circular arc between the scaled arc start and the scaled arc end 2 If the arc center was specified with I J and or K the centers will be scaled by the appropriate axis scale factors The result will be a circular arc from the scaled arc start around the scaled center and usually with a line from the end of the circular arc to the scaled arc end 3 In no case can an ellipse be generated using scaling G52 Offset Local Coordinate System Optional G52 shifts the local coordinate system origin by a specified distanc
206. ge for every instance that it occurs Parameter 81 Canned Cycle Parameter P81 when not equal to 1 0 specifies the M function to be called in place of Z axis movement during a G81 drilling cycle Parameter 82 Spindle Drift Adjustment This value is the number of degrees that the spindle will take to coast to a stop if it is cut off while it is spinning at the spindle speed specified by parameter 68 Parameter 83 Canned Cycle Parameter P83 specifies the clearance amount used during a G82 deep hole drilling cycle Parameter 84 Canned Cycle Parameter P84 specifies the number of the M function that is executed after the return to the initial point of a G74 or G84 tapping cycle Parameters 87 90 Autotune Accel Time and Ka These parameters are used by autotune Increasing the value will lengthen acceleration time and reduce the ka value given by autotune Lowering the value will decrease the acceleration time and increase Ka First set the parameters and then run autotune The default value is 48 The maximum value is 64 and the minimum value is 1 Parameters 91 94 Axis Properties These parameters may be used to set various axis properties These parameters correspond to X Y Z and the fourth axis respectively M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 19 Function Description Parameter Value jo Rotary Linear Axis Selection Rotary Axis 1 Linear Axis 0 Rotary Display Mode wrap Around 2 Show Rotations S
207. ge rate is encountered Dwell Time Delay at bottom of hole before starting ascent Tapping F3 in the Canned Cycle Menu Intercon Mill v6 11 Current Part E_ PART ICN Operation End NOO7O Tap Type x Y 0010 Demo Program Tap Head Type Rigid 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 Position x 0 0000 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 0 0000 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Surface Height 0 0000 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Clearance Height 0 1000 INC 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home Rapid to Depth 0 1000 INC 0070 Tap 0 0000 0 0000 0 1000 Depth Total 0 5000 INC 0080 End Prog 0 0000 0 0000 Home Increment 0 0000 Threads Inch 12 0000 Thread Pitch 0 0833 Dwell Time Spindle Dir CW M3 Spindle Speed 350 Math Teach Help Graph Mode accent Fa Fa Fg F10 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 20 The numbers in the fields on the screen correspond to the following example shown here graphically Tapping Feed move i gt Rapid move evnenocseconsecesseced gt acu Clearance Height 6 eee Rapid To Depth Surface 7 Spade CW Height Hole Depth Spindle CCW Dwell P Where Tap Head Type Without rigid tapping this selects either Floating tap head or Reversing tap head If rigid tapping is enabled you can select either rigid or reversing Spindle Direction Shows the current spindle direction The spindle direction should be CW for r
208. gitizing run edit the parameters shown and then press CYCLE START The control will move through the area to be digitized in a rectangular pattern At each X Y point in the pattern it will measure the Z height of the sample surface and record the coordinates in the data file Digitizing begins at the current tool position when the CYCLE START button is pressed This position should be in one corner of the digitize area at a Z position higher than any point on the surface Grid Digitize Parameters X Patch Length The length of the area to be digitized along the X axis A positive value will cause digitizing to proceed in the X direction from the starting point a negative value will cause digitizing to proceed in the X direction If the value is 0 then digitizing will collect just one stripe along Y X Step Over The distance to move between points on the X axis A smaller value should be used for a fine digitize along the X axis A larger value should be used for a rough digitize along the X axis This distance should be a positive incremental value Y Patch Width The width of the area to be digitized along the Y axis A positive value will cause digitizing to proceed in the Y direction from the starting point a negative value will cause digitizing to proceed in the Y direction If the value is 0 then digitizing will collect just one stripe along X Y Step Over The distance to move between points on the Y axis A smaller value should
209. hapter 15 for the various settings F6 4th Axis Toggle This key will only be displayed if Machine parameter 131 is set See Chapter 15 for the various settings E7 ATC This key will only be displayed if Machine parameter 6 is set to 1 0 It has the same effect as the lt F7 gt ATC key in the Tool menus which is to prompt for a tool number and then perform the actions required for an automatic tool change cycle M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 2 1 F2 Load Job This option allows you to specify the file name of the CNC program that you want to run next On the Load Job screen the available keys are lt F1 gt change to the Floppy drive AA directory lt F2 gt change to the Hard Drive C CNC7 NCFILES directory lt F3 gt change to an attached computer s drive via RS232 port or network connection lt F10 gt load the selected file lt Page Up gt move the cursor back one page A page is 32 files lt Page Down gt move the cursor forward one page lt END gt select the last file in the list lt HOME gt select the first file in the list Arrow Keys move the cursor in the selected direction When the Load Job screen is first displayed the initial list of files will come from the controller s hard drive Press lt F1 gt to switch to the controller s floppy drive or press lt F3 gt to switch to the drive of a computer attached via an Remote null modem cable Press lt F2 gt to switch back to the Controller s h
210. he actual probe tip diameter Probing Cycles You can enter the Probing Cycles screen from either the Set Part 0 Position screen or the Digitize menu The Probing Cycles screen is shown below WCS 1 G54 Current Position inches Job Name TEST CNC 0 z 0 0 0 0 E Henin Spindle 0 0 0000 Feed Hold Off 0 0000 0 0000 A Probing Cycles ON lt xX Probe diameter Tool 101 0 2000 Bore Boss Slot Web In Cnr Out Cnr 1 Axis F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F ESC M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 8 2 The probing cycles will report the location and dimensions as applicable of the probed feature in a floating dialog box The dimensions are adjusted to compensate for the probe tip diameter entered in the Offset Library see Parameter 12 For your convenience you can edit the probe diameter on this screen as long as the Tool Number as set in Parameter 12 is not 0 During the probing cycles the probe will move at speeds specified in Parameters 14 and 15 Refer to the Probe Parameters section later in this chapter for more information F1 Bore Press lt F1 gt to enter the Bore screen A picture similar to the one shown at right will appear with instructions Follow these steps 1 Make sure the probe is clear of any obstacles Manually jog the probe inside the hole The probe tip should be just below the top edge of the surface 3 Press lt F10 gt to start the probing 4 At the end of probing the
211. he user may enter the Start Angle the Number of Copies and either the Angle Increment or the End Angle value and Intercon will compute the rest M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 39 Graphics Intercon features three dimensional previews of the tool path to be followed when milling the part You may choose to display your project in one of two formats a three plane display where the project is shown in each of the XY ZX and YZ planes an isometric display which depicts the project three dimensionally from an observer s point of view To view the graphics press lt F8 gt from the Main Menu or from any Operation Edit screen The format of the display will be similar to the following View TOP Graphing Done Job Name FLANGE1 ICN Y 1S 1 0 05 0 0 05 1 0 15 EEN LETTET A yas En i FE eg Ng plc a A N A E TENE kall LAE EACE UK Fa E ae GY A EEE DAAE A E A on oaNh 654 2 0 15 10 05 0 0 05 10 15 2 0 X 2D Set Time Zoom Zoom Zoom 3D View Range este fedrau Pan In Dut All Fi F2 E3 F4 E5 F6 E FS Fo The display will consist of arcs and or lines that make up the tool path followed Rapid GO moves will appear in color while linear G1 and arc G2 G3 moves will be uncolored Canned cycle operations except the facing cycle will also display a gray outline of the final result of the operation as the operation progresses The type start and end positions of the last displ
212. ield This field cannot be modified Thread Type Specifies right or left hand threads Thread Direction Specifies whether to start at the bottom of the hole and work up or start at the top of the hole and work down Tool Type Single point or full form threading tool Thread Approach Internal or external thread Clearance Amount Used for external thread milling only Specifies the diameter of the lead in arc Minimum clearance is 0 050 inches Clearance Angle Used for external thread milling only Specifies the angle from which the lead in arc will start Feedrate Cutting feed rate Surface Height Absolute Z axis position from position from where the incremental depth is measured Clearance Height This parameter specifies the Z axis height used when performing rapid moves to the position of each hole being thread Rapid to Depth The depth below the Clearance Height but above the Surface Height to which the cutter rapid moves before beginning to thread mill at the specified Plunge Rate Depth The total depth of the thread Number of Passes Number of times the thread mill is to be done on the same hole M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 29 Cleanout F9 in the Canned Cycle Menu The cleanout cycle performs a horizontal zigzag pocket cleanout of a profile composed of lines and arcs When you press lt F9 gt Cleanout from the canned cycle menu the following screen is displayed
213. ight Surface height of material for reproduction of digitized parts Z Clearance Clearance to rapid to above surface of part during replay Z Depth Depth of the part as measured from the surface height Z Incremental Depth Depth of cut for each Z step of the part Probe Diameter Diameter of probe tip used to digitize the part M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 7 11 Contour Digitize Notes Contour digitizing creates an M amp G code file with a CAM extension The structure of the CAM file starts with a header of comments indicating some of the parameters used when digitizing the contour followed by the contour itself which is output as a subprogram Specifically the M amp G codes for the contour are preceded by an 09800 start of subprogram and followed by an M99 end of subprogram The end of the CAM file contains the initial positioning moves and a call to the contour subprogram G65 P9800 Probing direction When starting the digitizing cycle choose a starting point where the X travel will contact a point on the cam on the Y axis The probe tip will move toward the center line in the X direction until it contacts the cam then will move either clockwise or counterclockwise around the cam depending on which quadrant you started the cycle see Table 1 Table 1 Probe direction by starting quadrant X Y Probe travels X Y X Y CW CCW CW CCW CW ei ae pe X Y X Y oo If th
214. ight hand tapping and CCW for left hand tapping The spindle speed and direction appropriate for the tapping tool should be set in the tool change in which the tapping tool was loaded This field will be hidden if a reversing tap head is used WARNING The tap must be rotating in the correct direction before performing this operation Position Specifies the X and Y coordinates where the tapping will take place If either the X or Y coordinate is an incremental value you will have the option to tap multiple holes in a linear pattern See Canned Cycle Introduction 2 Surface Height Absolute Z axis position from where each incremental depth is measured Clearance Height This parameter specifies the Z axis height used when performing rapid moves to the position of each hole being drilled Rapid To Depth The depth below the Clearance Height but above the Surface Height to which the cutter rapid moves before beginning to drill the hole at the specified Plunge Rate Depth Total Depth of hole incremental as measured from Surface Height Depth Increment available only on rigid tapping This sets the length of each progressive peck down the hole Threads Unit Number of threads on each inch mm of the tap Used in conjunction with the Spindle Speed to calculate the appropriate plunge rate Plunge Rate Spindle Speed Threads per Unit M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 21 Spindle Speed Rate at which the spindle rotat
215. ill display these options lt F1 gt Copy Menu allows a range of operations to be copied Specify the Start Block End Block and Destination in the prompts that appear in the Copy Menu The range of operations is copied into a location that precedes the destination block lt F2 gt Move Menu allows a range of operations to be moved Specify the Start Block End Block and Destination in the prompts that appear in the Move Menu The range of operations is moved into a location that precedes the destination block lt F3 gt Cut lt F4 gt Paste lt F5 gt Copy perform the same actions as described above lt F9 gt Clear Clipbrd removes all operations in the clipboard stack F8 Graph Choosing lt F8 gt will graph the current program The graph is the same as what would be produced if the current program were translated into G codes and graphed from CNC7 software See Chapter 2 for more information about the Graph menu F9 Setup Choosing lt F9 gt Setup will display the Setup menu where certain options can be set The Setup menu appears as below Intercon Mill v8 20 Current Part E_ _ PART ICN Intercon Setup Comment Generation Clearance Amount 0 1000 Spindle Coolant Delay P 3 00 Corner Feedrate Override 50 00 Nodal Linear No Nodal Arc No Modal Drill Bore Tap No Rotary 4th Axis No DRO Units Inches Machine Units Inches Help Icons always on No Toggle Accept Fl F10
216. jog panel is not shown The status window in the upper right corner of the screen displays the jogging mode continuous incremental incremental step size and jog speed fast slow In continuous mode the jog keys start movement when pressed and movement stops when you release the key In incremental mode the axis will move the indicated incremental step amount As shown in the picture above the jog keys are located in the cursor key block to the right of the main keyboard and to the left of the numeric keypad If a jog key controls an axis it will be overlaid with the axis symbol X Y etc The jog keys are the arrow keys lt Insert gt lt Delete gt lt Home gt lt End gt lt Page Up gt and lt Page Down gt The remaining keys are described below Key s Function Description Availability Notes lt Alt S gt Cycle Start Same as Cycle Start Always with few exceptions 1 lt Esc gt Cycle Cancel Same as Cycle Cancel During a job run otherwise Esc is used to exit CNC7 menus M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 14 6 Key s Function Description Availability Notes lt Space gt Feed Hold Turns Feed Hold on and off The space key may or be used for editing lt Alt H gt and may not be available at all times Alt H is always available lt Alt J gt Start Exit Panel Invokes or exits the jog panel Always with few
217. le M120 probetst dat M121 Open data file append to existing file This M function will open the requested file for writing at the end of the file If no drive or directory is specified with the file name then the file will be opened in the same directory as the CNC program If the file does not already exist it will be created This is not an error If the file cannot be successfully opened then an error will be returned ultimately terminating the job If a data file is already open when M121 is called that file will first be closed then the new file opened Example M121 c probetst dat M Series Operator s Manual3 2 04 13 10 M122 Record position s and optional comment in data file This M function will write the current expected position value to the data file in the usual format i e axis label before number 4 decimal places in inch mode 3 decimal places in millimeter mode Any comment that appeared on the line with M122 will be output after the position s With no axis arguments M122 will write the positions of all installed axes With axis arguments it will write the positions only of the requested axes Positions will be written in local not machine coordinates in native machine units If no data file has been opened with M120 or M121 before M122 is called then M122 will return an error and terminate the job The parameter L1 may be used to suppress the new line character normally outputted after the last position
218. lues to match your particular machine setup Tool Number 1 Description Tool 1 H001 D001 Position X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Tool H Offset ou Tool Height 0 0000 Tool D Offset 1 Tool Diameter 0 1875 Spindle Speed 1000 Spindle Direction CW M8 Coolant Type Flood M8 Actual Tool Change Yes Notice for this particular screen the Tool height shows 0 0000 since it has the same tool height as the Reference tool However your screen may differ since Intercon cannot change the Reference tool height in the Tool Library This will change when you run this program Refer to the Measuring Tool Heights section on page 6 24 for more details F10 F5 F1 F2 Accept Cycles Drill Drill BHC Keep selected values Access the list of available Canned Cycles Select drilling cycles Select a bolt hole circle operation The clearance height is the Z height from which the downward rapid traverse begins before each hole It is also the Z height to which the tool returns upon completion of drilling the hole The Rapid To depth is the Z height to which the tool rapid traverses before drilling a hole M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 59 BOLT HOLE CIRCLE Number of holes 5 N0030 Drill bolt holes F10 F4 Y Sian See cecce cee C garance X Rapid To Surface Height FIG 2 Bolt Hole Circle Cycle Type Drilling Center X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Surface Height 0 0000 Clearance Heigh
219. ly to second reference point G30 Pl move all axes to first reference point NOTE G30 P1 is equivalent to G28 G40 G41 G42 Cutter Compensation G41 and G42 in conjunction with the selected tool diameter D code apply cutter compensation to the programmed toolpath G41 offsets the cutter tool one half of the tool diameter selected with a D code to the left of the workpiece relative to the direction of travel G42 offsets the cutter tool one half of the tool diameter selected with a D code to the right of the workpiece relative to the direction of travel G40 cancels G41 and G42 Example G41 DO3 Tells the machine to compensate left half of the Diameter of the amount that corresponds to D03 in the Tool Library M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 7 Cutting Right Compensated qe 7 oe eed path Left Compensation Right compensation Whenever cutter compensation is applied the following factors must be taken into account in order to obtain proper results 1 The cutter diameter compensation function G41 G42 must be implemented before the cutter tool reaches the starting cutting point Example 1 sevssseeeneeeeee gt Compensated tool center path gt Programmed path R 1 2 of the tool diameter 1 2 of D offset Cutter GOXOYO Rapid tool to X0 YO G42 D3 Turn cutter compensation on with a diameter of D3 GOX 5Y2 Rapid to X0 5 Y2 G1x4 1Y2 Linear cut to X4 1 Y2 Cu
220. meter controls the action of the Load Job menu when CNC job files are selected from drives letters higher than C These drives i e drives D E F etc are presumed to be network Interlink drives or extra hard drives Value Meaning 0 Job files are not copied or cached They are run from whichever drives they reside on 1 Job files are copied to the C drive C CNC7 NCFILES when they are loaded The local copy is used when the job runs 2 Turn on file caching Job files are temporarily cached on the C drive The cached copy is used while the job is running The cached copy is deleted when the next job is loaded or when Parameter 4 changes to a 0 or 1 Digitize files are cached as the machine is digitizing When digitizing is complete the resulting file is copied to the digitize directory specified in PATHM INI File caching is useful for machines with both a flash card and a hard drive By caching job files from the hard drive on the flash card the hard drive is not used while the job is running As a result the life of the hard drive is extended and the flash card does not fill up with job files Parameter 5 Suppress Machine Home Setup This parameter controls machine homing upon startup of the control The following table details the functions controlled by this parameter Function Description Parameter Value Suppress the requirement to set machine home Yes 1 before running jobs No 0 Display router
221. mum rate may be set to a smaller value if you wish to run your machine at a slower rate M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 5 Deadstart Determines the speed to which an axis decelerates before stopping or reversing direction A low setting will cause a large slowdown before reversals of direction causing your machine to be more accurate A high setting will cause less slowdown before reversals but this may cause your machine to bang and you may lose accuracy This parameter should not be changed Delta Vmax The maximum instantaneous velocity change that will be commanded on a vector transition This parameter should not be changed Travel The maximum distance the axis can travel in the minus direction from the home position Set this parameter to create a software limit that stops the axis before the fixture or tool collides with the machine Travel The maximum distance the axis can travel in the plus direction from the home position This parameter is especially useful when using a part or fixture larger than the table Set this parameter to create a software limit that stops the axis before the fixture or part collides with the machine F2 Motor Parameters Values should be recorded on the Control Parameters page at beginning of manual This screen contains information about the motors ballscrews and switches installed on your machine See the figure below WCS 1 G54 Current Position Inches Job Name 2AXTSTO1
222. n You need to jog your reference tool down so it touches the top of some surface Set your Z reference position This is the value that appears on the DRO when the reference tool touches the top of the surface Move the quill up to the Z home position Insert the first tool to measure Select height offset which holds the height of the first tool Jog the tool down until it touches the same surface as did the reference tool Record the height of the first tool Now repeat the last four steps above from TOOL CHECK to F2 for each additional tool to measure Store modifications to offset library of your tools 3 2 04 10 79 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 80 Chapter 11 CNC Program Codes General The next three chapters contain a description of the CNC program codes and parameters supported by the M Series Control The M Series Control has some G codes and parameters that are modal and some that are one shots The G codes and parameters that are modal will stay in effect until a new G code or parameter is issued One shots are effective for the current line only For example a movement command of G1 which is modal will remain in effect until a different movement command is issued such as GO G2 G3 etc Miscellaneous CNC Program Symbols D Tool Diameter Offset Number D is used to select the Tool Diameter Offset from the offset library The D code values are stored in the Offset Library Tool Diameter Offset
223. n keys are ignored and the spindle runs according to the program The default direction is CW Spindle Override Controls Speed increase Pressing this key will increase the spindle speed by 10 of the commanded speed in Va Auto spindle mode limited by the maximum speed or 200 of commanded speed whichever is less For manual spindle mode the spindle speed is increased by 5 of the maximum spindle speed up to the maximum speed The LED is on if the spindle speed is set above the 100 point Pressing this key will set the spindle speed at the 100 point which is defined as the commanded speed 100 in Auto spindle mode or 1 2 the maximum spindle speed in manual mode The LED will be on when the spindle is at the 100 point Speed decrease Pressing this key will decrease the spindle speed by 10 of the commanded speed in Ce Auto spindle mode limited to 10 of commanded speed For manual spindle mode the spindle speed is decreased by 5 of the maximum spindle speed down to 5 of maximum The LED is on if the spindle speed is set below the 100 point Spindle Auto Man This key selects whether the spindle will operate under program control automatic or under operator control manual When the LED is lit the spindle is under automatic control If the LED is off the spindle is under manual control Pressing the SPINDLE AUTO MAN key will toggle it from AUTO to MAN and back again The default is AUTO mode Spin Start M S
224. n a counterclockwise direction in the XZ plane The axes included in the currently selected circular plane G17 G18 or G19 will move in a circular motion Any other axes specified will move along a straight line helical movement The programmed feedrate is used for the interpolated motion along the movement of all axes Helical and circular motion can be programmed in two different ways specifying the final point and the radius of the arc or specifying the final point and the parameters I J K center point of the arc as incremental values from the start position NOTE For closed circles arc of 360 degrees use method 2 specify final point and parameters I J and K Method 1 specify final point and radius will not work METHOD 1 USING FINAL POINT AND RADIUS The commands G2 and G3 will have the following structure G2 Xa Yb Zc Rd G3 Xa Yb Zc Rd M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 3 where a b and c will be the X Y and Z coordinates of the final point of the arc and d will be the radius In most cases there will be two possible arcs of the same radius connecting two given points This occurs because the center of the arc is not specified To choose the bigger arc make the radius negative To choose the smaller arc make the radius positive See examples 1 and 2 for graphical explanations of this concept Example 1 small arc solution positive radius G17 G90 F25 7select XY plane and absolute positioning GOO X
225. n automatic tool changer is installed it then commands the tool changer to switch to the requested tool Otherwise it prompts the operator to insert the tool and then press the CYCLE START button on the Operator Panel Default action no tool changer M25 always does M25 first M95 1 2 3 5 turn off spindle amp coolant M100 75 wait for CYCLE START button Default action tool changer installed M25 always does M25 first M95 1 2 3 5 turn off spindle amp coolant M95 16 turn off tool changer strobe M107 send tool number to tool changer M94 16 turn on tool changer strobe M101 32 wait for acknowledge from changer M Series Operator s Manual3 2 04 13 2 M95 16 turn off tool changer strobe M100 32 wait for acknowledge from changer Manual tool changes are selected by setting Parameter 6 to 0 in the Machine Parameters table The automatic tool changer is selected by setting Parameter 6 to 1 see Chapter 6 The PLC program must be involved in commanding an automatic tool changer and its associated strobe BCD and ACKnowledge lines See Chapter 5 of the service manual for details of how such a PLC program could be constructed M07 Mist Coolant On M7 causes the PLC to start the mist coolant system Default action M95 3 M94 5 M08 Flood Coolant On M8 causes the PLC to start the flood coolant system Default action M95 5 M94 3 M09 Coolant Off
226. n stops and the operator is prompted to press the CYCLE START button to continue Default action M100 75 M Series Operator s Manual3 2 04 13 1 M01 Optional Stop for Operator M1 is an optional pause whose action can be selected by the operator When optional stops are turned on M1 will pause the currently running job until CYCLE START is pressed However if optional stops are turned off M1 will not pause the program NOTE If you plan to override the default action of M1 with a macro file you may want to include a call to M1 within the macro file so that the default actions of M1 will still be effective in the overridden M1 Otherwise if a call to M1 is not included within the macro file the new overridden M1 will cause optional stops to be ineffective M02 Restart Program M2 moves the Z axis to the home position performs any movement requested and restarts the program from the first line The operator is prompted to press the CYCLE START button to continue M03 Spindle On Clockwise M3 requests the PLC to start the spindle in the clockwise direction Default action M95 2 M94 1 M04 Spindle On Counterclockwise M4 requests the PLC to start the spindle in the counterclockwise direction Default action M95 1 M94 2 M05 Spindle Stop M5 requests the PLC to stop the spindle Default action M95 1 2 M06 Tool Change M6 moves the Z axis to the home position and stops the spindle and coolant If a
227. n the program when the modal plunge rate changes all the following slave plunge rates change until the next modal plunge rate is encountered Dwell Time Delay at bottom of hole before starting ascent Drilling provides a rapid to the hole position at the Clearance Height followed by a rapid Z down to the Rapid To Depth Next is a feedrate down to the specified depth If a Spot facing cycle is desired enter a value in the dwell time field and the cutter will wait the desired amount of time before performing a rapid move up to the Clearance Height Chip Breaking F1 in the Canned Cycle Menu option 2 If you press lt F1 gt Drilling from the Canned Cycle Menu you will gain access to three types of drilling operations Drilling Chip Breaking and Deep Hole drilling The current drilling operation in use is reflected in the field Cycle Type and pressing lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt toggles between all three In this section we will examine the second option Chip Breaking M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 15 Intercon Mill v8 11 Current Part E_Z2_PART ICN Operation End N0070 Drill Type X Y 0010 Demo Program Cycle Type Chip Breaking 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 Position 20 0000 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 Y 40 0000 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Surface Height 0 1000 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Clearance Height 0 1000 INC 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home Rapid to Depth 0 1000 INC ri
228. nd lt J gt Transfer the tangent point T1 value for X into the end point X coordinate The active fields on both sides of the screen advance automatically Transfer the tangent point T1 value for Y into the end point Y coordinate Move down to the radius field and enter the radius of the arc labeled as ARC 1 in Figure 3 This radius is 0 6250 in 3 2 04 10 66 Arc type EP amp R Mid X Y Z End X 3 7746 Y 0 5829 Z 0 0500 Center X Y Z Angle Radius 0 6250 Plane XY Direction CW Feedrate 10 0000 Angle lt 180 Yes F6 Hide Math Hide Math Help temporarily We will return later to pick up the other tangent points F8 Graph Observe Figure 5 The graphics show a preview of the part up to this point This preview can be used to detect problems that may occur if the part was cut now View TOP Graphing Done Job Name C_ROD ICN Y FIG 5 Draw screen showing Bolt Holes Pockets and first arc of part ESC CANCEL Cancel M Series Operator s Manual Return to the editing screen 3 2 04 10 67 F10 Accept Keep selected values The other arc values were calculated for you F3 Arc G2 amp G3 The next arc to be cut is labeled as ARC 2 in Figure 3 The start point is labeled P2 the end point of the last arc N0130 Arc t UP DOWN Move Cursor Move down to the End X field This selects End X as the destination of the Math Help solution F6 Math Help Redisplay the Math H
229. ndle 1506 i Z 0 00000 _ Processing B A Waiting for PLC operation 0 B 0 0 0 0 0 Processing Stopped 0 00000 Control Configuration DRO display units Inches Millineters Machine units Inches Inches 7 Millimeters Max spindle high range 3000 0 1 0 to 500000 0 RPM Min spindle high range 0 0 0 0 to 500000 0 RPM Machine home at purup Jog Jog Home Switch Ref Mark H5 PLC type Absent Absent 7 Normal 7 Lite 7 Dual Console type Keyboard Jog panel required Yes No Yes Screen blank delay 20 1 to 200 minutes Remote Drive amp Directory Press SPACE to change Save E10 DRO Display Units This field controls the units of measure the DRO displays The two options are Millimeters and Inches When this field is highlighted by the cursor Press SPACE to change appears at the bottom of the screen This message is explaining that pressing the lt SPACE gt key will toggle the value of this field between the two options The DRO display units do not have to be the same as the machine units of measure explained below This field is provided for users of the G20 amp G21 codes so that they may view the tool position in terms of job units see Chapter 11 Machine Units of Measure This field controls which units of measure the machine uses for each job The two options are Millimeters and Inches Press lt SPACE gt to toggle the field between the two
230. nds to the actual arcs being milled Observe Figure 4 Point T1 is the one needed M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 65 Intercon Mill v8 00 Arc Tangent Arcs Circle 1 A 4 0000 Y 0 0000 Radius 0 6250 Circle 2 x 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Radius 1 2500 Circle 3 X 2 6387 Y 3 5210 Radius 3 1500 Tangent 1 X 3 46 Y 0 5829 Tangent 2 X 0 7496 Y 1 0003 Solution 2 of 8 Prev Next Clear Prev Next Soln Soln All Solver Solver Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 Hide Copy Copy Graphic Math lt lt lt gt gt gt On Off F 9 Current Part C_ROD ICN N0120 Arc FIG 4 Screen showing Math Help Arc Tangent Arc solutions ARROWS F9 ARROW ARROWS F8 F8 ARROWS Move Cursor Graphic On Off Move Cursor Move Cursor Copy gt gt gt Copy gt gt gt Move Cursor M Series Operator s Manual If necessary move the block cursor to the Tangent 1 X field as shown above Note Use only lt gt and lt gt If you press the right arrow press the left arrow to get back to the Math Help fields Press to hide the graphical display and reveal the arc operation behind it Move the cursor to the arc operation The solid block cursor on the left side of the screen will be replaced by an outlined rectangle and the solid block will appear in the arc operation on the right Move the block cursor to the End X field of the arc operation As before use only lt gt a
231. ng ild the current program at the beginning and will prompt you to press the CYCLE START button again to lt begin execution of the program After an MO M1 M2 or M6 is encountered in the program the message Press CYCLE START to continue will be displayed on the screen and the M 400 M 39 Control will wait until you press the CYCLE START button before continuing program execution NOTE Pressing CYCLE START will cause the M Series Control to start moving the axes immediately without further warning Be certain that you are ready to start the program when you press this button Pressing the FEED HOLD button or the CYCLE CANCEL button will stop any movement if CYCLE START is pressed accidentally Cycle Cancel 5 Press CYCLE CANCEL to abort the currently running program The control will stop movement O immediately clear all M functions and return to the Main Screen Itis recommended that you press FEED HOLD first before CYCLE CANCEL If you press CYCLE CANCEL program execution will S stop if you wish to restart the program you must rerun the entire program or use the search function See search function operation in Chapter 2 Coolant Control Keys The coolant control keys are located in a single row between the Spindle Control section and Axis Motion Controls section of the jog panel Coolant Auto Manual selection This key will toggle between automatic and manual control of coolant In automatic mode M7 Mist and M8 Flood c
232. ng down the cutting feedrate can solve the problem 2 If the problem only occurs on high speed moves then either the maximum speed or the acceleration is set too high Lower the values in the Motor 16 3 Note 410 Message Cause Effect Removed M Series Operator s Manual Setup screen or rerun Autotune again to determine new values 3 If the problem is persistent lag errors in normal operations it indicates that the motors are too weak to handle the required loads Increase the gear ratios or get more powerful motors If the Lag Distance Allowable Following Error is exceeded for more than 025 seconds then no acceleration will occur on any axis However no error message is generated at this point because no fatal error exists _ axis position error A position error gt 25 inches is detected on any axis All axis motion is stopped power to the 411 motors is released all servo drive commands cease and the CNC program is aborted Message Cause The probable causes of this error are 1 The motor is wired up backwards 2 Noise is getting into the system via the motor cables the line integrity has been violated 3 An encoder error occurred Job canceled Try a slow jog on the motor and watch the DRO position If the position on the DRO goes opposite the direction indicated on the jog button then the motor is wired up backwards Change the motor wiring Effect Check the
233. nges to 10 and the Part changes to 10 with a downward arrow indicator When a job completes the Part will decremented to 9 If repeat is on the job will automatically start again and keep running until the Part has reached 0 F4 Skips On Off This function toggles the block skip feature When block skipping is on G code lines that start with a forward slash character are skipped i e they are not processed The On or Off label indicates the state to which the Skips feature will toggle to when pressed It does not indicate the current state The current state is indicated in the user window above E5 Block Mode Turns single block mode on and off This is similar to pressing AUTO BLOCK If single block mode is on CNC7 will stop after each block in your part program and wait for you to press CYCLE START The current state is indicated in the user window above F6 Optional Stops Turns optional stops on and off If optional stops are on any M1 codes that appear in your program will cause a wait for CYCLE START just like MO If optional stops are off M1 codes will be ignored The current state is indicated in the user window above F8 Graph Graphs the part For more information see the lt F8 gt Graph as described later in this chapter If this feature is invoked from the Run and Search screen or the Resume Job screen then the graphics will show exactly where the searched line or block begins Dotted lines indic
234. nt point T1 value for X into the end point X coordinate The active fields on both sides of the screen advance automatically Transfer the tangent point T1 value for Y into the end point Y coordinate Hide Math Help Move down to the radius field and enter the radius of the arc labeled ARC 4 in Figure 3 This radius is 3 1500 inches Be sure to set the direction to CCW Arc type EP amp R Mid X Y Z End X 3 7746 Y 0 5829 Z 0 0500 Center X Y Z Angle Radius 3 1500 Plane XY Direction CCW Feedrate 10 0000 Angle lt 180 Yes Accept Keep selected values Arc G2 amp G3 M Series Operator s Manual Mill the arc labeled as ARC 5 in Figure 3 back to point P1 3 2 04 10 72 N0160 Arc mill Operation type EP amp R Mid xX Y Z End X 4 6250 Y 0 0000 Z 0 0500 Center X Y Z Angle 5 Radius 0 6250 Plane gt XY Direction CW Feedrate 10 0000 Angle lt 180 Yes F10 Accept Keep selected values F3 Arc G2 amp G3 Move tool away from the edge of the part after the last arc N0170 Arc mill Arc type EP amp R Mid x Y Z End X 5 0000 Y 0 5000 Z 0 1000 Center X Y Z Angle Radius 0 5000 Plane XY Direction CCW Feedrate 10 0000 Angle lt 180 Yes F10 Accept Keep selected values F9 Subpgm Access the Subprogram screen M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 73 F1 DpthRpt N0180 Repeat to Depth We programmed the outer contour
235. ntered in MDI MDI is not canceled but cutter compensation does NOT go into 16 8 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message effect Remainder of line processed Arc as first comp move on line NNNNN Cutter compensation started with arc as first move Job canceled Start of new job Arc as first uncomp move on line NNNNN Arc specified as first move after end of compensation G40 Job canceled Start of new job Plane must be XY on line NNNNN Cutter compensation started with YZ or ZX plane selected Job canceled Start of new job Canned cycle not allowed on line NNNNN Canned cycle attempted during compensation Job canceled Start of new job G53 not allowed on line NNNNN G53 attempted during compensation Job canceled Start of new job Set home not allowed on line NNNNN M26 attempted during compensation Job canceled Start of new job Ref point move not allowed on line NNNNN G28 G29 or G30 attempted during compensation Job canceled Start of new job File read error on look ahead M Series Operator s Manual Cause Effect Removed
236. o drill the hole at the specified Plunge Rate Depth Total Depth of hole incremental as measured from Surface Height Depth Increment Depth of each individual step of the drilling Rapid Clearance Distance from the last incremental depth drilled that the tool rapid moves before starting the next plunge Plunge Rate Z axis speed of descent during drilling The plunge rate can be toggled to modal fixed or slave this is indicated by the symbol beside the plunge rate field If the plunge rate is modal then it will have the M symbol or if it is fixed it will have the F symbol The slave plunge rate has no symbol and is set to the last modal plunge rate set in the program when the modal plunge rate changes all the following slave plunge rates change until the next modal plunge rate is encountered M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 18 Intercon Mill v8 11 Current Part E_2_PART ICN Operation End N0070 Bore Type X Y Z 0010 Demo Program Position X 4 0000 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 Y 8 0000 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 Surface Height 0 1000 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Clearance Height 0 1000 INC 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Rapid to Depth 0 1000 INC 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home Hole Depth 0 5000 INC Plunge Rate 20 0000 0080 End Prog 0 0000 0 0000 Home Dwell Time Math Teach Help raph Mode ficcspt E6 F8 Fg F10 The numbers in the fields
237. o load prompt or by pressing lt F10 gt or lt ENTER gt on a bracketed directory name The lt F1 gt Floppy key will change to the A drive and the lt F2 gt Hard Drive option with change the directory to C INTERCON Choosing lt F8 gt Graph will graph the highlighted Intercon file The lt F9 gt Details On Off changes the format of the display such that each file or directory is on a separate line and there are columns displayed for Programmer Description and Date Modified i e the information that is contained in the program header operation When loading a new file a prompt will be displayed asking whether to save the existing file if there was one F3 Save Press lt F3 gt to save the current part program The current program will be saved under the specified name F4 Save As Press lt F4 gt to save the current program with a different name Type the new name into the Save part as prompt that appears above the function keys If the new name already exists a prompt will be displayed as a warning and will give the option to overwrite the existing file or return to enter a different name F5 Delete Press lt F5 gt to delete a file After lt F5 gt is pressed the screen will appear as in the lt F2 gt Load option where the same keys can be used to navigate the files A yes no prompt will appear after accepting a file for deletion for final confirmation F2 Modify Choosing lt F2 gt from the
238. of power on 2 or 3 axis rapid moves A zero in this parameter will disable this feature Parameter 39 Feedrate Override Percentage Limit This parameter is used for limiting the upper end of the Feedrate Override Knob percentage to a value from 100 to 200 This parameter can be used to restrict the Feedrate Override Knob effect on machines with maximum rates over 200 in min The Feedrate Override Knob percentage is normally allowed to go to 200 However on machines with high cutting speeds if the knob is turned up to 200 it creates overshoots on corners If this parameter is set to something like 110 it will stop the Feedrate Override Knob from exceeding 110 and thus causes the overshoots to disappear Parameter 40 Basic Jog Increment This parameter holds the basic jog increment 0 0001 or 0 002 mm by default This value is used by the x1 x10 and x100 jog keys 0 0001 0 001 and 0 01 on older consoles It also specifies the distance per click for handwheels MPG Parameter 41 Handwheel 100x Speed User Jog Increment On newer consoles this parameter holds the actual handwheel speed in 100x mode For normal 100x operation it should be 100 On some systems 100x is way too fast and this value is set to a more reasonable value such as 20 or 30 On older consoles this parameter holds the user jog increment 0 250 or 1 0 mm by default The 0 250 jog key on older consoles uses this value Parameter 42 Password for Configuration
239. offset Example G43 H1 23 Selects offset corresponding to H1 moves to Z3 G1X0Y1 H3 Selects offset corresponding to H3 XIY1 25 GOH5 Selects offset corresponding to H5 NOTE See Tool Offset Library Edit Chapter 4 for editing instruction for the offset library For information on length compensation functions see G43 and G44 in Chapter 12 N Block Number Block numbers are used to identify CNC program lines Block numbers are optional but can be used as the destinations of GOTO statements see Advanced Macros in this chapter and targets of the Search Function See Main Screen Search option in Chapter 2 Block numbers also can make reading the NC files easier Example N1 G90 G17 M25 N2 GO XO YO ZO O Program Number The O program number allows you to identify your program with a certain number If the program number is 9100 9999 the G codes from the O number through the next M99 will be extracted and placed in a separate subprogram macro file The lines will not be executed until the resulting file is called with M98 or G65 Example 01521 N1 G90 G17 M25 N2 GO XO YO ZO P Parameter P can correspond to Dwell Time subprogram number or a general parameter in canned cycles This is used as a variable for any of those values in the NC file Examples G4 P1 32 Pause execution for 1 32 seconds G10 P73 R 1 Set parameter 73 G73 retract to 1 inches 3 2 04
240. ol T Tool coolant tools 1 200 Tool spindle direction active tool T Tool spindle direction tools 1 200 Tool spindle speed active tool T Tool spindle speed tools 1 200 Tool bin number active tool T Tool bin number tools 1 200 Tool putback active tool T Tool putback tools 1 200 1 set user variable 100 to 7 32 move the X axis 2 set WCS 1 X value to 8 add 1 8 units See Chapter 15 R Returns R W Floating point value R W Floating point value R W Floating point value R W Floating point value R W 0 200 R W 0 200 R W 0 200 R W 0 200 R W 7 8 9 R W 7 8 9 R W 3 4 5 R W 3 4 5 R W Floating point value R W Floating point value R W Floating point value R W Floating point value R W Floating point value R W Floating point value R W 7 32 units 1 2188 the c to the WCS 3 Z value 125 variable access variable 0 to 10 of F Z C FHF move to 10 Assign local 10 7 Reassign C the X axis current position incrementally urrent X position the coordinates passed as parameters Same statement as previous using number r ferences Value passed as parameter is lost M Series Operator s Manual Advanced Macro Statements Optional Warning Branching and conditional execution are extremely powerful tools that combined with access to system varia
241. ol beside the feedrate field If the feedrate is modal then it will have the M symbol or if it is fixed it will have the F symbol shown below The slave feedrate has no symbol and is set to the last modal feedrate set in the program when the modal feedrate changes all the following slave feedrates change until the next modal feedrate is encountered Angle lt 180 For end point and radius EP amp R arcs this field determines whether the arc is to be less than YES or greater than NO 180 degrees F4 Tool Functions When you select the tool functions by pressing lt F4 gt the following screen appears Intercon Mill v8 11 Current Part E_2_PART ICN Operation End NO060 Tool Change Type X Y Z 0010 Demo Program Tool Number 1 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 Description 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 325 end nill 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Position Xx 0 0000 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Y 0 0000 D060 Tool 0 Tool H Offset 1 0070 End Prog 10 0000 3 0000 Home Tool D Offset 1 Tool Diameter 0 3250 Spindle Speed F 3000 Spindle Dir CW M3 Coolant Type Flood M8 Actual Change ES Toggle hele Graph Teach ccent F3 F6 E8 F9 F10 The following parameters for this tool change is as follows M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 10 Tool Number Number of the tool between 1 and 200 to use Entering this value pulls the current settings for this tool
242. ollect Data This option allows qualified technicians to collect data on the movement of one of the motors It uses the values located in the axis and density fields at the bottom of the screen and the PID collection program to collect the data When this option is selected the controller executes the PID collection program and collects data on the selected axis The data is saved using the file name entered at the file prompt at the lower right hand side of the screen The information in the lower left hand side of the edit window provides information to qualified technicians about the selected axis F5 Autotune This option is used by qualified technicians to automatically determine values for Max Rate Accel decel time and Deadstart See section Motor Configuration Jog Parameters as well as the PID parameters for each installed axis The Autotune procedure will make a series of moves on each axis traveling up to 2 see parameters 95 98 from the initial position in all directions to determine the friction and gravity of each axis The initial high speed move will use half of this distance This will allow Autotune to work on axes with less than 4 of travel on rotary axes that need more than 1 degree to get up to speed and on very fast slow accelerating machines that need more than 1 inch to get up to speed In order to use less than 4 or more than 4 degrees you must change the corresponding parameter NOTE Do not run Autotune unless
243. ols the display of the axis load meters and 4 5 digit DRO precision Function Description Parameter Value jo Enable Load Meters Enable 1 Disable 0 Load Meter Outline Enable 2 Disable 0 DRO 4 5 Digit Precision 4 digits 4 5 digits 0 Enable 1 Disable 0 Use a value of 3 to display load meters with outlines The axis load meters will be colored green for values that are up to 70 of maximum power output yellow for values between 70 and 90 and red for values between 90 and 100 The axis load meters appear below the DRO for each axis see Chapter 1 Parameter 144 Comparison Rounding This parameter determines the built in rounding for the comparison operators EQ NE LT GT etc in expressions Rounding of comparison arguments is necessary due to extremely small errors that are part of every floating point calculation The result of such errors is that two floating point values are rarely exactly equal The value of parameter 144 represents the precision of comparison in places after the decimal point If the parameter is set to 9 0 for example then comparison operators will declare two numbers that differ in value by less than 0 0000000005 as being equal The value 0 0 is a special value that turns comparison rounding off When comparison rounding is off it is up to the G code programmer to build the precision into conditional statements for example IF ABS A B LT 0 00005 THEN GOT
244. om C CNC7 NCFILES directory Mastercam Loads files from C NC directory ICN Loads files from C CNC7 NCFILES directory Contact your dealer if you wish to change these directories or if you want to add third party software F6 Edit The edit function from the Main Screen loads a text editor so that you may edit CNC files Press lt F6 gt to load the current job file When you exit the text editor you will return to the CNC7 Main Screen Attempting to edit files that contain non printable characters may cause unexpected results DO NOT edit the CNC7 files CNC7 CFG CNC7 PRM CNC7 JOB CNC7 TL CNC7 OL and CNC7 WCS These files will be destroyed and all information lost if they are edited F7 Utility Press lt F7 gt to bring up the Utility Screen This screen gives you several options from diagnostics to file functions See Chapter 6 for a detailed description of the utility operations F8 Graph This option plots the tool path of the current program loaded Canned drilling cycles are shown in gray Rapid traverse movements are shown in red Feedrate movements are shown in yellow ien TOP T 00 02 29 Graphing Done Job Name FLANGE CNC tsb fe oS asl o o ost 15E Ne 3 7 E EI AR E E OD E E L L E AL LES EE O F E L E O N EA A A E E S E E E E x 20 15 10 05 a0 a5 15 15 z0 2D73D View Range Time Redraw Pan n In m Out 2m All Fl F2 F3 F4 FS Fe Fe Fe F9
245. om the symbol libraries A Press lt CTRL C gt Choose symbol Use the arrow keys or mouse to select Recycling symbols Look for the keyboard assignment of the symbol you wish to select in this case V or select it by double clicking on the symbol with the mouse B Use the right arrow key or mouse to move the box over to the font attribute section right side of the screen Select the Y and enter a value of 1 000 This moves the Y center of this line text to Y 1 000 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 9 1 Step 3 _ View the tool path Press lt CTRL V gt This will display the text in graphics mode Press lt ESC gt and choose lt Q gt uit graphics If you used the mouse go to B otherwise press lt ESC gt then lt ENTER gt and type without quotes V Press lt ENTER gt Step 4 Scale the symbol Drag the mouse to the right then to the bottom of the screen Select Scale Place the cross hairs on the symbol and left click and hold Dragging the mouse to the right increases the size and to the left decreases it Increase the size to approx 1 x 1 and release the mouse Step 5 Wrap the text Drag the mouse to the right and then to the bottom of the screen Select Radius Place the crosshairs on the text Reduce Re use Recycle and left click and hold Dragging the mouse to the left decreases the radius to the right increases it Select a radius of approx 1 1 The radius is seen in the bottom center of the screen l
246. ome position If Parameter 17 has been set to the number of a valid return point 1 or 2 the lt F3 gt option will move the X and Y axes to that return point before moving Z down Return point 1 is the G28 position from the Work Coordinate System Configuration screen see Chapter 6 Return point 2 is the G30 position on that screen If Parameter 17 is zero 0 the X and Y axes will not move before Z moves down In this case you must be careful to jog the machine directly over the detector before pressing lt F3 gt Note lt SHIFT F3 gt can be used to override any return point movement in cases where parameter 17 is set to use it This is helpful for measuring tools wherein the height measurement is not taken from the center point of the tool Batch Tool Height Offset Measurement Process If you have both purchased the Tool Length Probing option and also have an automatic tool changer installed then you can press lt F4 gt to measure multiple tools in one process After pressing lt F4 gt you will be prompted with the following dialogue box Enter the list of tools to measure Example 1 4 6 15 gt After entering a list of tool numbers you can press CYCLE START to perform the batch tool measurement process This process is similar to the single tool height offset measurement accessed via lt F3 gt but will do multiple tools in one shot Setting up Tool Height Offsets WARNING Before manually jogging any
247. ommands G02 amp G03 G17 is the default plane See figure under G2 and G3 G17 is the XY plane G18 is the ZX plane G19 is the YZ plane G20 Select Inch Units G20 selects inch units affecting the interpretation of all subsequent dimensions and feedrates in the job file G20 does not change the native machine units as set on the control setup menu G21 Select Metric Units G21 selects metric units affecting the interpretation of all subsequent dimensions and feedrates in the job file G21 does not change the native machine units as set on the control setup menu G28 Return to Reference Point G28 moves to the first reference point by way of an intermediate point The location of the reference point in machine coordinates may be set in Work Coordinate System Configuration The intermediate point is specified in the local coordinate system and may be at the current location resulting in a move directly to the reference point If an intermediate point is specified only those axes for which positions are specified will be moved If no axes are specified all axes will be moved The location of the intermediate point is stored for later use with G29 Examples G28 G91 ZO move Z axis directly to reference point X and Y don t move G28 G91 X 5 YO ZO move X 5 then move all three axes to reference point G28 G90 X2 Y4 Z 1 move all axes to 2 4 0 1 then to reference point G28 move
248. on that will represent XO and YO Enter the CNC7 Setup screen We are going to establish the part XYZ zero at the current tool location Access the Part Setup options Set your X zero position at current tool location Select the Y axis next Set your Y zero position at current tool location Select the Z axis next Set your Z zero position at current tool location Moves the quill to the Z home position if the home position has been set Moves tool to Z limit switch and sets home position if not Leave Part Setup screen Access Tool Library Editor This is the place where we want to measure the actual heights of our tools since we could not set the actual values in Intercon You need to make sure that the tool diameter and height offset values are the correct ones for the tools you are going to be using Inspect the values for D001 H001 D002 and H002 D001 should be 0 1875 H1 should be 0 0000 the two inch tool D002 should be 0 2500 and H002 should be 1 0000 the one inch tool If any of these values are incorrect use the arrow keys to select the incorrect values Enter the new values in their places and press lt ENTER gt to accept them 3 2 04 10 77 NOTE The tool heights used above are merely example heights In order to accurately measure the heights of your tools see the description of measuring tool heights on page 6 24 of this tutorial F10 F2 F10 ESC CANCEL ESC CANCEL CYCLE START Save
249. on the screen correspond to the following example shown here graphically Boring Feed move gt Rapid move Clearance Height Rapid To Depth Surface Height Hole Depth Where Position Specifies the X and Y coordinates where the boring will take place If either the X or Y coordinate is an incremental value you will have the option to bore multiple holes in a linear pattern See Canned Cycle Introduction 2 Surface Height Absolute Z axis position from where each incremental depth is measured Clearance Height This parameter specifies the Z axis height used when performing rapid moves to the position of each hole being drilled Rapid To Depth The depth below the Clearance Height but above the Surface Height to which the cutter rapid moves before beginning to drill the hole at the specified Plunge Rate M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 19 Hole Depth Depth of hole incremental as measured from Surface Height Plunge Rate Z axis speed of descent during drilling The plunge rate can be toggled to modal fixed or slave this is indicated by the symbol beside the plunge rate field If the plunge rate is modal then it will have the M symbol or if it is fixed it will have the F symbol The slave plunge rate has no symbol and is set to the last modal plunge rate set in the program when the modal plunge rate changes all the following slave plunge rates change until the next modal plun
250. ons 0 9 must use single digits in the filename e g Use M3 not M03 The contents of the file may be any valid M and G codes Each time the M function is encountered in a program the macro file will be processed line by line NOTE Nesting of macro M functions is allowed Recursive calls are not if a macro M function calls itself the default action of the function will be executed Example Turn on spindle with variable frequency drive and wait for at speed response Create file C CNC7 CNC7 M3 with contents as follows M94 1 request spindle start M101 5 wait for up to speed signal M2 M6 and M25 always move the Z axis to the home position before any other motion All other M functions are performed after the motion of the current line is complete The M and G codes in a macro M function are not usually displayed on the screen as they are executed and are all treated as one operation in block mode If you wish to see or step through macro M functions e g for testing purposes set parameter 10 as follows 0 Don t display or step through macro M functions 1 Display macro M functions but don t step through them 2 Display and step through macro M functions NOTE You cannot use block mode to step through a macro M function called using the G81 transformation see Chapter 13 the action timer will expire before you can press CYCLE START NOTE Only one M function per line is permitted M00 Stop For Operator Motio
251. operator must press CYCLE START or Alt S to dismiss the dialog Pressing Esc will cancel the job CNC7 parses well ahead of the current execution to maximize throughput and efficiency For this reason an INPUT macro may prompt the operator for input immediately even though the INPUT macro is located in the middle or near the end of the job Parsing pauses while the dialog is displayed Any statements parsed prior to the INPUT macro will have been queued and will continue to execute in the background while the prompt is displayed Job processing will pause only if all queued statements have been executed before the operator supplies a response INPUT macros will not graph If you must graph the job first set the input variable to a default value and use a conditional to execute the INPUT only if the job is being run normally Use search mode cautiously with INPUT macros To have search work properly you may have to supply exactly the same input during the search as you did during the last actual run Examples Ask operator for pocket depth Store result in 101 Note this will not graph INPUT Enter pocket depth 101 Allow job with INPUT statements to be graphed 101 0 5 Supply a default value for graphing Ask for operator input only if not graphing IF NOT 4201 THEN INPUT Enter pocket depth 101 3 2 04 M Series Operator s Manual 11 8 CHAPTER 12 CNC Prog
252. osition screen F6 Out Cnr Outside Corner Press lt F6 gt to enter the Outside Corner screen A picture similar to the following will appear with instructions and two input fields Follow these steps 1 Press lt F1 gt to select the orientation of the probe with respect to the Corner You will see one of the pictures shown 2 Press lt F2 gt to select which side of the corner the probe will be positioned near You will see the screen change 3 Slowly jog the probe to the approximate position as shown in the picture Be sure to give enough probe clearance 4 Select the Z clearance field using the arrow keys Enter the approximate distance the probe has to travel in order to lift up over the corner 5 Select the Distance to Corner amount using the up or down arrow keys Enter the approximate distance from the corner the probe is along the X or Y axis 6 Press lt F10 gt to start the probing cycle Once the probe has completed its search it will be positioned above the corner at the Z clearance you specified Press lt ESC gt to return to the Set Part 0 Position screen M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 8 5 F7 1 Axis Single Axis Press lt F7 gt to enter the Single Axis screen Follow these steps 1 Press lt F1 gt to select the orientation of the probe You will see one of the screens shown below 2 Slowly jog the probe to the approximate position as shown in the picture 3 Be sure to give enough probe
253. ous jogging Pressing the key will toggle between these two modes The LED is lit when INC is selected When set to INC jog and a jog button is pressed the axis will move the current jog increment distance and stop The jog button must be released and then pressed again before any further axis movement can occur The LED is not lit when set to CONT If CONT jog is selected and an axis jog button is pressed the axis will move continuously until the button is released NOTE The jog buttons will not operate if the M Series CNC software is not running or a job a CNC program is running x1 x10 x100 Press any one of these keys to set the jog increment amount The amount you select is the distance the control will move an axis if you make an incremental jog x1 0 0001 x10 0 0010 and x100 0 0100 You may select only one jog increment at a time and the current jog increment is indicated by the key that has a lit LED The jog increment you select is for all axes you cannot set separate jog increments for each axis The jog increment also selects the distance the control will move an axis for each click of the MPG handwheel MPG The MPG is housed in a separate hand held unit Press the MPG key to set the control jog to respond to the MPG handwheel if equipped When selected the LED will be on Select the Jog Increment and desired axis and slowly turn the wheel When the LED is not lit the MPG is disabled and the jog panel is on GN
254. ove but press lt F2 gt instead to set the end angle Regardless of the method used to define the start and end angles pressing lt F10 gt saves the angles and exits back to the radial digitize menu Pressing lt ESC gt will return to the radial digitize menu without making changes to the start and end angles M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 7 9 Contour Digitize F3 from CNC7 Digitize Screen WCS 1 G54 0 0000 0 0000 Z 0 0000 Current Position inches Job Name 2TEST CNC Tool H Feedrate 108 Spindle 0 Feed Hold Of f Count 112 B 0 00 Stopped Contour Digitizing 1 Jog probe tip to center of part 2 Press F1 to define center of part 3 Jog probe to start pt 4 Press CYCLE START to Begin Center xX Not Y Set Copy Type X Patch Length Y Patch Width Axis Step Digitize File Name Replay Feedrate Plunge Rate 2 Surface Height 2 Clearance 2 Depth Z Depth Increment Probe Diameter Press SPACE to change Contour Digitize Run Setup To set up a digitizing run jog the probe tip to the center of the part and hit lt F1 gt to assign that as your center point Select CAM for a true CAM shape contour or Wall for irregular shapes for wall following Enter the rest of the parameters for the part and digitizing job as shown Jog the probe to a starting point and press CYCLE START The control will move the probe toward the center line in the X direction until it com
255. owing sections DRO Display Window Ws 1 G54 Current Position Inches Job Name CROD CHC 7070777 Tool T H1 Program 10000 Status IX 0 6541 iFeedrate 24 ipn Part Cnt 0 Window IY 0 6541 rspindle 0 A Part t 0 FLOOD MTime 0 00 14 2 e a a I li Waiting for dwell tine IM 3 essage WW 0 0 0 0 0 Lene ans Window IB 0 0000 i DisttoGo ay TAAA AT ae OR TE y IX 0 0000 18 G4 P3 00 pause for dwell l iW 0 0000 a I ae Ona 21 N0030 X0 6541 Y0 6541 20 5 H1 U i 22 G81X0 6541Y0 6541 Z 0 51R0 1F2 0 1 User i 23 X 0 4199 Y0 8242 Window l 24 X 0 9136 Y 0 1447 i i 25 X 0 1447 Y 0 9136 r 26 X0 8242 Y 0 4199 i 27 G80 i S E E E re l Ase Abt Repeat zones ce Par i Options 17 i Fi tiz 3 re E7 F9 Window DRO display The DRO display contains the digital read out of the current position of the tool The display is configurable for number of axes and desired display units of measure see Chapter 15 The bars under each axis are the load meters and represent the amount of power being supplied to the drive for that axis The display of axis load meters is configured by machine parameter 143 see Chapter 15 for specific information See also Hot Keys later in this chapter Distance to Go DRO The distance to go DRO is located below the main DRO This display shows the distance to go to complete the current movement The display of distance to go is controlled by parameter 143
256. point such as X 1 Y 1 would properly modify the lead in path keeping the cutter from damaging the corner of the workpiece Example 3 shows the correct way of performing this operation Example 3 CORRECT WAY soonnnnnnnnnnnes gt Compensated tool center path gt Programmed path R 1 2 of the tool diameter 1 2 of D offset Pg M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 9 G42D5 GOXO0Y 1 G1X 75Y 1 X3 6 G40 3 Lookahead When the control machines any rapid traverse GO line G1 or arc G2 G3 with tool diameter compensation enabled the program will look up to 10 consecutive events ahead of the current event in order to anticipate toolpath clearance problems Lookahead ensures that compensated tool paths don t overlap in programmed part sections where there is not enough clearance for the tool The figure below shows a compensated tool path and the actual toolpath after Lookahead corrects the clearance problem COMPENSATED TOOLPATH CUTTER COMPENSATED TOOLPATH CUTTER WITHOUT LOOKAHEAD WITH LOOKAHEAD The number of Lookahead events the control scans is preset to 10 You can change the number of consecutive events from 1 to 10 by changing parameter 99 refer to Chapter 16 for more information G43 G44 G49 Tool Length Compensation G43 and G44 apply tool length compensation to a selected tool to allow the control to utilize multiple tools in a single CNC program G43 applies positive compensation from Z zero up Wo
257. ptional stops on or off graph the partially completed job or start the partially completed job The resume job option is not always available The following situations will cause the resume job option to be unavailable Loading a new job Running a job to completion Parse errors in the job Editing or reposting the job file Loss of power while a job is running Search and Run Screen F2 from the Run Screen The search and run screen can also be used to restart a job Search and run allows the user to specify at which line block or tool number the job should be resumed You cannot search into a subroutine M Series CNC G Code Editor Description This is a detailed description of the lt F6 gt Edit option invoked from the Main screen Usage If the editor is invoked from the DOS command line a file may be loaded into the editor by either specifying a name on the command line or by entering the editor and selecting the Load File F9 option Examples C CNC7 NCFILES gt cnc7edt Invoking editor from command line C CNC7 NCFILES gt cnc7edt cnc40 ne Invoking editor and loading a file from the command line To edit a G code program press F6 Edit from the main screen The G code of the current job will be loaded Editor Screen The editing screen will have a status line across the top of the screen while the bottom line of the screen will show some of the available editor functions The status line displays the curren
258. r it should be labeled M For a manual Z axis the 3 axis label should be set to This setting allows for two axes posting in Intercon WARNING Intercon does NOT post two axis programs if the 3 axis is labeled M NOTE Tool length compensation G43 G44 and canned drilling cycles G73 G89 always affect the third axis regardless of its axis label Tool diameter compensation G41 G42 always affects the first and second axes regardless of their axis labels Motor revs unit The number of revolutions of the motor that results in one unit of measurement of movement That is if the machine units of measurement are inches then Motor revs inch is the number of revolutions of the motor that results in one inch of movement Handwheel note For handwheels this number is the number of clicks per revolution of the handwheel If your handwheel has no detents click positions use 100 Encoder counts rev The counts per revolution of the encoders on your servomotors Lash compensation The amount of backlash in the axis This occurs when the table loses distance due to loose parts during direction reversals Consult your machine manual or M Series Service Manual for instructions on measuring backlash Limits The PLC input numbers corresponding to any limit switches that you may have on your machine Your installer should provide this information If no limit switch is installed this field should be set to 0 Homes The PLC input n
259. r specified subprogram A subprogram is a separate program that can be used to perform certain operation e g a drilling pattern contour etc many times throughout a main program Calling methods M98 Pxxxx Lrrrr or M98 program cnce Lrrrr Where xxxx is the subprogram number in file Oxxxx CNC 0000 9999 allowed leading 0 s required in filename rrrr is the repeat value and program cnc is the name of the subprogram file Subprograms are written just like normal programs with one exception an M99 should be at the end of the subprogram M99 transfers control back to the calling program M Series Operator s Manual3 2 04 13 5 Subprograms can call other subprograms up to 20 nested levels of calling may be used Macro M functions and Macros Macro M functions and Macros can similarly call subprograms Subprograms 9100 9999 can also be embedded into a main program using O9xxx to designate the beginning of the subprogram and M99 to end it CNC7 will read the subprogram and generate a file O9xxx cnc CNC7 will not execute the subprogram until encounters M98 P9xxx NOTE An embedded subprogram definition must be placed before any calls to the subprogram 0 0 Suppose that a drilling pattern of 4 holes is needed in 3 different locations This subprogram would handle the drilling and incremental moves between the holes 00001 Program 00001 cnc G91 F10 Incremental positioning G81 X0
260. r the screen blanker function When a value other than zero is set the screen will blank after the specified number of minutes The blanking function only works if no jobs are running The value you enter is measured in minutes Therefore a value of 5 would blank the screen in 5 minutes if no actions were taken When the screen is blank pressing any key will restore the screen If you do not wish to use this feature enter a value of zero to disable it However if the display is kept on for long periods of time without the blanker enabled the image of a screen may become burned into the monitor That is you will be able to see this image of the screen on the monitor whether the monitor is on off or in some other screen Remote Drive amp Directory This field sets up the remapped default drive and directory for the lt F3 gt key in the Load Job screen This allows you to conveniently load files from an attached computer via LAN network via RJ 45 Ethernet connection The Control will usually remap the attached computer s C hard drive as drive E depending on the way it was set up M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 3 User Specified Paths Operators can now specify paths for INTERCON files posted INTERCON files Digitize files and CAD files These paths are specified in PATHM INI This file is automatically generated by CNC7 if it does not exist The default PATHM INI file is INTERCON_PATH C INTERCON ICN_POST_PATH C CNC7 NCFIL
261. ram Codes G codes IG code Group Description o S O o1 JA Linear Interpolation iGo2 JA Circular or Helical Interpolation CW o3 JA Circular or Helical Interpolation CCW ____ G04 B Dwel o O o9 BE ExactStop o O G10 B___ Parameter Setting Z O Z O G18 C Circular Interpolation Plane Selection ZX __ G19 C Circular Interpolation Plane Selection YZ 21 L Select Metric Units 28 B___ Return to Reference Point 29 B___ Return from Reference Point G30 B___ Return to Secondary Reference Point G40 D___ Cutter Compensation Cancel ___ G41 D___ Cutter Compensation Left G42 D___ Cutter Compensation Right 43 E Tool Length Compensation G44 E Tool Length Compensation G49 E_ ToolLength Compensation Cancel __ Scaling Mirroring Off Optional G51 ss Scaling Mirroring On Optional a52 B___ Offset Local Coordinate System Origin Optional a53 B__ Rapid Position in Machine Coordinates Optional G54 L Select Work Coordinate System 1 Optional G55 s L__ Select Work Coordinate System 2 Optional G56 L Select Work Coordinate System 3 Optional G57 L___ Select Work Coordinate System 4 Optional iG58 L Select Work Coordinate System 5 Optional a59 L Select Work Coordinate System 6 Optional G61 Fs ExactStopMode o i G64 F Cutting Mode S O a65 J Call Macro Optional O Z o
262. raphically WA Drilling Feed move gt Rapid move gt Clearance Height r Ecauienvan Rapid To Depth Surface Height Depth Total Where Cycle Type Selects one of three drilling operations Drilling Chip Breaking or Deep Hole drilling Press lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt to toggle between the three choices Position Specifies the X and Y coordinates where the drilling will take place If either the X or Y coordinate is an incremental value you will have the option to drill multiple holes in a linear pattern See Canned Cycle Introduction 2 Surface Height Absolute Z axis position from where each incremental depth is measured Clearance Height This parameter specifies the Z axis height used when performing rapid moves to the position of each hole being drilled Rapid To Depth The depth below the Clearance Height but above the Surface Height to which the cutter rapid moves before beginning to drill the hole at the specified Plunge Rate Depth Total Depth of hole incremental as measured from Surface Height Plunge Rate Z axis speed of descent during drilling The plunge rate can be toggled to modal fixed or slave this is indicated by the symbol beside the plunge rate field If the plunge rate is modal then it will have the M symbol or if it is fixed it will have the F symbol The slave plunge rate has no symbol and is set to the last modal plunge rate set i
263. rau Pan In Dut all Fi F2 E3 F4 E3 E6 E FB Fo FIG 2 Graphics screen showing bolt holes and circular pocket ESC CANCEL Cancel Return to the editing screen F10 Accept Keep selected values F5 Cycles Access the list of available Canned Cycles E7 Frame Now add an outside frame to cut the flange out of the material The flange is 3 0000 inches long by 3 0000 inches wide and has rounded corners with 0 2500 inch radii N0050 Frame mill Frame Outside Center X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Surface Height 0 0000 Length X 3 0000 INC Width Y 3 0000 INC Corner Radius 0 2500 Depth Total 0 5000 INC per Pass 0 2500 Plunge Rate 2 0000 Plunge Type Ramped Plunge Angle gt 0 00 Cut Type Conventional Feedrate 10 0000 F8 Graph Display a preview of the part up to this point This preview can be used to detect problems that may occur if the part was cut now M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 53 View TOP Graphing Done Job Name FLANGE ICN Y E 15 r Loe ash osL 10b 15L Ta aA aa a ee Eg a e e SR a E ok aa a 654 20 15 10 05 00 05 To 15 20 Xx 2D Set Time Zoom Zoom Zoom 3D Jien rane estin Pedra Fai In Out all F1 F2 F3 F4 E5 F6 F FB F9 FIG 3 Graphics screen showing part with bolt holes and outer frame ESC CANCEL Cancel Return to the editing screen F10 Accept Keep selected values F9 Subpgm Access the Insert Subprogram scre
264. requested to do so by a qualified technician F6 Drag This option is used by qualified technicians to determine whether your machine is binding anywhere along the axis travel Press lt F6 gt to begin the drag test Press lt F1 gt to select the axis you wish to check Hit the CYCLE START button A text file DRAG_X OUT DRAG_Y OUT DRAG_Z OUT or DRAG_W OUT file is generated and stored in the C CNC7 directory If significant drag occurs a message will be displayed on screen Contact your dealer to correct the problem as soon as possible F7 Laser This option is used by qualified technicians to take automated laser measurements and create or adjust the ballscrew compensation tables using accordingly Do not attempt to run automatic laser compensation without first contacting your dealer for details F9 Plot This option is used by qualified technicians to plot data M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 27 Handwheel Configuration If you are using a manual input as a handwheel MPG input be sure to configure all handwheel MPG parameters This list serves as a guide to configuration of the handwheels Motor Parameters do not apply to MPG s that use the special MPG input You may configure any unused encoder input as a handwheel input Screen Parameter Value Comments Jog Travel Travel Actual travel limits of the Axis controlled by a handwheel Parameters for an axis controll
265. ries Operator s Manual 3 2 04 1 4 Keyboard Operation A computer style keyboard is supplied with most systems This keyboard can be used as a jog panel See Chapter 14 Operator Panels for more information The keyboard jog panel has many hot keys Hot keys are keys that can be used at almost any time with few exceptions Some menus may prohibit their use CNC7 has many other hot keys in addition to the jog panel hot keys The hot keys are listed below Hot Keys Hot Key Action lt ALT A gt Spindle auto manual lt ALT B gt Screen blanker on lt ALT C gt Flood coolant on off lt ALT D gt Switch between current position and machine position lt CTRL D gt Switch DRO between position and distance to go lt ALT E gt Mist coolant on off lt ALT F gt Displays available system memory lt ALT H gt Feed hold on off lt ALT I gt PLC diagnostics lt ALT J gt Enables keyboard jogging lt ALT K gt Displays current ATC tool bin location lt ALT M gt MDI lt ALT O gt Tool check lt ALT P gt Live PID display lt CTRL_P gt Clear max and min error display lt ALT Q gt Spindle on off counter clockwise lt ALT R gt Spindle on off clockwise lt ALT S gt Cycle start lt ALT T gt Displays current motor temperature estimates lt ALT V gt Displays current software version lt ALT W gt MPG on off lt ALT gt lt ALT gt Selects
266. ries Operator s Manual 3 2 04 16 12
267. rk from part surface up G44 applies negative compensation from Z zero down used only when there is an absolute machine home The spindle face is considered a zero length tool and all offsets are from there down G49 cancels tool length compensation also canceled by issuing G43 H00 Example G43 HO1 tells the machine to offset the amount that corresponds to H01 in the Offset Library G50 G51 Scaling Mirroring Optional G50 and G51 scales program G codes relative to a scaling center point defined as position X Y Z A G51 applies scaling mirror to all positions lines and arcs following this G code until a G50 is entered Specify scaling factors with a value I J K The X Y and Z parameters are the coordinates of the scaling center If the scaling center is not specified the default scaling center is the current cutter position as shown on the DRO To mirror enter a negative value for the scaling factor Example Scaling G51 X0 0 Y0 0 20 0 13 0 J2 K1 turn scaling on GOO X0 0 YO O 21 0 rapid to x0 y0 Z1 G01 X1 0 YO 0 21 0 line to X1 YO Z1 GOL X1 0 Y1 0 21 0 line to Xl Yl Zd G01 X0 0 Y1 0 21 0 line CO X0 Vig Z GOIL X0 0 YO 0 21 0 7 lane o X0 0 AL G01 X0 0 Y0 0 2Z0 0 line to X0 YO ZO M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 10 G50 cancel scale 3 0 2 4 2 0 3 0 X 0O 1 2 3 01 2 3 Original Box Scaled Box For this G51 the followin
268. rmat 6 1 F2 Update F3 Backup 6 2 F4 Restore 6 3 F5 File Ops F6 PLC Diag 6 4 F7 Report F8 Options F9 Log 6 4 CHAPTER 7 Digitize F9 from Main Menu Grid Digitize 7 2 Radial Digitize 7 6 Contour Digitize 7 10 CHAPTER 8 Probing Part Setup with Probing 8 1 Calibrating the Probe Tip Diameter 8 2 Probing Cycles 8 2 Probe Parameters 8 6 CHAPTER 9 Engraving Quick Start Engraving Software Tutorial 9 1 CHAPTER 10 Intercon Software Intercon Main Screen 10 1 Insert Operation 10 8 Graphics 10 42 Math Help 10 44 Intercon Tutorial 1 10 52 Intercon Tutorial 2 10 58 CHAPTER 11 CNC Program Codes Miscellaneous CNC Program Symbols 11 1 CHAPTER 12 G codes G Code Quick Reference 12 1 CHAPTER 13 M functions Macro M functions 13 1 CHAPTER 14 Operator Panels M 400 Operator Panel M 39 Jog Pendant14 1 Keyboard Jog Panel 14 6 CHAPTER 15 Configuration Password 15 1 Control Configuration 15 2 Machine Configuration 15 5 Machine Parameters 15 8 PID Configuration 15 26 Handwheel Configuration 15 28 CHAPTER 16 CNC7 Messages CHAPTER 1 Introduction Window Description The CNC7 display screen is separated into five areas called windows A sample screen is shown below for reference The five windows are the DRO display window the status window the message window the options window and the user window The information that each window displays is described in detail in the foll
269. rols optional interpretation of several G codes The following table shows the functions performed by the value entered in this parameter Bit Function Description Parameter Value PE centers I J K are absolute in G90 mode Yes 1 No 0 ete Z being specified alone to be sufficient to trigger 2 execution of a canned tapping or drilling cycle to be executed aoe ee and G89 as milliseconds rather than seconds No 0 Slaving rotary axis feedrate to non rotary axis feedrate No 0 4 Selects the center for scale mirror and rotate By default the center will be 0 0 0 Add 16 to this parameter to make No 0 the center of scale mirror and rotate the current position Parameter 3 Modal Tool and Height Offset Control This parameter controls whether or not the last tool and height offset activated during a job run will remain active after the job is complete This also controls the Tool status display in the Status Window Meaning Tool and Height Offset numbers will be modal and remain active between jobs Tool Status display will remain active even when job is not running Tool Status display will show the current T and H number Tool and Height Offset numbers will be reset to defaults upon job completion Tool Status display will only be updated during job run M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 11 Tool Status display will only show the current T number Parameter 4 Remote File Loading Flag This para
270. rs do not accidentally change vital parameters The original default password is distributed in the documentation provided to the owner of the machine when the control is installed This password is changeable via Parameter 42 If you know the password type it and press lt ENTER gt If the password you enter is incorrect a message will appear telling you the password was incorrect and the password prompt will reappear Pressing lt ESC gt will remove the prompt M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 1 If you don t know the password simply press lt ENTER gt You will be given access to the configuration options so that you can view the information However you will not be able to change any of the data Control Configuration Pressing lt F1 gt from the configuration screen will display the Control Configuration screen in the edit window The Control Configuration screen provides you with a method of changing controller dependent data Each of the fields is discussed in detail below If you wish to change a field use the up and down arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired field Type the new value and press lt ENTER3 gt or press lt SPACE gt to toggle When you are done editing press lt F10 gt to save any changes you have made If you wish to discard your changes and restore the previous values press lt ESC gt WCS 1 G594 Current Position Inches Job Name TEST CNC X x 3 16084 Foedrate 100 Y _ 2 5 2 3 8 9 8 Spi
271. rth arc to be cut is labeled as ARC 4 in Figure 3 The start point labeled P3 is the end point of the previous arc The end point of the arc will be generated with Math Help N0150 Arc mill THARROWS Move Cursor Move down to the End X field This selects End X as the destination of the Math Help solution F6 Math Help Re display the Math Help values calculated for the last arc Intercon Mill v8 00 Current Part C_ROD ICN N0150 Arc Arc Tangent Arcs Arc Type EP amp R Circle 1 x Y 0 0000 Radius 0 6250 End X C 0 7498 Circle 2 X 0 0000 Y 1 0003 0 0000 Z 0 0500 Radius 1 2500 Circle 3 X 2 6387 Y 3 5210 Radius 3 1500 Radius 0 0000 Plane Y Tangent 1 X 3 7746 Direction W Y 0 5829 Connect Radius 0 0000 Tangent 2 X 0 7496 Feedrate 10 0000 Y 1 0003 Angle lt 180 Yes Solution 1 of 8 Prey Next Ki l Prey Next Hide R Copy aie Soln Soln Solver Solver Math lt lt lt gt gt gt 0n 0ff Fi F2 F4 F5 E6 F F E9 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 FIG 8 New arc 4 entry screen shown with solution for arcs 3 and 4 of Figure 3 t UP DOWN ARROWS F8 F8 F6 ARROWS F10 F3 Move Cursor Move Cursor Copy gt gt gt Copy gt gt gt Hide Math Move Cursor Highlight the needed tangent point X Tangent point T1 is the one you want this time If necessary move the cursor to the arc operation and select the End X field Transfer the tange
272. s Accept Keep selected values Cycles Access the list of available Canned Cycles C Pocket Start with the 1 0000 inch diameter circular pocket Enter the M Series Operator s Manual following values 3 2 04 10 51 N0030 Circular pocket Center X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Surface Height 0 0000 Diameter 1 0000 Cleanout Yes Depth Total 0 5000 INC Per Pass 0 2500 Plunge Rate 2 0000 M Plunge Type Ramped Plunge Angle gt 0 00 Rough Cuts Conventional Stepover 0 2250 Feedrate 20 0000 M Finish Pass Climb Amount 0 0020 Feedrate 10 0000 M F10 Accept Keep selected values F5 Cycles Access the list of available Canned Cycles F1 Drill Select drilling cycles F2 Drill BHC Select the bolt hole circle type of drilling cycles N0040 Drill bolt holes Cycle Type Drilling Center X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Surface Height 0 0000 Clearance Height 0 2500 INC Rapid To Depth 0 1000 INC Depth Total 0 5000 INC Plunge Rate 2 0000 Dwell Time 0 0000 Number of holes 4 Radius 1 2500 Start angle 45 00 F8 Graph Display a preview of the part up to this point This preview can be used to detect problems that may occur if the part was cut now M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 52 View TOP Graphing Done Job Name FLANGE ICN Y 10 o5 o o 0 5 1 0b G54 Sa ee ee a S 2D Set Time Zoom Zoom Zoom 3D View Range Estin fea
273. s M display Sum Z axis 3 with M 4 display sum in M DRO position 3600 and suppress Z display Sum Z axis 3 with M 4 display sum in Z DRO position 6300 and show M only if M moves Sum Z axis 3 with M 4 display sum in Z DRO position show M if either Z moves Desired Display 7400 The DRO will display both labels when displaying a summed axis For example ZM or MZ depending on where the sum is displayed Parameter 76 Manual Input Unrestricted Distance This parameter is intended to be used with Z axis summing It defines the maximum distance from the summed axis start of travel in which manual movements can occur without causing a fault Use a negative value to specify a distance from the minus travel limit a positive value for a distance from the plus travel limit When used with manual drilling for example setting this parameter will allow the operator to keep a hand on the quill at all times and even begin pulling on the quill in anticipation of a programmed stop Setting this value to zero will cause a fault if there is any manual movement To completely disable manual movement restrictions set this parameter to a value exceeding the total travel of the summed axis Minimum 99999 9999 maximum 9999 9999 default 0 typical 1 0 inch or 20 0 mm M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 18 Parameter 77 Manual Input Movement Tolerance This parameter specifies the manual movement
274. s can be specified anytime before Cutter Comp is turned on G41 or G42 Once specified the offset amount is stored and will only be changed when another D code is entered The Tool Diameter Offset D can be placed on a line by itself or on a line with other G codes Example XOYOF10 G41 D2 Enables cutter comp left with diameter D2 G1XO0YO MAY 1 25 Cutter compensated moves X2Y1 4 G40 Cutter compensation off G42 Enables cutter comp right still using D2 E Select Work Coordinate System E1 through E6 select among the six work coordinate systems They are equivalent to G54 through G59 F Feedrate The F command is used to set the cutting feedrate The feedrate is expressed in units minute The programmed feedrate may be modified by the feedrate override knob 2 200 The default feedrate is 3 0 units minute Units may be inches or millimeters Example G90 Gl X1 0 F50 linear mill to X1 at 50 units minute 3 2 04 M Series Operator s Manual 11 1 H Tool Length Offset Number H is used to select the Tool Length Offset Number The H code offset amounts are stored in the file Offset Library Tool Length Offsets can be specified anytime before a G43 or G44 is issued Once specified the offset amount is stored and will only be changed when another H code is entered The Tool Length Offset H can be placed on a line by itself or on a line with other G codes H0O is always a 0 0 length
275. s of subprogram Removed nesting Effect Job canceled Removed Start of new job 1100 1199 913 Message Could not open file filename ext Cause Attempt to call a subprogram or macro but the subprogram file does not exist Effect Job canceled Removed Start of new job 914 Message Tool library invalid for Tnn Cause Enhanced ATC is enabled and the tool library does not have a valid bin number assigned Effect Job canceled Removed Start of new job Scaling Mirroring errors 1001 Message Invalid scaling parameter on line NNNNN Cause Invalid parameter specified I J K P Effect Job canceled Removed Start of new job 1002 Message Invalid scaling center on line NNNNN Cause Invalid parameter specified X Y Z Effect Job canceled Removed Start of new job 1003 Message G code not allowed when scaling on line NNNNN Cause G28 G29 G30 G92 is not allowed when scaling or mirroring is turned on Effect Job canceled Removed Start of new job 1004 Message Turn scaling off before rescaling M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 Tried to rescale while scaling is turned on Job canceled Start of new job Cannot scale arcs with different scale factors Scaling factors of the arc axes are different Job cancelled Start of new job Custom messages defined in CNC7XMSG TXT Please contact your dealer if you have any questions regarding a particular message 16 11 M Se
276. s you for dimensional information about the letters or symbols that you want to engrave Simply type in the letters you want to engrave and define where and how big you want them the engraving software will create a G code program to do just that When using the keyboard there are two important keys that are the key to operation The lt ESC gt key will display a menu of choices Use the highlighted letter to select that choice For example select Q for Quit F for File etc The Control Key lt Ctrl gt will display a choice of options that will be displayed at the bottom of the screen For example You can directly see a graphic representation of the information you have entered by pressing lt Ctrl gt and holding it down and pressing the letter V for View Press and hold down lt Ctrl gt and press the letter G to Generate a G Code program from the dimensional information you have typed in Quick Start Engraving Software Tutorial Follow the instructions on the Offline Millwrite Engraving Demo disk to start the program Follow the steps below after Millwrite has started Step 1 Enter some text Begin by typing a few keys or a short message For instance Reduce Re Use Recycl When you begin typing an editor box will appear in the middle of the screen and the letters you type will appear there Press lt Enter gt when you are finished entering text Press the down arrow to begin another line of text Step 2 Select a symbol fr
277. se lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt to toggle between them Rough Cuts Stepover Amount of material removed by cutter during each pass around the pocket Rough Cuts Feedrate Speed at which cutter performs rough cuts Finish Pass Selects type of finish pass climb conventional or none at all Use lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt to toggle Finish Pass Amount Amount of material to be removed on the finish pass Finish Pass Feedrate Speed at which cutter performs finish pass Rectangular or Circular Frame Milling F7 in the Canned Cycle Menu When you press lt F7 gt Frame Milling from the Canned Cycle Selection Menu the following screen is displayed M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 26 Current Part TEST ICN N0040 Frame Frame Type 0 0000 5 0000 0 9000 Center Z 0 0000 0030 Circ Poc 0 0000 0 0000 0 9000 Xx 0 0000 Z x A Surface Height 1 0000 0050 End Prog 0 0000 0 0000 Home Length 0 0000 INC Width Ki 0 0000 INC Corner Radius 0 0000 Depth Total 1 0000 INC per Pass B 0 1000 Plunge Rate 1 0000 Plunge Type Ramped Plunge Angle 0 00 Cut Type Conventional Feedrate 1 0000 Depth Ny Pp Where Frame Type Selects Inside Rectangle Outside Rectangle Inside Circle and Outside Circle Press lt F3 gt or lt SPACE gt to toggle between them Center X and Y coordinates of the center of the frame mill Surface Height Z axis position from where each incremental depth is m
278. se YES if the current digitizing is not the first digitize run for the part If Yes is selected specify the name of a digitize file of a previous multiple patch Replay Pattern Indicates the replay movement pattern If ZIG ZAG is selected the replay pattern will alternate between positive and negative directions on each successive pass If ONE WAY is selected the replay pattern will maintain a constant one way direction throughout the playback M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 7 3 Grid Digitize Notes 1 A guide to the possible grid digitizing paths is as follows ZIG ZAG REPLAY PATTERN ONE WAY REPLAY PATTERN X INDICATES START POINT X INDICATES START POINT X PATCH LENGTH X PATCH LENGTH X PATCH LENGTH X PATCH LENGTH Y PATCH WIDTH Y PATCH WIDTH Y PATCHWIDTH Y PATCHWIDTH MOVE X FIRST MOVE Y FIRST MOVE X FIRST MOVE Y FIRST X PATCH LENGTH X PATCH LENGTH X PATCH LENGTH X PATCH LENGTH Y PATCH WIDTH Y PATCH WIDTH Y PATCHWIDTH Y PATCHWIDTH MOVE X FIRST MOVE Y FIRST MOVEX FIRST MOVEY FIRST a E He X PATCH LENGTH X PATCH LENGTH X PATCH LENGTH X PATCH LENGTH Y PATCH WIDTH Y PATCH WIDTH Y PATCH WIDTH Y PATCH WIDTH MOVE X FIRST MOVE FIRST WOVEX FIRST MOVE Y FIRST 4 4 HHH HHHH HHH X PATCH LENGTH X PATCH LENGTH X PATCH LENGTH X PATCH LENGTH Y PATCH WIDTH Y PATCH WIDTH Y PATCH WIDTH Y PATCH WIDTH MOVE X FIRST MOVE FIRST MOVEX FIRST WOVE Y FIRST wtt gt HHHH H H
279. ses motion to stop for the specified time The P parameter is used to specify the time in seconds to delay G4 causes the block to decelerate to a full stop The minimum delay is 0 01 seconds and the maximum is 327 67 seconds The dwell time is performed after all motion and M functions on the line If the P parameter is not specified X will be used instead If neither P nor X is specified the default dwell time of 0 01 seconds will be used Example GO XL Yl rapid to X1 Y1 G4 P2 51 pause for 2 51 seconds X2 Y2 G09 Exact stop G9 causes motion to decelerate to a stop G9 is equivalent to G4 P0 01 G9 is not modal it is only effective for the block in which it appears See G61 exact stop mode Example G9 GO X1 Y1 vapid to X1 Y1 and stop X2 Y2 continue to X2 Y2 G10 Parameter Setting G10 allows you to set parameters for different program operations M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 5 Examples G10 P73 R 05 Sets the peck drilling retract amount to 05 G10 P83 R 05 Sets the deep drill rapid down clearance to 05 G10 P81 R15 sets G81 to use M15 instead of Z movement G10 H5 R 1 3 Sets tool length offset 5 to 1 3 in the Offset Library G10 D3 R 25 Sets tool diameter offset 3 to 25 in the Offset Library G17 G18 G19 Circular Interpolation Plane Selection G17 G18 and G19 select the plane for circular interpolation c
280. sets certain faults if the fault condition has been fixed or cleared WARNING On some machines the Z or W axis will sometimes fall due to the lack of power Notes about operator panels The behavior of the control system in response to the functions listed above for the M Series jog panel is dependant upon optional software options the PLC program machine parameters and hardware wiring of the system It is possible that the functioning explained in this chapter does not apply to a particular control system or that it may differ in some aspects M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 14 5 Keyboard Jog Panel The keyboard may be used as a jog panel panel appears as shown below WCS 1 G54 Current Position Inches Dist to Go 0 0000 x Y 0 0000 2 0 0000 Press lt Alt J gt to display and enable the keyboard jog panel The jog Job Name TEST CNC Feedrate 120 Inc 0 0001 Spindle 0 A Slow Jog Processing Handuheel s released Processing Handwheel s engaged Press ESC to cancel For full functionality of the keyboard jog panel Keyboard must be selected as the console type in the Console Configuration menu The jog panel shows the mapping of keys to jogging functions Normally the keyboard performs menu navigation and data entry functions The keyboard can jog the axes only when the keyboard jog panel is displayed Ctrl and Alt functions are available for the most part even when the
281. sing G98 G74 using G99 G74 performs left hand tapping using a floating tap head The spindle speed and feedrate should be set and the spindle started in the CCW direction before issuing G74 By default G74 uses M3 to select spindle CW at the bottom of the hole and M4 to re select spindle CCW after backing out of the hole Alternate M functions may be specified by setting parameters G74 for CCW and G84 for CW The tap will continue to cut a short distance beyond the programmed Z height as the spindle comes to a stop before reversing When tapping blind holes be sure to specify a Z height slightly above the bottom of the hole to prevent the tool from reaching bottom before the spindle stops The exact distance you must allow will depend on your machine and the diameter and pitch of the tapping tool Note If rigid tapping is enabled a Q may be used to set the thread lead or pitch However because Q is not modal in the case of Rigid Tapping you must specify Q on every line at which Rigid Tapping is to occur WARNING Do not press FEED HOLD or CYCLE CANCEL while the tap is in the hole Example M4 S500 F27 78 start spindle CCW set up for 18 pitch tap G74 X1 Y1 R 1 Z 5 counter tap a 0 5 deep hole at X1 Y1 Y 1 5 j and another one at X1 Y1 5 G80 cancel canned cycles M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 20 G81 Drilling and Spot Drilling WAM Feedmove ___ Rapid move _ gt PO A Initial Point Oe
282. sition In G codes the 12 additional workpiece origins may be selected with either G54 P1 through G54 P12 or E7 through E18 G61 Exact stop mode G61 invokes the exact stop mode This forces deceleration to an exact stop at the end of each T block equivalent to G9 in each block G61 is modal and remains in effect until canceled with as G64 cutting mode eae _ Example GO X0 YO G61 X2 exact stop mode on decel to stop at X2 X4 move to X4 and stop X5 move to X5 and stop G64 Cutting mode continuous without exact stop G64 invokes cutting mode and cancels exact stop mode No exact stops are performed at the end of each block However acceleration and deceleration is still performed G64 is modal and remains in effect until exact stop mode G61 is selected Cutting mode is the default at the start of each program M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 12 Example GO X0 YO G64 X2 7 exact stop mode off no stop at X2 X4 continue to X4 without stop X5 continue to X5 without stop G65 Call Macro Optional G65 calls a macro with user specified values A macro is a subprogram that executes a certain operation e g drill pattern contours etc with values assigned to variable parameters within the operation Calling methods G65 Pxxxx Lrrrr Arguments or G65 program CNC Lrrrr Arguments Where xxxx is the macro number in file Oxxxx CNC 0000
283. spindle 1 Clear Bin Fi The definitions in the Tool Library associate tool T numbers with height offset H and diameter D numbers the default coolant type spindle direction and spindle speed for the tool and a text description of the tool This information is used by the Intercon programming package described in Chapter 10 to provide defaults whenever a tool change is selected For enhanced ATC features the T numbers are also associated with bin numbers See Chapter 15 for more information about enhanced ATC features parameter 160 Probe Clear All F2 Init Save F3 F10 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 4 4 Note If enhanced ATC features are not on the cursor cannot be moved into the bin column and the message Bin fields are locked will appear where the tool in spindle display is located In addition the F1 F2 and F3 keys only appear if enhanced ATC features are on You can inspect and change any of the 200 tool definitions To edit a Tool Library definition move to the desired tool number with the arrow keys lt Page Up gt lt Page Down gt lt HOME gt and lt END gt To change Height Offset numbers Diameter numbers default spindle speed values and the tool description type a new value into the field and then press lt ENTER gt To change the default spindle direction and coolant type press lt SPACE gt to cycle through the possible values When the changes are complete press
284. sured in seconds same as G04 F Sets the feed rate Remains the feedrate even after G80 cancel canned cycles K Sets the number of repeats for drilling cycles Operations 1 through 6 of figure 1 will be repeated K number of times If K is not specified K 1 K is only useful when using incremental positioning mode G91 and is not retained from cycle to cycle In absolute mode K causes the drilling of the same hole in the same position K times NOTE Canned cycles are modal and should be canceled with G80 However G00 G01 G02 and G03 will also cause the cancellation of canned cycles All parameters are stored until canned cycles are canceled except for the hole position and K which must be set each time the cycle is used When G80 is issued the movement mode will be the last one issued GO G1 G2 G3 Canned cycles will not be performed unless X and or Y is specified When performing canned cycle operations the distances can be either incremental or absolute depending on the current active mode G90 absolute G91 incremental Figure 2 illustrates canned cycle Z axis distances in both modes M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 17 MAA Teame Ee VVAV VV Initial Point Initial Point a gt o Workpiece i v R Workpiece y sissies Pot RTS a Z G90 Absolute Command G91 Incremental Command Figure 2 Canned Cycle Absolute and Incremental modes NOTE In incremental mode the Z depth of the hol
285. system For each axis you will see a graphic description of the parameters to be entered as well as the corresponding fields Setting up X or Y AXIS Set Part 0 Position 1 Select Axis with F1 2 Jog to Touch Off on Part 3 Edit the Value if Necessary 4 Press F10 to Set Position Axis Part Edge Finder Approach Position Diameter from X 0 0000 0 0000 Left Part Position enter the offset you want between the position of the edge finder and the desired position of the origin Edge Finder Diameter enter the diameter of the tool piece or edge finder you are using to determine the part zero The value entered is stored Approach From Toggle the direction the edge finder or probe is approaching the part from Setting up the Z AXIS Set Part 0 Position 1 Select Axis with F1 2 Jog to Touch Off on Part 3 Edit the Value if Necessary 4 Press F10 to Set Position Axis Part Tool Position Number Part Position enter the offset you want between the position of the edge finder and the desired position of the origin Tool Number enter the tool number from the Tool Library that corresponds to the tool being used When the Tool Number field is set to a value other than zero the controller uses the Height Offset for that tool from the Tool Library to calculate the actual position M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 3 2 Example 1 You are using the reference tool to find the Z axis part zero Set Tool Number to 0
286. systems are relative to Home position that is set during control power up Note that the DRO while in this screen shows the actual machine position relative to Home not the location relative to the WCS origin M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 3 6 Coordinate System Rotation CSR Coordinate System Rotation saves you time when setting up your part Rather than clamping your part and indicating the edge of the material to square it with the machine axes you can use CSR to automatically rotate the coordinate system to the angle of the part or fixture that was probed This allows you to compensate for different orientations Simply clamp your part then probe two points along either the X or Y axis of the material using the process described below WCS 1 G54 Current Position inches Job Name TEST CNC X 0 A 0 0 0 1 aaie Do Part Cnt 10 Spindle 0 Part 0 Y 0 0004 Feed Hold Off Z 40 0002 waiting tor PLC operation Stopped Coordinate System Rotation 1 Select orientation with F1 2 Position probe at one end of vise jaw 3 Enter distance to other end of jaw 4 Enter Z clearance amount incr from start 5 Select automatic or manual move to other end 6 Press CYCLE START to start Distance 1 0000 WCS 1 G54 Clearance Amount 0 5000 Movement Between Points Auto Zero Zero Prey Next WCS Orient Manual Cur all wes wcs Table Fl E2 E3 F4 F6 E E9 lt F1 gt is used select the orient
287. t M Series Operator s Manual Center X 3 0000 Y 0 0000 Surface Height 0 0000 Length X 0 7500 INC Width Y 0 4250 INC Corner Radius 0 1875 Depth Total 0 2500 INC Per Pass 0 2500 Plunge Rate 2 0000 Plunge Type Ramped Plunge Angle 0 00 Rough Cuts Conventional Stepover 0 1000 Feedrate 2 0000 Finish Pass None Amount 0 0000 Feedrate 2 0000 Accept Keep selected values Cutter Comp Hit lt Space gt until Left cutter compensation is selected The tool must move outside of the part outline at a distance at least equal to its radius so the part outline is the correct size Cutter compensation should be turned on before a rapid to maintain proper line and arc travel Accept Keep selected values Rapid G0 Move to a location outside the part The purpose of this move is to prepare to use cutter compensation on the tool End X 5 0000 Y 0 5000 Z 0 1000 Angle 14 04 Length 2 0616 Accept Keep selected values Arc G2 Mill up to the edge of the part to cut the first arc This is called a lead in move The cutter compensation selected above needs a lead in move in order to position the cutter before milling the actual part 3 2 04 10 63 N0110 Arc Arc Type EP amp R Mid xX Y Z End X 4 625 Y 0 0000 Z 0 0500 Center X Y Z Angle Radius 5 Plane XY Direction CCW Connect Radius 0 0000 Feedrate 10 0000 Angle lt 180 eee 6 You will see that after yo
288. t M7 only Both coolant systems 3 Flood Coolant M8 onl Parameter 9 Display Language This parameter determines what language will be used for menus prompts and error messages oO FSCS English Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese Parameter 10 Macro M function handling This parameter is a 4 bit field that controls various aspects of M functions The following table shows the functions performed by the value entered in this parameter The default value is 0 Function Description Parameter Value o Display M amp G codes in M function macros Yes 1 No 0 Step through M function macros in Block Yes 2 No 0 Mode Brushless motor option Decelerate smoothly Yes 4 No 0 to stop pause on M105 and M106 Digitizing and Probing moves Yes means decelerate smoothly Choosing yes takes more time on each probing move and is slightly less accurate No means hard stop No is faster and slightly more accurate but can cause excessive vibration on brushless systems Move to Z home on M6 No 8 Yes 0 Parameters 11 17 Touch Probe Parameters These parameters control touch probe and tool detector operation See Chapter 8 for more information Parameter 18 PLC Input Inhibit Parameter M39 and M400 only This parameter stores the input for the control s PLC I O unit for the Spindle Inhibit feature A positive value must be entered if a normally closed probe is to
289. t Soln F2 Copy gt gt gt F Prey Prey Soln Solver F1 F The screen will show UNKNOWN if the value of each parameter is not known Math Help waits for known values to be entered where Point a b or c is the coordinate value for each corner of the triangle Angle A B or C is the angle at each point of the triangle Length of values are the distances between the points indicated Ki Next Copy raphic All Solver KK On Off F3 E5 E E9 Continue adding all the known parameters Select parameters using the arrow soft keys When Math Help solves the remaining unknown values the screen will display them M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 44 F3 Tangent Line Arc Intercon Mill v8 00 Current Part BUGCO3 ICN N0020 Linear Line Tangent Arc Circle X 0 000 Y 0 000 Radius 1 000 Line X 4 000 nee 0 000 Tangent X 0 250 Y 0 968 C1 LP Solution 1 of 2 1 Prev Next Clear Prev Next Hide Copy Copy Graphic Soln Soln All Solver Solver Math KK gt gt On Off Fi F2 E F E E6 E FB E9 Given the center C1 and radius of an arc and 1 point LP on a line find the lines tangent to the arc defined by the tangent point T1 You must enter the X and Y coordinates for the circle s center point the circle s radius and the X and Y coordinates for a point on the line F4 Tangent Arc Arc Intercon
290. t 0 5000 INC Rapid To Depth 0 1000 INC Depth Total 0 5100 INC Plunge Rate 2 0000 M Dwell Time 0 0000 Number of holes 5 Radius 0 9250 Start angle 45 00 Accept Keep selected values Tool M6 Use a 1 0000 x 0 2500 inch cutter now Notice that the tool M Series Operator s Manual height shown below is a negative value This value represents the difference in height between this tool and the longest tool being used The longest tool used in this case operation N0020 above has a height of 0 0000 Again do not be alarmed if the Tool Height is not 1 for operation N0040 If this tool does not have the desired spindle CW and coolant Flood settings you should also enter values specific to your machine setup 3 2 04 10 60 N0040 Tool change Tool Number 2 Description Tool 2 H002 D002 Position X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Tool H Offset 2 Tool Height your tool Tool D Offset 2 Tool Diameter 0 2500 Spindle Speed 1000 Spindle Direction CW M3 Coolant Type Flood M8 Actual Tool Change Yes F10 Accept Keep selected values F5 Cycle Access the list of available canned cycles F6 C Pckt Start with 1 2000 inch diameter Pocket N0050 Circular pocket Center X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Surface Height 0 0000 Diameter 1 2000 Cleanout Yes Depth Total 0 5100 INC Per Pass 0 2500 Plunge Rate 2 0000 M Plunge Type Ramped Plunge Angle 0 00 G Rough Cuts Conventional Stepover 0 2000 Feedrate 2 0000 M Finish
291. t cursor line and column the current typing mode Insert Overwrite a modified message if the file has been modified since the last time is was saved and the name of file currently being edited Below is a sample editing screen M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 2 7 EAGLE2 DIG ie full size DONOT remove any colons from any g51 digitized area full size x25 8 y 21 45 1 4 ball endmill digitized area 603 size x15 56 y5 427 2 874 5 32 ball endmill 3951 x y z p 603 digitized area half size x12 9 y4 5 27 25 1 8 ball endmill 3951 x y826 p 500 digitized area 375 size x 675 y 3 375 2 544 3732 ball endmill 3951 x y z p 375 sdigitized area x8 166 y3 750 2 566 1 8 ball endmill 3951 x y z 1 3146 j 417 k 344 gigitized area x 675 y3 375 2 4375 g51 x y8 26 1 375 j 375 k 36172 m3s4266 M25 G X6 6666 Y6 6666 NO DATA g43 h47 2 166 m8 Gi F5 6666 6 6666 Y6 6666 Z 1 4566 25 8666 Y6 6666 Z 1 4566 Fi6 6 25 8666 Y6 6266 Z 1 4566 46 6666 Y 6266 Z i 4500 F25 Pressing the lt F1 gt key will display a complete list of editor functions and the key s that activate them Press any key to return to editor screen Editor Functions The following table contains a list of all available editor functions the keys that activate them and brief descriptions of their effects Insert Typeover mode Insert Typeover cursor is an underline insert cursor is a block Move cursor left right up Arrows down Home
292. t is probed M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 3 8 CHAPTER 4 Tool Setup F2 from Setup Tool Setup allows you to specify information about the tools you will be using Press lt F1 gt to edit the Offset Library Height Offset and Diameter H and D values or lt F2 gt to edit the Tool Library tool descriptions Offset Library The Offset Library file contains the values for the Height Offset and Diameter Numbers For example if entry HO1 has a value of 25 a height offset of 25 is applied when height offset 01 is referenced If entry D01 shows a value of 1 5 the diameter offset 01 has a diameter of 1 5 associated with it YCS 1 G54 Current Position inches Job Name F CNC 0 a 0 0 0 0 U e Spindle 0 0 0 0 0 0 Feed Hold Off 0 e 0 0 0 0 edie Re ee St d 0 0000 Offset Library Height Offset Diameter HO 0 D001 00 WN lt lt S ss Ss nn ofS Ofer ane aa Sap ga aeaa oD os ss nn cococeosc Height Offset er x Z Ref 0 0000 Z Ref Manual Auto Batch 001 001 ATC Save Cancel F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F F10 ESC Press lt F1 gt to set the Z reference height Press lt F2 gt to manually measure tools If you purchased the Tool Length Probing option press lt F3 gt to automatically measure tool lengths Press lt F5 gt or lt F6 gt to adjust the selected offset If you have an automatic tool changer installed press lt F7 gt
293. t move the corresponding X and Y coordinates for the destination will be calculated and placed in the correct fields The Z destination will remain unchanged however Length The length of the linear mill When combined with the angle of the current move the corresponding X and Y coordinates for the destination will be calculated and placed in the correct fields The Z destination will remain unchanged however Connect Radius If you are performing two linear mill operations and you wish to have a rounded corner between them instead of a sharp peak you may enter the radius of the corner and Intercon will insert an arc between the linear mill operations This connect radius also works for blending a line into an arc operation Feedrate Speed at which the cutter moves The feedrate can be toggled to modal fixed or slave this is indicated by the symbol beside the feedrate field If the feedrate is modal then it will have the M symbol or if it is fixed it will have the F symbol shown below The slave feedrate has no symbol and is set to the last modal feedrate set in the program when the modal feedrate changes all the following slave feedrates change until the next modal feedrate is encountered If you have a fourth axis installed and it is rotary additional fields are shown for Linear Mill operations after the feedrate field This screen is illustrated above Degrees The number of degrees you want to move the rotary axis This
294. t to X4 1 to clear material G40 Turn cutter compensation off GOX5Y0 Rapid to X5 YO You may want to add 1 or 05 inches on the final position for the last cut to clear the material e NOTE The diameter compensation statement G42 is placed before GO X 5 Y2 As a result the compensation is applied before the cutter reaches the starting cutting point X 5 Y2 2 If the cutter is down then the cutter compensation lead in must always come from an appropriate direction Otherwise the workpiece will be incorrectly cut and the cutter tool could be damaged One way to avoid this problem is by always keeping the cutter above the workpiece whenever a transition is being made to a new starting cutting point If for some reason this was not possible then the G code program should be written so that the cutter compensation lead in paths do not interfere with the space occupied by the workpiece Example 2 illustrates a possible harmful outcome of programming an inappropriate lead in direction M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 8 Example 2 WRONG WAY soos gt Compensated tool center path gt Programmed path R 1 2 of the tool diameter 1 2 of D offset xo S D eee ee cence cece ec ecesncscecenscececesnncsncoesscees X3 5Y 1 2 GO X0YO G42 D5 GI Xe T5Y 1I FS X3 6 G40 GO X4Y 2 NOTE This problem could have been avoided by selecting a transitional point between XO YO and X 75 Y 1 A transitional
295. temperature detected Drive overtemp sensor tripped No motor power Wait for drive to cool and cycle start M Series Operator s Manual 445 446 Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed _ axis overcurrent detected Overcurrent detected on axis No motor power Check motor power connection and cycle start _ axis synchronization failure Communication CheckSum error No motor power Check fiber optic cable CNC syntax errors 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect Removed Message Cause Effect 3 2 04 Invalid character on line NNNNN Invalid character on CNC line Job canceled Start of new job Invalid G code on line NNNNN Invalid G code encountered on CNC line Job canceled Start of new job Invalid M function on line NNNNN Invalid M function encountered on CNC line Job canceled Start of new job Invalid parameter on line NNNNN Invalid or missing number after letter Job canceled Start of new job Invalid value on line NNNNN Value out of range T H D Job canceled Start of new job Only 1 M code per line More than one M code appears on the line Job canceled
296. tepover 0 1950 Feedrate gt 30 0000 Finish Pass Climb Amount 0 0200 Feedr ate 30 0000 Abs Math Teach Inc Help Graph Node pccert Fl Fa Fa Fg F10 The parameters on the screen correspond to the following dimensions Corner Radius Surface Height Where Center X and Y coordinates of the center of the RECTANGULAR POCKET Surface Height Z axis position from which each incremental depth is measured Length X axis dimension of the rectangular pocket Width Y axis dimension of the rectangular pocket Corner Radius Radius of curvature of the corners It cannot be smaller than the current cutter radius Depth Total Total depth of the rectangular pocket Depth Per Pass Depth of each individual pass Depth Plunge Rate Z axis speed of descent M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 24 Depth Plunge Type Straight or Ramped Straight plunge does a vertical Z plunge with no X Y movement Ramped plunge does a zigzag plunge limited by the Plunge Angle entered below Depth Plunge Angle The maximum limit angle allowed for a ramped plunge A special value of 0 means that there is no limit angle Note that this field means nothing if the Plunge Type is Straight Rough Cuts Selects type of rough cut conventional or climb Use lt SPACE gt to toggle between them Rough Cuts Stepover Amount of material removed by cutter during each pass around the pocket Rough Cuts Feedrate Spe
297. ter point With Parameter 123 set to 0 When the probe encounters an unexpected probe contact the digitizing program stops data collection The control then prompts the operator to jog the probe to a clear position This can be any place inside the digitizing radius and above the part that the probe stylus has a clear path to the defined center position To restart data collection press Cycle Start The probe moves in the XY plane from the position the operator placed it to the center position defined in the radial setup menu After reaching the center position the probe will feed down to the Z axis position it was at when the data collection was interrupted The digitizing run will resume with the probe approaching from the defined center position With Parameter 123 set to 1 When the probe encounters an unexpected probe contact it will automatically move with probe detection turned off to the maximum Z height then moves the X and Y axis to the defined center position The probe will then move to the Z position it was at when the unexpected contact occurred It will Then move from the defined center position towards the measurement position it was trying to approach when the unexpected probe contact occurred and continue digitizing With Parameter 123 set to 2 When the probe encounters an unexpected probe contact it will automatically move back to the defined center position with probe detection turned off at its present Z height It will
298. the Set Part 0 Position screen M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 8 3 F3 Slot Press lt F3 gt to enter the Slot screen A picture similar to the ones shown will appear along with instructions 1 Press lt F1 gt to select the orientation of the probe with respect to the Slot Slowly jog the probe to the approximate position shown in the picture During this jog make sure you have enough space between the probe and the part 3 Press lt F10 gt to begin the probing cycle Once the cycle is finished the probe will be located at the center of the slot Press lt ESC gt to return to the Set Part 0 Position screen F4 Web Press lt F4 gt to enter the Web screen A picture similar to the following will appear with instructions and two input fields Follow these steps 1 Press lt F1 gt to select the orientation of the probe with respect to the Web You will see one of the screens shown below 2 Slowly jog the probe to the approximate position shown in the picture During this jog be sure to give enough space between the probe and the part 3 Enter the approximate Web width 4 Highlight the Z clearance value using the up or down arrow key Enter approximate distance the probe has to travel in order to lift up over the Web Press lt F10 gt to start the probing cycle Once the probe has completed its search it will automatically position to the center line of the web Press lt ESC gt to return to the Set Part
299. the Z axis is commanded to move in the direction all axes but the Z axis will move to their new position along a straight line then the Z axis will move down to its new position Example GO X0 0 YO 0 20 0 NOTE GO moves are only affected by the feedrate override knob if rapid override AUX1 is ON M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 12 2 G01 Linear Interpolation G1 moves to the specified position at the programmed feedrate The coordinates may be either ___ absolute positions G90 or incremental positions G91 The movement will be along a straight line G1 is modal and remains in effect until another positioning mode G0 G2 G3 etc is commanded Example G01 X2 Y3 Z74 W5 F10 G91 X6 Y7 Z3 W4 F20 G02 amp G03 Circular Or Helical Interpolation AN N G2 moves in a clockwise circular motion and G3 moves in a counterclockwise circular motion This clockwise and counterclockwise motion is relative to your point of view however See the diagram below The X Y or Z position specified in the G2 or G3 command is the end position of the arc and may be an absolute position G90 or an incremental position G91 G2 and G3 are modal and remain in effect until another positioning mode GO G1 etc is commanded Y Z Z Z G2 G3 G2 gi X X G3 X X Y VE G19 G17 G18 View facing machine View facing machine View facing machine looking Z looking Y looking X NOTE When using G18 the G2 command moves i
300. the arc labeled ARC 2 in Figure 3 this radius is 3 1500 inches Set the direction to CCW Arc type Mid End Center Angle Radius Plane Direction Feedrate Angle lt EP amp R 0 7496 1 0003 0 0500 N XNKKXNKX 3 1500 XY CCW 10 0000 180 Yes Accept Arc G2 amp G3 Move Cursor Math Help Graphic On Off Next Soln M Series Operator s Manual Keep selected values The third arc to be cut is labeled as ARC 3 in Figure 3 The start point is labeled P2 the end point of the previous arc The end point of the arc will be generated with Math Help N0140 Arc Move down to the End X field This selects End X as the destination of the Math Help solution Redisplay the Math Help values calculated for the last arcs Redisplays the diagram of the scenario selected to calculate arcs 1 and 2 on Figure 3 Continue pressing F1 until you arrive at the scenario showing arcs 3 and 4 in Figure 3 in this case solution 1 is the appropriate one 3 2 04 10 69 Intercon Mill v8 00 Arc Tangent Arcs Circle 1 X 4 0000 Y 0 0000 Radius 0 6250 Circle 2 x 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Radius 1 2500 Circle 3 X 2 6387 Y 3 5210 Radius 3 1500 Tangent 1 A 3 7746 Y 0 5829 Tangent 2 X 0 7496 Y 1 0003 Solution 1 of 8 Current Part C_ROD ICN N0140 Arc T2 Prev Next Clear Prev Next Hide Copy Copy Graphic Soln Soln All Solver Solver Math lt
301. the value the more accurately the Z axis will land on target but at the expense of possibly stalling the spindle motor which in turn will cause Z to fall short If this value is too large the off target error increases The suggested starting value is 100 RPM Parameter 69 Duration for Minimum Spindle Speed Mode This is the duration of time in seconds that the control will stay at minimum spindle speed If the number is too small overshoot will occur If the number is too large the user waits longer for the hole to be tapped at the slow speed specified by parameter 68 The suggested starting value is 1 25 seconds Parameter 70 Offset Library Inc Decrement Amount Sets the increment and decrement amount used in the offset library Parameter 71 Part Setup Detector Height If this Parameter is set to a non zero value it indicates that the F3 Auto feature in part setup should be available using the tool detector TT1 instead of the probe The value in this parameter is the height of the detector A value of 0 disables this feature When this feature is enabled a Probe detection Parameter 18 is not checked b The tool number and or edge finder diameter entered by the operator are used Parameter 12 is ignored c The value from Parameter 71 is added to or subtracted from depending on approach direction the part position Parameter 72 Data M Function Options The setting of this parameter affects the operation of the data
302. to list files on the floppy drive Make sure that the files on the floppy disk are CNC files You can select the ones you want to import with lt F1 gt or select all of them with lt F2 gt and then accept them with lt F10 gt The selected files will then be copied from the floppy drive to the Controller s hard drive F2 Export Press lt F2 gt to list CNC files on the Controller s hard drive You can select the ones you want to export with lt F1 gt and then accept them with lt F10 gt The selected files will then be copied from the Controller s hard drive to the floppy drive F3 View Press lt F3 gt to list CNC files on the Controller s hard drive You can select the one you want to view with lt F10 gt or lt ENTER gt The first 19 lines of the file will be displayed When you are done viewing the file press lt ESC gt F4 Delete Press lt F4 gt to list CNC files on the Controller s hard drive You can select the ones you want to delete with lt F1 gt and then proceed with lt F10 gt The selected files will then be deleted from the Controller s hard drive E5 Dig gt CAD Press lt F5 gt to list Digitize data files on the Controller s hard drive see Chapter 12 You can select the ones you want to translate to Mastercam s spline format with lt F1 gt Accept your selection with lt F10 gt The selected files will then be translated and placed in the CAD directory specified in PATHM INI The translated files will hav
303. u lt F4 gt Drill Repeat allows the user to repeat a set of single holes with a different type drilling boring or tapping operation with out re entering the X Y coordinates M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 12 The bolt hole circle and array patterns are explained graphically in the following figure Start X Y Center Radius Bolt Hole Circle Canned Cycle Introduction 2 Linear Repetition Of Operations Drilling Boring Tappin If you want to perform one operation several times in a linear pattern simply define Position X Y or both as incremental values To do this use the lt F1 gt Change positioning mode function This key will toggle the Position value mode between incremental and absolute If you define X and or Y as incremental values a new field will appear asking for the number of holes Intercon Mill v8 11 Current Part E_2_PART ICN Operation End N0070 Drill Type xX Y Z 0010 Demo Program Cycle Type Drilling 0020 Rapid 0 0000 5 0000 0 1000 Position X 4 0000 INC 0030 Rapid 4 0000 2 0000 1 0000 Y 8 0000 INC 0040 Line 7 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Surface Height 0 1000 0050 Arc CW 10 0000 3 0000 1 0000 Clearance Height 0 1000 INC 0060 Tool 1 0 0000 0 0000 Home Rapid to Depth 0 1000 INC 0070 Drill Depth Total 0 5000 INC 0080 End Prog 0 0000 0 0000 Home Plunge Rate 20 0000 Dwell Time H Number of Holes 5 Math Help F6 Graph i FB F9 cent F10
304. u enter in these values the other points and arcs will be entered in automatically F10 Accept Keep selected values F3 Arc G2 amp G3 The first arc to be cut is labeled as ARC 1 in Figure 3 below The start point labeled P1 is the end point of the previous move The end point of the arc will be generated with Math Help We will be using end point and radius EP amp R arcs ARC 4 P4 3 1500 R ARCS PS J 0 6250 R 253 69 0000 4 0 0 0 222 28 PL S TA ARC 1 We 0 6250 R t FS ARC 2 3 1500 R ARC 3 1 2500 R FIG 3 Tangent point and arc reference M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 10 64 N0120 Arc Arc type EP amp R Mid xX Y Z End X 4 6250 Y 0 0000 Z 0 0500 Center X Y Z Angle Radius gt 625 Plane XY Direction CW Connect Radius 0 0000 Feedrate 10 0000 Angle lt 180 Yes F6 Math Help We are trying to find end points for the arcs that make up the outside edge of the part Note the main Math Help menu should appear listing all available Math Help solvers If it does not appear press lt Esc Cancel gt F6 Tangent Arc Arc Arc This scenario will generate tangent points P2 P5 of Figure 3 Enter the values as shown below Arc Tangent Arcs Circle 1 CPX 4 0000 Y 0 0000 Radius 0 6250 Circle 2 CPX 0 0000 Y 0 0000 Radius 1 2500 Radius 3 1500 Intercon will calculate the missing values for this scenario F2 Next Soln Find scenario that correspo
305. ult by entering a Y or canceling the job by pressing some other key 5 A tool change is not performed if the requested tool is already in the spindle 6 An M107 command sends the bin number for the specified tool number not the tool number M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 15 24 7 For random types tool changes in Intercon are posted as a tool change Tnn M6 followed by a pre fetch command for the next tool in the program Tn2 M107 This allows the PLC program to rotate the tool carousel to the next tool while a job continues with the current tool 8 For random types a job search for a tool number will look for lines of the form Tnn M6 i e the search bypasses lines of the form Tnn M107 which are just pre fetch commands 9 The tool library allows editing of the bin fields to specify which carousel bin number the tools are stored in Parameter 161 ATC Maximum Tool Bins This parameter sets the number of tool changer bins carousel positions used with the enhanced ATC option described above PLC programs are responsible for reading this value The tool library interface uses this parameter to validate bin fields and perform initialization of the bin fields Parameters 166 5 Axis Properties This parameter sets the axis properties for the 5 axis See parameters 91 94 for more information Parameters 170 179 XPLC Parameters These parameters are accessed by the XPLC through LPO LP9 commands Please see the
306. umbers of any Home Switches you may have These are similar to the limit switches If your machine does not have home switches this field should be set to the Limit Switch value If no home or limit switch is installed this field should be set to 0 You may then use hard stops as homing points if you choose NOTE The Home Switch should never be physically located beyond the Limit Switch Direction reversed Used to match the reference of your machine to the control electronics Toggle this value if you actually move in the X direction reverse when you jog X Screw Compensation This value indicates whether mapping ballscrew compensation is enabled When enabled a preset ballscrew map compensates for error along the entire ballscrew For more information contact your dealer It is recommended you enable ballscrew error compensation at all times F3 Find Home Press lt F3 gt to move an axis to its plus or minus home switch F4 Set Home Press lt F4 gt to set Machine Home for an axis at its current position This is usually performed after Find Home This operation should not be used to set the part zero position To set the part zero position use the Part Setup screen F5 Manual Ballscrew Compensation This option lets you edit the ballscrew compensation tables WARNING The ballscrew compensation tables should not be changed without contacting your dealer Corrupt or incorrect values could adversely affect the
307. uppress direction check when doing Tool oa t Check 4 Check 0 aon Suppress park function Don t Park 8 Park 0 NOT USED ON MILL Po Linear Display of Rotary Axis lingar Display 32 Default Rotary Notes on Bit 0 Turning this bit on will cause the DRO display for he affected axis to be displayed in degrees Also this information is used by Intercon to make rotary axis support available by setting parameter 94 to 1 indicating that the fourth axis is rotary This bit is also used when performing inch mm conversions values for a rotary axis will not be converted since they are assumed to be in degrees regardless of the system of linear units Notes on Bit 1 This bit has no effect unless Bit 0 mentioned above is turned on When this bit is turned on a Wrap Around display is shown on the DRO A Wrap Around Rotary Display is a display in degrees without the number of rotations shown If this bit is turned off the number of rotations away from 0 degrees will be shown alongside the degree display Notes on Bit 2 This bit will only affect the Z axis It controls whether or not a direction check will be performed when the Tool Check button is pressed If this bit is turned on direction checking is turned off and thus there is a possibility for the Z axis to move downward unexpectedly depending on the Z value of Return Point 1 G28 Therefore it is best in most cases to leave this bit turned off to allow direction checking
308. wise until it stops Turn the knob clockwise to resume drawing F9 Digitize Press lt F9 gt to bring up the Digitize screen This screen allows you to set up and run touch probe digitizing See Chapter 7 for a detailed description of the digitizing operation F10 Park Press lt F10 gt to park the machine at the end of the day for quicker machine homing at startup Once lt F10 gt is selected The Cycle Start key must be press to start machine movement The park feature homes each axis at the maximum rate to 4 motor revolution from its home position The Z axis is moved first then all the other axis are done CYCLE START or START Press this key to run a job from this screen ALT S The lt ALT S gt option is for those operators who have no Jog Panel Pressing lt ALT S gt is the same as pressing the CYCLE START button on the operator panel See Chapter 15 for a description of the CYCLE START button Canceling and Resuming Jobs The control provides several ways for the operator to cancel jobs in progress The control also allows the operator several ways to resume a canceled job The information in this section does not apply to digitizing Canceling a Job in Progress There are three conventional ways to cancel a currently running job CNC program When a job is canceled using any of the following methods the job s progress will be recorded This allows the user to restart the job using the Resume Job option or the Search and
309. xis DRO display will read 0 125 This means the center of the Edge Finder is sitting to the left minus of the part by 0 125 inches half of the Edge Finder Diameter This value is computed by Position Approach from Edge Finder Diameter 2 Where Approach from is the sign of the approach direction In other words if the approach direction is minus then the value is Position Edge Finder Diameter 2 0 0 25 2 0 125 M Series Operator s Manual 3 2 04 3 4 Example 2 X Axis origin offset into part 1 inch Edge Finder i ee 25 diameter lt 1 gt lt Desired X axis Origin If you wanted the origin offset 1 inch into the part 1 Move the Edge Finder to the left edge of the part 2 Press lt F1 gt until the axis field displays X 3 Move the cursor to the Position field 4 Type 1 and press lt ENTER gt 5 Type 25 and press lt ENTER gt 6 Press lt SPACE gt until Left is displayed 7 Press lt F10 gt to accept the value Axis Position Edge Finder Approach Diameter from X 1 0 25 Left The Position value is relative to the current position of the Edge Finder Position equals 1 0 since the Edge Finder is positioned 1 inch to the left minus direction of where you want the X axis origin Another way to view the Position value is to assume the origin is already set at 1 inch into the part In this case the Edge Finder would have to move 1 inches from wher
310. y the longest tool and highlight its corresponding Height Offset using the up or down arrow keys Press lt F1 gt then lt F3 gt and then CYCLE START to set the Z reference using this tool The X and Y axes will traverse to the preset location then Z will move down until the tool is detected and the Z reference will be set Load the next tool Highlight the desired Height Offset on screen using the up or down arrow keys Press lt F3 gt and then CYCLE START The X and Y axes will traverse to the preset location then Z will move down until the tool is detected Once the detector is triggered the tool offset will show on the screen A negative offset means the tool is shorter than the reference tool Once all of the tool offsets have been measured press lt F10 gt to save them Otherwise press lt ESC gt to cancel any changes Tool Library WCS 1 G54 Current Position inches Job Name ISLANDS CNC X 0 0000 Feedrate i200 Spindle 0 N 0 0000 Feed Hold Off aang for PLC operation Z 0 0000 i ohvinisHed Stopped Tool Library Tool Bin Ht Dia Coolant Spindle Speed Description T001 MA H001 D001 FLOOD cu 350 325 end mill T002 002 H002 D002 FLOOD cu 1200 T003 003 H003 D003 FLOOD cu 550 T004 004 H004 D004 FLOOD Cw 1234 T005 005 H005 D005 OFF OFF 0 T006 006 H006 D006 OFF OFF 0 TOO 00 HOO DOO OFF OFF 0 T008 008 H008 D008 OFF OFF 0 T009 009 H009 D009 DFF OFF 0 T010 010 H010 D010 OFF OFF 0 Tool in

Centroid v8.22 (DOS) Mill Operator`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents